®

Hardware User Manual

EA-USER-M
 ®

HARDWARE USER MANUAL

Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.

Manual Number: EA-USER-M

Issue: 2nd Edition Rev. H
Issue Date: 05/18

Publication History
Issue Date Description of Changes
First Edition 11/05 Original
Rev. A 01/06 Added chapters and content.
Rev. B 04/06 Added chapters 7-9 and appendix B.
Rev. C 08/07 Added AB EtherNet/IP, minor corrections, and content added.
Second Edition 02/08 Added Recipe backup/restore, Omron Ethernet & Siemens
Rev. A 07/08 Added Mitsubishi drivers, minor corrections
Rev. B 10/08 Added CLICK and Siemens S7-200 Ethernet drivers.
Rev. C 04/09 Added tightening torque, battery note, enclosure and environment specs. Added
Remote Access feature. Added EA-CF-CARD.
Rev. D 10/09 Added EA7-T6CL-R and EA7-T6CL
Rev. E 07/10 Revised Chemical Compatibility table. Added P3000, added USB troubleshooting.
minor corrections
Rev. F 05/11 Added new replacement bulbs
Rev. G 08/14 Revised cable diagrams, Added Log File Naming. Added CSA approval information
Rev. H 05/18 Revised PLC compatibility tables
 ~ WARNING ~
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national
codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area
and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and
to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable
codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for
your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or
operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as
on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2005-2018, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.
 ~ ADVERTENCIA ~
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo
de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta
publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.
Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad
locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de
área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser
seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente
de estos códigos.
Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico,
y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de
normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una
instalación y operación segura.
Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones serias a
personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados para su aplicación
en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la instalación u operación.
Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso
o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas,
tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de
tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede
resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos (“Actividades de Alto
Riesgo”). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada
para actividades de alto riesgo.
Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos
y Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o
si necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.
Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.
com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el
derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin
ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas
revisiones del producto.

Marcas Registradas
Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las
compañías y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com,
renuncia cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2005-2018, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED
Todos los derechos reservados
No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito
de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en
este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo
correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.
 ~ AVERTISSEMENT ~
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.com®, en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une
région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et
de vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la
plus récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer
les codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de
l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente
en tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue,
par exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le
contrôle de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du
produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux
(«activités à risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à
l’emploi en ce qui a trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de cet
équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
770-844-4200.
Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous
nous réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni
quelque obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne
pas être offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.

Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à
leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2005-2018, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
Tous droits réservés
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le
consentement préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les
droits exclusifs à l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.
Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
Conventions Used. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Mounting Clips – New Style. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–4
Part Number Key – Touch Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
EZTouch Conversion and Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–7
Quick Start Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
Step 2 – Assemble Temporary Support Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–10
Step 3 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–11
Step 4 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–12
Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–13
Step 6 – Connect Touch Panel to Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–14
Step 7 – Provide Power to the Touch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–15
Step 8 – Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–16
Step 9 – Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–17
Step 10 – Connect Touch Panel to PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–20

Chapter 2: Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Available Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
Model Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
6” Base Feature Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–4
6” Full Feature Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
6” Obsolete Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Table of Contents

8” and 10” Full Feature Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8

12” and 15” Full Feature Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL
(Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
EA7-T8C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
EA7-T10C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
EA7-T12C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
EA7-T15C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–18
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–20
Communications Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–21
Audio WAV File Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–23
Memory Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–24
Handling External Memory Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–25
Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Data Logging Function and Logging Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Data Logging - Memory Device Full. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–26
Chemical Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–27

Chapter 3: Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
Accessories Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
Accessories at a Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
AC/DC Power Adapter – EA-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Expansion Assembly – EA-EXP-OPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
CF Card Interface Module – EA-CF-IF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–12
CompactFlash Memory – EA-CF-CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
6” Adapter Plate – EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–17
D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter – EA-ADPTR-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter – EA-COMCON-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–20
Non-glare Screen Covers – EA-xx-COV2, xx = 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–22

ii
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Table of Contents
Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Safety Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL – Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . 4–4
EA7-T8C – Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
EA7-T10C – Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
EA7-T12C – Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
EA7-T15C – Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
6” Adapter Plate – EA-6-ADPTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
Mounting Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Agency Approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Marine Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Providing Power to the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
DC Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
AC Wiring Diagram (EA-AC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Chapter Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
System Setup Screens – Enable Password in Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
System Setup Screens Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
Main Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
Information Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
Setting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–19
Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–25
Memory Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–35

iii
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
Table of Contents

Chapter 6: PLC Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–10
Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON:. . . . . . . . . . . 6–16
Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–17
RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–18
Allen-Bradley:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–22
GE:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
GE VersaMax Micro:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
Mitsubishi:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–27
Omron: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–29
Modicon ModBus RS-232:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
Modicon Micro Series:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
Modicon ModBus with RJ45:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–30
Siemens:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–31

Chapter 7: Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

Project Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Check Operating Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Check Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Check Status Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
Check Physical Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
Run Tests under System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Check Error Log via System Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Replace Battery Periodically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5

iv
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Table of Contents

Cleaning the Display Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5

Check Project Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
Checks from C-more Programming Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1

Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Toubleshooting Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Touch Panel does not Power up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
Display is Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
Display is Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
No User Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via USB. . . . . . 8–8
USB Driver Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via Ethernet. 8–12
No Communications between Panel and PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
Difficulty Connecting to the Panel over the Internet
(Web server and Remote Access features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
PLC Protocol Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
Touch Panel Runtime Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–22
Panel Constantly Displays “Initializing” when Powering up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–23
Data not Logging Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–23
Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24
Electrical Noise Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24

Chapter 9: Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

Replacement Parts Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Replacement Parts at a Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
Battery Replacement & Installation Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
6” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5

v
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
Table of Contents

8-15” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6

DC Panel Power Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
8-15” Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–8
6-15” Panel Gasket Replacement & Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–11
8-15” Panel Bezel Replacement & Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–12
6” Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement & Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–14

Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–3
DirectLOGIC – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol – PLC Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–5
Modbus Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
AutomationDirect CLICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC - Modbus (Koyo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
Modicon Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
Entivity Modbus RTU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol – PLC Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–6
Productivity3000 Error Code P499. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–7
Allen-Bradley – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–8
Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols – PLC Error Code Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–9
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol –Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 and 498
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–11
Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code TablesControlLogix,
CompactLogix, & FlexLogix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–12
Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code TablesMicroLogix 1100, 1400
& SLC 5/05, both via native Ethernet port;MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500,
SLC 5/03/04/05, all via ENI Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–16
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol – PLC Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–21
GE 90-30 – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–22

vi
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Table of Contents

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–23

Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–32
Omron – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–32
Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–33
Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–34
Omron – Panel Error Code P495 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–37
Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–38
Siemens – Panel Error Code P499 Explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A–39
Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–40
Siemens ISO over TCP Protocol – PLC Error Code Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A–41

Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B–2
Runtime Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B–3

Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–1

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C–2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C & T6C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C–3
EA7-T8C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C–5
EA7-T10C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C–7
EA7-T12C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C–9
EA7-T15C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C–11

Index

vii
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter
Getting Started
1
In this Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................................................ 1-2
Conventions Used....................................................................................................... 1-3
Mounting Clips – New Style....................................................................................... 1-3
Product Overview....................................................................................................... 1-4
Part Number Key – Touch Panels............................................................................... 1-5
EZTouch Conversion and Mounting.......................................................................... 1-6
EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more..................................................... 1-7
Quick Start Steps........................................................................................................ 1-9
Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect..................................................................................... 1-9
Step 2 – Assemble Temporary Support Stand.......................................................... 1-10
Step 3 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories........................................................ 1-11
Step 4 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports............................... 1-12
Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project.......................... 1-13
Step 6 – Connect Touch Panel to Computer........................................................... 1-14
Step 7 – Provide Power to the Touch Panel............................................................. 1-15
Step 8 – Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens...................................................... 1-16
Step 9 – Choose Touch Panel to Device Protocol & Cables..................................... 1-17
Step 10 – Connect Touch Panel to PLC................................................................... 1-20
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Introduction
1 The Purpose of this Manual
Thank you for purchasing our C-more® Touch Panel family of products. This manual describes
2 AutomationDirect.com’s C-more Touch Panels, their specifications, included components,
available accessories and provides you with important information for installation, connectivity
3 and setup. The manual shows you how install, wire and use the products. It also helps you
understand how to interface the panels to other devices in a control system.

4 This user manual contains important information for personnel who will install the touch
panels and accessories, and for the personnel who will be programming the panel. If you
understand control systems that make use of operating interfaces such as the C-more touch
5 panels, our user manuals will provide all the information you need to get, and keep your system
up and running.
6 Supplemental Manuals
If you are familiar with industrial control type devices, you may be able to get up and running
7 with just the aide of the Quick Start Guide that is included with each touch panel. You can
also refer to the On-line help that is available in the C-more programming software for more
8 information about programming the panel. The accessories include data sheets that will help
with installing the accessories.

9 Technical Support
We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us
10 know if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application,
or, if for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:
11 770–844–4200
Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available
12 Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you
to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our
products and our company.
13 http://cmore.automationdirect.com

14 If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals,
please fill out and return the ‘Suggestions’ card that was included with this manual.

A
B
C
D

1-2 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Conventions Used
1
When you see the “notepad” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a
2
special note. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
3
4
When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right
will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death (in extreme
5
cases). The word Warning: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
6
7
Key Topics for Each Chapter
8
The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics
that can be found in that chapter. Getting Started CHAPTER 9
1
In This Chapter...
10
General Information .................................................................1-2
Specifications ...........................................................................1-4
11
12
13
14
Mounting Clips – New Style
A
NOTE: C-more touch panels shipped prior to approximately April 2006 had a slightly different mounting
clip design. All of the drawings and illustrations in this issue of the Hardware User Manual are shown with
B
the newer design. Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 contains drawings and illustrations of the
original designed mounting clips for your reference. C
D

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-3
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Product Overview
1
2
3
4
5
6 Some of the features designed into the product to provide excellent hardware and software are
listed below.
7 • Analog touch screen (no touch cell boundaries). The touchscreen is designed to respond to a single
touch. If it is touched at multiple points at the same time, an unexpected object may be activated.
8 • Plenty of memory and methods to get data in/out of the panel
• Overlapping active devices on the touch screen
9 • 65,536 colors for enhanced graphics
• Screen resolutions up to 1024 X 768 pixels
10 • Built-in project simulation; test on PC while developing
• Serial RS232, RS422/485 and Ethernet 10/100Base-T communications
11 (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
• Programming via USB or Ethernet (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
12 • Optional AC/DC power adapter (EA-AC)
• Bright backlight bulbs
13 • Animation of bitmaps and objects
• 4,000 built-in symbols, classic fonts: 6x8, 8x16, 8x32, 8x64, 16x16, 16x32, 16x64,
14 32x16, 32x32, 32x64, and Windows fonts
• PID face plate, trending, alarming and a recipe database

A • Event Manager to trigger actions based on assigned state changes, schedules, PLC tag names, etc.
setup in a database environment. The event can also trigger a sound byte, initiate a screen capture,
send a data file (FTP), send an E-mail, etc.
B • Select unique background screens for each created screen
• Trend Data logging
C • Internet Remote Access
• Built-in FTP client/server, E-mail client, and Web server
D • Audio output port - stereo, requires amplifier and speaker(s)

1-4 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Part Number Key – Touch Panels

The C-more touch panel part numbers consist of the following key: 1
Screen Size: Features:
6: 5.7”
8: 8.4”
L: LED
Features:
2
10: 10.4”
blank: Full
12: 12.1”
15: 15.0” R: Base 3
EA7-xxxx-x
LCD Type: Color:
4
S: STN C: Color
T: TFT M: Grayscale 5
Product label examples: 6
7
EA7-T6CL-R 8
9
10
11
EA7-T15C
12
13
Serial Number and Date Code formats: 14
Serial Number = [Part Number]+[YYMDDFNNN]
YY: Year (05–99 --- e.g. 05 = 2005)
A
M: Month (1–9, X, Y, Z --- e.g. X = Oct.)
DD: Day (1–31) B
F: Manufacturing Site (0–9, A–Z)
NNN: Sequence number for the date listed (000–999)
C
Date Code = YMMF
Y:
MM:
Year (0–9 --- e.g. 07 = 2007)
Month (01–12 --- e.g. X = Oct.)
D
F: Manufacturing Site (0–9, A–Z)

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-5
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Conversion and Mounting

1 C-more panels are a drop-in replacement for EZTouch panels from AutomationDirect. They
fit the same panel cutout*. The C-more software will convert your legacy EZTouch project
2 (created with EZTouch Edit ver. 3.1a) automatically with no changes to the project required.**
Just open your old EZTouch project in the new C-more Programming Software, connect
the USB cable, and click “Send to Panel”. The conversion is automatic and you will benefit
3 immediately from:
• A better looking display
4 • A brighter screen
• Longer backlight bulb life
5 • Wider temperature tolerance

6 • A two year warranty

NOTE: EZTouch projects most have been created with EZTouch Edit software version 3.1a to assure proper
7 project conversion.

Now, there are hundreds of new features you may want to take advantage of, but it’s nice to
8 know that you can be up and running your existing EZTouch project in just a few minutes.
C-more accepts the same PLC communications and networking cables that you are using with
9 EZTouch. The 24 VDC power connections accept the same DC wiring that you used for
EZTouch, and now there is a removable terminal block connector. Only the programming
10 cable is different - you no longer have to buy a proprietary serial cable to program your touch
panel. C-more uses a standard USB cable or an Ethernet (CAT5) connection for programming.
* If you have an old 6” non-slim bezel EZTouch panel you will need our 6” Adapter Plate, part number
11 EA-6-ADPTR, see the chapter on accessories.
** The project conversion utility is a great feature. However the user must take full responsibility in
12 ensuring the conversion works to their satisfaction.

13
Example of a C-more 6” touch panel
14 mounted into an existing EZTouch
non-slim bezel cutout using the
C-more 6” adapter plate.

A
B
C
D

1-6 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more

1
EZTouch C-more*
EZTouch 6”, grayscale STN
(0–45 °C) C-more 6” Adapter C-more 6”, grayscale STN
(0–50 °C)
2
EZ-S6M-R
EZ-S6M-RS
Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
EA7-S6M-R 3
EZ-S6M-F Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
EA7-S6M
4
EZ-S6M-FS (includes Ethernet)
5
EZTouch
EZTouch 6”, 128 Color STN
C-more*
C-more 6”, 65,536 Color TFT
6
C-more 6” Adapter
(0–45 °C) (0–50 °C)

EZ-S6C-K Requires: EA-6-ADPTR

7
EZ-S6C-KS
EA7-T6CL-R 8
EZ-S6C-F Requires: EA-6-ADPTR
9
EZ-S6C-FS
EA7-T6CL 10
(includes Ethernet)
EZ-S6C-FST 11
12
EZTouch C-more*
EZTouch 8”, 128 Color STN
(0–40 °C)
C-more 8”, 65,536 Color TFT
(0–50 °C)
13
EZ-S8C-F 14
EA7-T8C
EZ-S8C-FS (includes Ethernet) A
EZ-S8C-FST
B
*Note: All C-more touch panels meet UL type 4X when mounted on a flat surface of a type 4X indoor use C
only enclosure. Non-FDA
D

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-7
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more (cont’d)

1
EZTouch C-more*
2 EZTouch 10”, 128 Color TFT C-more 10”, 65,536 Color TFT
(0–50 °C) (0–50 °C)
3 EZ-S10C-F
EZ-T10C-FS EA7-T10C
4 EZ-T10C-FST
(includes Ethernet)

5 EZ-T10C-FSE

6
EZTouch C-more*
7 No 12” EZTouch available C-more 12”, 65,536 Color TFT
(0–50 °C)
8
9 EA7-T12C
(includes Ethernet)

10
11
EZTouch C-more*
12 EZTouch 15”, 128 Color TFT C-more 15”, 65,536 Color TFT
(0–45 °C) (0–50 °C)
13 EZ-T15C-FS

14 EZ-T15C-FST
EA7-T15C
(includes Ethernet)

A EZ-T15C-FSE

B
*NOTE: All C-more touch panels meet UL type 4X when mounted on a flat surface of a type 4X indoor use
C only enclosure. Non-FDA

1-8 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Quick Start Steps

Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect 1
 npack the C-more Touch Panel from its shipping carton. Included in the carton are the
a.) U
following: 2
• C-more Touch Panel
• cutout template
• mounting clips
3
• temporary support stand
• DC power connector 4
• gasket
• Quick Start Guide, p/n EA-QSG
b.) Unpack any accessories that
5
Temporary
Support Stand
have been ordered, such as: AC/
DC Power Adapter, Expansion 6
Assembly, CompactFlash memory,

Cutout Template
programming cable, communications
cable, etc.
7
located here.
c.) Inspect all equipment for
completeness. If anything is missing
8
Mounting Clips or damaged, immediately call
and DC power connector
located in here.
the AutomationDirect® returns 9
department @ 1-800-633-0405.
10
11
12
13
Shipping Carton Contents
14
Optional Accessories A
AC Power Adapter
EA-AC
Expansion Assembly
EA-EXP-OPT
Compact Flash Card
EA-CF-CARD B
C
D

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-9
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 2 – Assemble Temporary Support Stand

1 6“ & 8” Touch Panel – Temporary Stand
2
3
1 2 3
4 4
Shipping Carton Packing Material

5
6
7
5 6 7 8
8
9 10”, 12“ & 15” Touch Panel – Temporary Stand

10
11 1
2
12 Shipping Carton Packing Material
3

13 Insert tabs
between layers

14
A 4 5 6

B
C NOTE: See Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring for C-more touch panel installtion information including
cutout dimensions and mounting clearances.
D

1-10 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 3 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories

NOTE: CompactFlash memory card designations – CF Slot #1 is at the top of the panel and CF Slot #2 is the
1
CF Card Interface Module, p/n EA-CF-IF.
CF Card
Interface Module
2
Compact Flash Memory Card
EA-CF-CARD
EA-CF-IF
3
CF card interface
module installs
4
in right slot only,
left slot for future 5
CF card plugs
6
into slot #1

C-more
at top of panel
Expansion Assembly
7
EA-EXP-OPT
Touch Panel
8
9
10
AC/DC Power Adapter
EA-AC
11
NOTE: The C-more 6” touch panels will fit into the existing cutout of any EZTouch 6” slim bezel panel. Use 12
the C-more 6” Adapter Plate, p/n EA-6-ADPTR, to install C-more 6” panels into existing cutouts of EZTouch
6” non-slim (rounded bezel) panels.
13
Optional Accessories 14
6” Adapter Plate
EA-6-ADPTR
15-pin Terminal 15-pin 90 Degree
A
Block Adapter Comm. Port Adapter
EA-COMCON-3 EA-ADPTR-4
B
Date code
Country of Origin

KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

Date code
Country of Origin
C
KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
EA-COMCON-3

D
EA-ADPTR-4
TERM
GND

RD+
RD–
SD+
SD–

IOIOI – PLC

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-11
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 4 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports

1
Compact Flash PLC Serial Communications

2 memory slot #1 Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

is located at the 1 Frame GND 6 LE 11 TXD+ (422/485)
top of panel. 8 1
2 TXD (232C) 7 CTS (232C) 12 TXD– (422/485)
15 9 3 RXD (232C) 8 RTS (232C) 13 Term. Resistor

3 4
5
Future
Logic GND
9 RXD+ (422/485)
10 RXD– (422/485)
14 do not use
15 do not use

4 Bottom View
For Future Use

5 Audio Line Out,

stereo, 1 Volt rms,
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
PLC Communications,
Programming/Download
3.5mm Mini Jack
(Amplifier Required)

6 USB Port - Type B USB Port - Type A

Pin
1
2
TD+
TD–
Signal Pin
5
6
Signal
do not use
RD–
Programming/Download USB Device Options

7
3 RD+ 7 do not use
Pin Signal
4 do not use 8 do not use
Pin Signal
1 Vbus
2 1
1 Vbus 1 8
2 D– 1 2 3 4
3 4
2 D– Link Status LED (Green) Network Activity LED (Orange)

8
3 D+
3 D+ On Ethernet Linked On Active Network Data
4 GND
4 GND Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle
Shell Shield
SHELL Shield

9 Note: Device is not available on Base Feature touch panels, part numbers EA7-S6M-R and EA7-T6CL-R.
Note: Use USB Programming Cable, for example p/n USB-CBL-AB15.

10
NOTE: See Chapter 2: Specifications and Chapter 6: PLC Communications for additional details on the
11 available communication ports, protocols and cables.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D

1-12 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 5 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project

Following are the minimum system requirements for running C-more Programming Software,
p/n EA-PGMSW, on a PC: 1
•P
 ersonal Computer with a 333 MHz or higher processor (CPU) clock speed recommended;
Intel® Pentium/Celeron family, or AMD® K6/Athlon/Duron family, or compatible
processor recommended
2


•K
 eyboard and Mouse or compatible pointing device
• S uper VGA color video adapter and monitor with at least 800 x 600 pixels resolution
3
(1024 x 768 pixels recommended)
64K color minimum 4
• 3 00 MB free hard-disk space
• 1 28 MB free RAM (512 MB recommended); 512 MB free RAM (1 GB recommended) for 5
Vista
•C
 D-ROM or DVD drive for installing software from the CD 6
•U
 SB port or Ethernet 10/100 Mbps port for project transfer from software to touch panel

(Ethernet port not available on -R models)
•O
 perating System - Windows® XP Home / Professional Edition Service Pack 2 (32 bit) ,
7
Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4, Windows Vista® (32 or 64 bit) or Windows 7 (32 or 64
bit), Windows 8 8
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the PC’s CD-ROM drive and follow
the instructions. If you need assistance during the software installation, 9
please refer to the supplied Software Installation Guide or call the
AutomationDirect Technical Support team @ 770-844-4200.
10
11
Start Simulate Send

12
a Project Project Project to panel

Allows you to check the operation of Download your project to the connected
your project before downloading it to touch panel via USB or Ethernet.
the touch panel.
Make a New Project

Select Project

Location: C:\My Documents\C-more Projects\ Browse...

Enter a name
13
for your project

Or 14
Project: MyProject Select an EZTouch Project
that was previously saved
HMI Type: EA7-T8C Select the C-more Read from Disk under Version 3.1a of the
touch panel EZTouch Programming
PLC Protocol: DirectLogic K-Sequence Software.
Select the PLC Driver
Protocol Setup...

A
B
C
D

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-13
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 6 – Connect Touch Panel to Computer

•C
 onnect a USB Programming Cable, such as p/n USB-CBL-AB15, from an USB type A port on the
1 PC to the USB type B programming port on the C-more touch panel
• o r connect the C-more touch panel and PC together via an Ethernet hub or switch, and CAT5
2 Ethernet cables (full feature panels only)
• o r use an Ethernet crossover cable directly between the C-more touch panel Ethernet port and the PC

3 Ethernet port (full feature panels only)

PC USB Port – Type B
USB C-more Programming/Download

4
Touch Panel

USB Port –
Type A

5 USB-CBL-AB15

6 Stride™
Ethernet Switch
7 10/100 Base-T
(such as SE-SW5U)
Ethernet via
8 Hub or Switch
C-more
Ethernet
Touch Panel
9 1 Port

PC

10 Ethernet (Bottom View)

Port

11
Ethernet CAT5
12 Cable - Straight-thru

Ethernet via
13 Crossover Cable
C-more
Touch Panel
Ethernet
Port

PC
14
(Bottom View)

A Ethernet
Port Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Crossover

B
C NOTE: On power up, the touch panel will either copy the project from its internal Flash memory to its
internal SDRAM memory and run the project, or if a CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1
slot, then any project contained on the CF memory card will be copied to the panel’s internal SDRAM
D memory and be run. The memory of a CompactFlash card on CF1 will override the panel’s internal Flash
memory on power up or reboot, even if the CompactFlash memory card does not contain a project.

1-14 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 7 – Provide Power to the Touch Panel

•C
 onnect a dedicated 24 VDC (20.4 - 28.8 VDC) switching power supply rated at a minimum of 1.5
A to the DC connector on the rear of the C-more touch panel, include wiring the ground terminal
to a proper equipment ground
1
• o r install a C-more AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, to the rear of the touch panel and connect an AC
voltage source of 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hertz, to its AC connector (see note below)
2
• t hen turn on the power source and check the LED status indicators on the rear of the C-more touch
panel for proper indication 3
NOTE: The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for C-more touch panels only. The adapter is powered from a
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A. Power Fault features help 4
protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. The C-more panel must have firmware
version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation. 5
DC Wiring Warning: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not
recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
6
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
Panel Size Rating
6“ – 10” 2.5 A
ADC p/n
MDL2-5
touch panel when operating temperatures
are expected to exceed 40 °C [104 °F]. 7
8
12“ & 15” 4.0 A MDL4
+
24 VDC, -15%, +20%
AC Wiring
(20.4 - 28.8 VDC)
– 9
10
GND PWR

CPU
Equipment
Ground
BATT

Tightening Torque
AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.
11
Power supply cable torque
Power connector mounting torque
71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm)
71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm) 12
Mounting flange screw torque 57 - 71 oz-in (0.4 - 0.5 Nm)

NOTE: Use 60 / 75 °C copper conductors Recommended AC Supply Fuse

13
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3
only.
100 - 240 VAC
50/60 Hz
14
C-more LED Status Indicators
Power LED (Green)
A
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red)
Off Power Off
PWR
On
Off
Power On
Power Off
B
Green Normal – CPU Run State CPU

Red
Blinking
Memory Error
Operating System not found
BATT
TxD

RxD

Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

C
Red

D
Blinking
Orange LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
IOlOl–PLC
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-15
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 8 – Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens

• Access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens by pressing the extreme upper left
1 corner of the panel display area for three (3) seconds as shown below.
• Adjust the time and date for the panel by pressing the Setting button on the Main Menu, then press
2 the Adjust Clock button on the Setting screen.
• Use the right pointing arrows for the time or date display to select the unit to change. Use the up and

3 down arrows to increment or decrement the value for the selected unit.
• Press OK when done to accept the changes to the time and date that is retained in the touch panel’s
battery backed memory, or press Cancel to exit the Adjust Clock setup screen without making any
4 changes.
• Press the Main Menu button on the Setting screen and then the Exit button on the Main Menu
5 screen to return to the application screen.

6 Setting

7 Adjust Clock Adjust Display

8 Adjust Touch Panel Beeper

9 Main Menu

10
11
12 MAIN MENU

Adjust Clock

13
Information Setting

Time Date

14
10 : 45 : 23 09 - 01 - 2005
Test Menu Memory

A
12

Exit
9 3

B 6
OK Cancel

C NOTE: When using an Ethernet connection, by default the panel is set for DHCP IP addressing. If it can not
find a DHCP server, the panel will automatically assign an IP address. The IP address can be changed by
the user from the programming software or by accessing the IP address setting screen as shown on page
D 5-19 and detailed on page 5-24. See Chapter 5 - System Setup Screens for details on other setup screen
settings and functions.

1-16 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 9 – Choose Touch Panel to Device Protocol & Cables

Compatibility Table
Model Protocols
1
Productivity3000
P3000 Serial
P3000 Ethernet 2
CLICK Modbus (CLICK)

all
K-Sequence
Direct NET
3
DL05/DL06

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
4
DL105 all K-Sequence
D2-230 K-Sequence 5
K-Sequence
D2-240
Direct NET
K-Sequence
6
DL205 D2-250/D2-250-1/D2-260 Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
7
Direct NET
D2-240/D2-250-1/D2-260
Using DCM Modbus (Koyo addressing) 8
H2-ECOM/H2-ECOM100 Direct LOGIC Ethernet
D3-330/330P (Requires the use of a Data Communications Unit)
D3-340
Direct NET
Direct NET
9
AutomationDirect
DL305 D3-350
K-Sequence
Direct NET
10
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

D3-350 DCM
Direct NET 11
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

D4-430
K-Sequence
Direct NET
12
D4-440
K-Sequence
Direct NET
13
K-Sequence
DL405
D4-450 Direct NET 14
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

All with DCM

Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
A
H4-ECOM/H4-ECOM100
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.2 or later and Studio any version
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
Think & Do Modbus RTU (serial port)
B
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.5.1 or later and Studio V7.2.1 or later Think & Do Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet port)

GS Drives
GS Drives Serial C
GS Drives TCP/IP (GS-EDRV)
SOLO Temperature Controllers
PLC Compatibility Table continued on the next page.
SOLO Temperature Controller D

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-17
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 9 – Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables (cont’d)

1 Compatibility Table (cont’d)
Model Protocols
2 MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5-01/02/03 DH485/AIC/AIC+
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400 and 1500
3 SLC 5-03/04/05 DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix™, CompactLogix™, FlexLogix™

4 Allen-Bradley
PLC-5 DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex

5 ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Generic I/O Messaging

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based
EtherNet/IP Server

6 MicroLogix 1100, 1400 and SLC 5/05, via native Ethernet port
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5-03/04/05, all via ENI adapter
EtherNet/IP Client

7 GE 90/30, 90/70. Micro 90, VersaMax Micro

FX Series
SNPX
FX Direct

8 Mitsubishi
Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H
Q, QnA Serial
Q CPU
QnA Serial

9 Q, Qna Ethernet
984 CPU, Quantum 113 CPU, AEG Modicon Micro Series 110 CPU: 311-xx, 411-xx,
QnA Ethernet
Modbus RTU
512-xx, 612-xx

10 Modicon
Other devices using Modicon Modbus addressing
Modbus RTU
TUModbus TCP/IP

11 Omron
C200 Adapter, C500
CJ1/CS1 Serial
Host Link

FINS
12 CJ1/CS1 Ethernet
S7-200 CPU, RS-485 Serial PPI
Siemens
13 S7-200 CPU, S7-300 CPU, S7-1200 CPU; Ethernet Ethernet ISO over TCP

Step 9 – Choose Cables continued on next page.

14
A
B
C
D

1-18 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 9 – Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables (cont’d)

Purchased Cable
Description
Cable
Part Number
1
AutomationDirect Productivity Series, CLICK,
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port, DL05, DL06, DL105, EA-2CBL
DL205, D3-350, D4-450 & H2-WINPLC (RS-232C)
2
Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port
DL06, D2-250 (250-1), D2-260
(RS-232C)
EA-2CBL-1 3
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port, D3-340
(RS-232C) EA-3CBL 4
Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub
port, DL405 (RS-232C) EA-4CBL-1
5
Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port,
EA-4CBL-2
DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU and
all DCM’s (RS-232C) 6
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000, 1100,
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
1200, 1400, 1500 (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05,
7
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix EA-SLC-232-CBL
DF1 port (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port
8
(RS-232C) EA-PLC5-232-CBL
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix, SLC 5-01/02/03, PLC5
DH485 port (RS-232C) EA-DH485-CBL
9
GE 90/30, 90/70, Micro 90, VersaMax Micro
15-pin D-sub port (RS-422A) EA-90-30-CBL 10
MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port
(RS-422A) EA-MITSU-CBL
11
MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN
EA-MITSU-CBL-1
(RS-422A)
OMRON Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500)
12
(RS-232C) EA-OMRON-CBL

NOTE 1: The above list of pre-made communications cables may be purchased. See Chapter 6: PLC
13
Communications for wiring diagrams of additonal user constructed cables. Chapter 6 also includes wiring
diagrams for the pre-made cables. 14
NOTE 2: EZTouch serial PLC communication cables are compatible with C-more touch panels. A
EA-2CBL EA-2CBL-1 B
Pre-made cable C
examples

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18 1-19
 Chapter 1: Getting Started

Step 10 – Connect Touch Panel to PLC

• Connect the serial communications cable between the C-more touch panel and the PLC
1 • or connect the C-more touch panel and PLC together via an Ethernet hub or switch, and CAT5
Ethernet cables (full feature panels only)
2 • or use an Ethernet crossover cable directly between the C-more Ethernet port and the PLC Ethernet
port (full feature panels only)

3 Serial C-more
Touch Panel
4 DL-06 PLC

5
C-more to
6 Port 2
Direct LOGIC
VGA 15-pin port
serial cable

7 p/n EA-2CBL-1

8
9 Stride™
Ethernet Switch
Ethernet via
10/100 Base-T Hub or Switch
10 (such as SE-SW5U)

11 H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module
1 C-more
Touch Panel Ethernet
Port

12
13 DL06 PLC
(Bottom View)

14 Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

A Ethernet via Crossover Cable

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
Ethernet Module Ethernet
Touch Panel Port

B
C Ethernet CAT5
(Bottom View)

DL06 PLC Cable - Crossover

1-20 ®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter
Specifications
2
In This Chapter...
Available Models......................................................................................................... 2–2
Model Specifications.................................................................................................. 2–3
6” Base Feature Models............................................................................................. 2–4
6” Full Feature Models.............................................................................................. 2–5
6” Obsolete Models.................................................................................................. 2–6
8” and 10” Full Feature Models................................................................................ 2–8
12” and 15” Full Feature Models.............................................................................. 2–9
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL
(Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.)................................................................. 2–10
EA7-T8C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.).................................................. 2–12
EA7-T10C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.)................................................ 2–14
EA7-T12C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.)................................................ 2–16
EA7-T15C (Dimensions and Ports & Memory Exp.)................................................ 2–18
Mounting Clearances............................................................................................... 2–20
Communications Ports............................................................................................. 2–21
Audio WAV File Specifications................................................................................. 2–23
Memory Organization.............................................................................................. 2–24
Handling External Memory Devices......................................................................... 2–25
Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period............................................... 2–26
Data Logging Function and Logging Media........................................................... 2–26
Data Logging - Memory Device Full........................................................................ 2–26
Chemical Compatibility............................................................................................ 2–27
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Available Models
1 The C-more® Operator Interface is the next generation of touch panel brought to you by
AutomationDirect. It has been designed to display and interchange graphical data from a PLC
2 by merely viewing or touching the screen.
The C-more Touch Panel is available in a variety of models to suit your application. Refer to
3 the following tables for a list of part numbers, descriptions and options available.
Part User CF Card USB
Description Ethernet
4 Number
6-inch C-more grayscale STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable
Memory Option Device

screen), 15 shades of gray, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen

5 EA7-S6M-R
resolution, 333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating
range), NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor 10 MB No Yes No
use only), non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
6 *Base Model: Built-in USB only, no Ethernet or CompactFlash
support.
6-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (5.7 inch viewable
7 EA7-T6CL-R
screen), 64K colors, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen resolution,
333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA 10 MB No Yes No
4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only), non-
8 replaceable LED backlight, 50,000 hour half-life. *Base Model:
Built-in USB only, no Ethernet or CompactFlash support.

9 6-inch C-more grayscale STN touch panel (5.7 inch viewable

screen), 15 shades of gray, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen
resolution, 333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating
EA7-S6M range), NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor 10MB Yes Yes Yes
10 use only), non-replaceable backlight, 50,000 hour half-life.
Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports CompactFlash.

11 6-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (5.7 inch viewable

screen), 64K colors, 320 x 240 pixel QVGA screen resolution,
333 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), NEMA
EA7-T6CL 10 MB Yes Yes Yes
12 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use only),
non-replaceable LED backlight, 50,000 hour half-life. Built-in
Ethernet and USB; supports Compact Flash.

13 Table continued on the next page.

14
A
B
C
D
®
2-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Available Models (cont’d)

Part Description User CF Card USB
Ethernet
1
Number Memory Option Device
8-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (8.4 inch viewable
2
screen), 64k colors, 640 x 480 pixel VGA screen resolution,
EA7-T8C 400 MHz CPU, 24VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range),
NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use
only), 50,000 hour half-life. Built-in Ethernet and USB;
10 MB Yes Yes Yes 3
supports Compact Flash.

10-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (10.4 inch viewable

4
screen), 64k colors, 640 x 480 pixel VGA screen resolution,
EA7-T10C 400 MHz CPU, 24VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range),
NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use 10 MB Yes Yes Yes 5
only), 50,000 hour half-life. Built-in Ethernet and USB;
supports Compact Flash.
6
12-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (12.1 inch viewable

EA7-T12C
screen), 64K colors, 800 x 600 pixel SVGA screen resolution,
400 MHz CPU, 24 VDC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range),
NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use 40 MB Yes Yes Yes
7
only), 50,000 hour half-life. Built-in Ethernet and USB;
supports CompactFlash. 8
15-inch C-more color TFT touch panel (15.0 inch viewable

EA7-T15C
screen), 64K colors, 1024 x 768 XGA screen resolution,
400 MHz CPU, 24V DC (20.4-28.8 VDC operating range), 40 MB Yes Yes Yes
9
NEMA 4/4X, IP65 (when mounted correctly; for indoor use
only), 50,000 hour half- life. Built-in Ethernet and USB; supports
CompactFlash. 10
Model Specifications 11
The following tables on the next four pages provide details to the Specifications of all C-more
models. The specification tables are separated into the following groups: 12
• 6” Base Feature Models, EA7-S6M-R and EA7-T6CL-R; obsolete model EA7-S6C-R
• 6” Full Feature Models, EA7-S6M, and EA7-T6CL; obsolete models EA7-S6C and EA7-T6C 13
• 8” & 10” Full Feature Models, EA7-T8C and EA7-T10C
• 12” & 15” Full Feature Models, EA7-T12C & EA7-T15C 14
The following note applies to the Backlight Average Lifetime of 50,000 hours shown in the
following tables: A
Note: The backlight average lifetime is defined as the average usage time it takes before the brightness
becomes 50% of the initial brightness. The lifetime of the backlight depends on the ambient temperature. B
The lifetime will decrease under low or high temperature usage.

The following note applies to the Touch Panel Type specification shown in the following tables: C
Note: The Touchscreen is designed to respond to a single touch. If it is touched at multiple points at the
same time, an unexpected object may be activated.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-3
 Chapter 2: Specifications

6” Base Feature Models

1 Specification
Model 6” STN grayscale
w/ base features
6” TFT color
w/ base features
Part Number EA7-S6M-R EA7-T6CL-R
2 Display Actual Size and Type 5.7” STN grayscale 5.7” TFT color
Color Scale 15 shades of gray 65,536 colors
3 Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54” x 3.4” [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
Display Brightness 150 cd/m2 (NITS) 270 cd/m2 (NITS)
4 LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
Backlight User Replaceable No
5 Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
6 Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
7 Backup Memory (SRAM)
Logging Data Memory
Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
USB Pen Drive
Number of Screens Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
8 Realtime Clock Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
Calendar – Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
9 Screen Saver
Serial PLC Interface
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port – Type B Download/Program – USB Port – type B
10 USB Port – Type A
Ethernet Port
Port for USB device options – type A
not available
Audio Line Out not available
11 CF Card – Slot #1 not available
Expansion Assembly
not available
12 (p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Supply Power 24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
13 Power Consumption
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
9 W @ 24 VDC
2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
Operating Temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
14 Storage Temperature
Humidity
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
10–85% RH (non-condensing)

A Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Insulation Resistance Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
B Vibration
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
C Environment
Enclosure
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment
Meets UL Type 4X, when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CSA, CE
D Dimensions
Weight
6.140” x 8.047” x 1.697” [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
1.46 lb. [660 g] 1.43 lb. [650 g]

®
2-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

6” Full Feature Models

Specification
Model 6” STN grayscale
w/ full features
6” TFT color
w/ full features
1
Part Number EA7-S6M EA7-T6CL
Display Actual Size and Type 5.7” STN grayscale 5.7” TFT color 2
Color Scale 15 shades of gray 65,536 colors
Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54” x 3.4” [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
3
Display Brightness 150 cd/m2 (NITS) 270 cd/m2 (NITS)
LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
4
Backlight User Replaceable No
Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.) 5
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes 6
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
Backup Memory (SRAM) Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
7
Logging Data Memory
or USB Pen Drive
Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
8
Calendar – Month/Day/Year
Screen Saver
Yes - battery backup
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled 9
Serial PLC Interface Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port – Type B
USB Port – Type A
Download/Program – USB Port – type B
Port for USB device options – type A
10
Ethernet Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
Audio Line Out
CF Card – Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo – requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
11
Expansion Assembly
(p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options. 12
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Supply Power
Power Consumption
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
10 W @ 24 VDC 11 W @ 24 VDC 13
Recommended DC Supply Fuse 2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
14
Humidity 10–85% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
A
Insulation Resistance Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Vibration
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
B
Shock
Environment
15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment C
Enclosure Meets UL Type 4X when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
Agency Approvals
Dimensions
UL, cUL, CSA, CE
6.140” x 8.047” x 1.697” [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
D
Weight 1.50 lb. [680 g] 1.48 lb. [670 g]

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-5
 Chapter 2: Specifications

6” Obsolete Models
1 Specification
Model 6” STN color
w/ base features
Part Number EA7-S6C-R
2 Display Actual Size and Type 5.7” STN color
Color Scale 256 colors
3 Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54” x 3.4” [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
Display Brightness 200 cd/m2 (NITS)
4 LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
Backlight User Replaceable No
5 Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
6 Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
7 Backup Memory (SRAM)
Logging Data Memory
Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
USB Pen Drive
Number of Screens Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10Mbytes)
8 Realtime Clock Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
Calendar – Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
9 Screen Saver
Serial PLC Interface
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port – Type B Download/Program – USB Port – type B
10 USB Port – Type A
Ethernet Port
Port for USB device options – type A
not available
Audio Line Out not available
11 CF Card – Slot #1 not available
Expansion Assembly
not available
12 (p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Supply Power 24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
13 Power Consumption
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
10 W @ 24 VDC
2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
Operating Temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
14 Storage Temperature
Humidity
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
10–85% RH (non-condensing)

A Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Insulation Resistance Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
B Vibration
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
C Environment
Enclosure
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment
Meets UL Type 4X, when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CE
D Dimensions
Weight
6.140” x 8.047” x 1.697” [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
1.39 lb. [630 g]

®
2-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

6” Obsolete Models (cont’d)

Specification
Model 6” STN color
w/ full features
6” TFT color
w/ full features
1
Part Number EA7-S6C EA7-T6C
Display Actual Size and Type 5.7” STN color 5.7” TFT color 2
Color Scale 256 colors 65,536 colors
Display Viewing Area
Screen Pixels
4.54” x 3.4” [115.2 mm x 86.4 mm]
320 x 240 (QVGA)
3
Display Brightness 200 cd/m2 (NITS) 270 cd/m2 (NITS)
LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.36 mm x 0.36 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
4
Backlight User Replaceable No
Touch Panel Type Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.) 5
CPU Type 32-Bit RISC CPU (333 MHz)
Battery
System Memory
Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
SDRAM 32 MBytes 6
System Flash Memory FLASH 32 MBytes
Backup Memory (SRAM) Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
7
Logging Data Memory
or USB Pen Drive
Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10Mbytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
8
Calendar – Month/Day/Year
Screen Saver
Yes - battery backup
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled 9
Serial PLC Interface Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port – Type B
USB Port – Type A
Download/Program – USB Port – type B
Port for USB device options – type A
10
Ethernet Port Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
Audio Line Out
CF Card – Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo – requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
11
Expansion Assembly
(p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly
for installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options. 12
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Supply Power
Power Consumption
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
11 W @ 24 VDC 13 W @ 24 VDC 13
Recommended DC Supply Fuse 2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
14
Humidity 10–85% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity
Withstand Voltage
Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
A
Insulation Resistance
Vibration
Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G: B
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock
Environment
15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment C
Enclosure Meets UL Type 4X when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
Agency Approvals
Dimensions
UL, cUL, CE
6.140” x 8.047” x 1.697” [156.0 mm x 204.4 mm x 43.1 mm]
D
Weight 1.43 lb. [650 g] 1.52 lb. [690 g]

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-7
 Chapter 2: Specifications

8” and 10” Full Feature Models

Model 8” TFT color 10” TFT color
1 Specifications w/ full features w/ full features
Part Number EA7-T8C EA7-T10C
2 Display Actual Size and Type
Color Scale
8.4” TFT color 10.4” TFT color
65,536 colors
Display Viewing Area 6.73” x 5.05” [170.9 mm x 128.2 mm] 8.31” x 6.24” [211.2 mm x 158.4 mm]
3 Screen Pixels
Display Brightness 300 cd/m2 (NITS)
640 x 480 (VGA)
270 cd/m2 (NITS)

4 LCD Panel Dot Pitch

Backlight Average Lifetime
0.267 mm x 0.267 mm 0.33 mm x 0.33 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
Backlight User Replaceable Yes – Correct replacement bulb is dependent on the panel serial no, see Chapter 9 for complete details.
5 Touch Panel Type
CPU Type
Analog resistive (10-bit resolution, 1024 x 1024 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
32-Bit RISC CPU (400 MHz)
Battery Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
6 System Memory
System Flash Memory
SDRAM 32 MBytes
FLASH 32 MBytes

7 Backup Memory (SRAM)

Logging Data Memory
Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
or USB Pen Drive

8 Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10 MBytes)
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available)
Calendar – Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
9 Screen Saver
Serial PLC Interface
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
USB Port – Type B Download/Program – USB Port – type B
10 USB Port – Type A
Ethernet Port
Port for USB 1.1 device options – type A
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T

11 Audio Line Out

CF Card – Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo – requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel.
Expansion Assembly Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
12 (p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Supply Power
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options.
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
13 Power Consumption
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
15 W @ 24 VDC
2.5 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL2-5
17 W @ 24 VDC

Operating Temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
14 Storage Temperature
Humidity
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
10–85% RH (non-condensing)
Noise Immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
A Withstand Voltage 1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Insulation Resistance Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground

B Vibration
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
C Environment
Enclosure
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment
Meets UL Type 4X when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CSA, CE
D Dimensions
8.748” x 10.894” x 2.053”
[222.2 mm x 276.7 mm x 52.1 mm]
10.669” x 13.661” x 2.079”
[271.0 x 347.0 x 52.8 mm]
Weight 2.60 lb. [1,180 g] 3.55 lb. [1,610 g]

®
2-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

12” and 15” Full Feature Models

Model 12” TFT color 15” TFT color
Specifications w/ full features w/ full features 1
Part Number EA7-T12C EA7-T15C
Display Actual Size and Type
Color Scale
12.1” TFT color 15.0” TFT color
65,536 Colors
2
Display Viewing Area 9.47” x 7.62” [240.6 mm x 184.5 mm] 11.97” x 8.98” [304.1 mm x 228.1 mm]
Screen Pixels
Display Brightness
800 x 600 (SVGA)
260 cd/m2 (NITS)
1024 x 768 (XGA)
220 cd/m2 (NITS)
3
LCD Panel Dot Pitch
Backlight Average Lifetime
0.267 mm x 0.267 mm 0.297 mm x 0.297 mm
Approximately 50,000 hours (See note at bottom of page 2-3.) 4
Backlight User Replaceable Yes – Correct replacement bulb is dependent on the panel serial no, see Chapter 9 for complete details.
Touch Panel Type
CPU Type
Analog resistive (12-bit resolution, 4096 x 4096 touch area) (See note at bottom of page 2-3.)
32-Bit RISC CPU (400 MHz) Plus Graphic Accelerator Chip
5
Battery Replaceable battery – ADC Part # D2-BAT-1 (Manufacturer Part # CR2354)
System Memory
System Flash Memory
SDRAM 64 MBytes
FLASH 64 MBytes
6
Backup Memory (SRAM)
Logging Data Memory
Control data backup memory (SRAM) 256 KBytes
CompactFlash Memory Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, industrial grade, high speed (Optional)
or USB Pen Drive
7
Number of Screens
Realtime Clock
Up to 9999 with ver. 2.40 and later – limited by project memory (10 MBytes))
Built into panel (PLC clock is still accessible if available) 8
Calendar – Month/Day/Year Yes - battery backup
Screen Saver
Serial PLC Interface
Yes, backlight turns off after a 30–1500 minute adjustable time, or can be disabled
Serial PLC Port: RS-232C/422/485 15-Pin D-sub (female)
9
USB Port – Type B Download/Program – USB Port – type B
USB Port – Type A
Ethernet Port
Port for USB device options – type A
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
10
Audio Line Out
CF Card – Slot #1
Audio Line Out, 1 volt rms, stereo – requires amplifier and speaker(s)
Optional: CompactFlash Card p/n EA-CF-CARD, slot #1 located on top side of touch panel. 11
Expansion Assembly Optional: Use the CF Card Adapter p/n EA-CF-IF in the right slot of the expansion assembly for
(p/n EA-EXP-OPT)
Supply Power
installing CF card - Slot #2. The left slot of the expansion assembly is for future options.
24 VDC, -15%, +20% (20.4–28.8 VDC operating range, minimum of 1.5 A) (Use the AC/DC
12
Power Adapter, EA-AC, to power the touch panel from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. power source.)
Power Consumption
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
20 W @ 24 VDC
4.0 A time delay, ADC MDL4
33 W @ 24 VDC
13
Operating Temperature 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F); Maximum surrounding air temperature rating: 50 °C (122 °F)
Storage Temperature
Humidity
–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
10–85% RH (non-condensing)
14
Noise Immunity Noise voltage: 1000 Vp-p, Pulse width: 1 µs, Rise time: 1 ns
Withstand Voltage 1000 VDC for 1 minute, between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground A
Insulation Resistance Over 20 Mq between DC power supply input terminal and safety ground
Vibration
IEC61131-2 compliant, 10–57 Hz: 0.075 mm amplitude, 57–150 Hz 1.0 G:
10 sweep cycles per axis on each of 3 mutually perpendicular axes B
Shock 15 G peak, 11 ms duration, 2 shocks per axis, on 3 mutually perpendicular axes
Environment
Enclosure
For use in Pollution Degree 2 environment
Meets UL Type 4X when mounted correctly. For indoor use only.
C
Agency Approvals UL, cUL, CSA, CE
Dimensions
11.024” x 13.336” x 2.075”
[280.0 x 339.5 x 52.7 mm]
13.000” x 16.748” x 1.0481”
[330.2 x 425.4 x 54.0 mm]
D
Weight 4.59 lb. [2,080 g] 7.01 lb. [3,180 g]

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-9
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL

1 Dimensions:
All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the two (2)
2 mounting clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface.
A template is provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
4 7.402
[188.0]

5 1.500
Gasket
[38.1]

6 Mounting Clip
(2) places
0.197
Units: inches[mm]
7 [5.0]
8.047
[204.4]

8
9
10 6.140
[156.0] 5.458
[138.6]

11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
A and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Thickness Range
6” – lower mounting 0.039 - 0.24 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
C clip position [1 – 6 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
6” – upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in

D clip position [5 – 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]

®
2-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL

Ports & Memory Expansion: 1
DC Power Label
CF Slot #1
(not available) 2
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
(not available)
3
Base Feature Model 4
EA7-S6M-R and EA7-T6CL-R
BATT
PWR

CPU

TxD

RxD
5
Also obsolete model
EA7-S6C-R
IOIOI–PLC
6
PLC Serial
Communications
Product Label
7
8
USB B
(Programming/
Download)
USB A
(Device Options)
9
DC Power Label
CF Slot #1
(Top of Panel)
10
Optional Expansion
11
Assembly Location

12
Full Feature Model
EA7-S6M and EA7-T6CL PWR

CPU
13
TxD

14
RxD
BATT

Also obsolete models IOIOI–PLC

EA7-S6C and EA7-T6C

PLC Serial
Communications
Product Label
A
B
For Future Use
USB B USB A Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
C
(Programming/ (Device Options) (PLC Communications,

D
Audio Line Out Download) Programming/Download)

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-11
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T8C
1 Dimensions:
All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
2 clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
4 9.159
[232.6]
Gasket

5 1.738
[44.1]

6 0.315 Units: inches[mm]

[8.0] Mounting Clip
7 10.894
[276.7] (6) places

8
9
10 8.748 6.993
[222.2] [177.6]

11
12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range
0.039 - 0.20 inch
Screw Torque
42 ~ 57 oz-in
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D
®
2-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T8C
Ports & Memory Expansion: 1
CF Slot #1
2
DC Power Label (Top of Panel)

3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T8C
6
7
8
PLC Serial Product Label
Communications
9
10
For Future Use

Audio Line Out

USB B
(Programming/
USB A
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download) 11
(Device Options)
Download)
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-13
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T10C
1 Dimensions:
All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
2 clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
11.820

4 [300.2]
Gasket
1.685
5 [42.8]

6 0.394
[10.0]
Units: inches [mm]

7 13.661
[347.0]
Mounting Clip

8 (6) places

9
10
10.669

11 [271.0] 8.828
[224.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range
0.039 - 0.20 inch
Screw Torque
42 ~ 57 oz-in
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D
®
2-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T10C
Ports & Memory Expansion: 1
CF Slot #1
(Top of Panel) DC Power Label 2
3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location 4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T10C
6
7
8
PLC Serial Product Label
9
Communications

10
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
11
12
(PLC Communications,
For Future Use Programming/Download)
Audio Line Out USB B
(Programming/ USB A
Download) (Device Options)
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-15
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T12C
1 Dimensions:
All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the six (6) mounting
2 clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A template is
provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3
12.430
4 [315.7] Gasket

5 1.681
[42.7]

6 0.394 Units: inches [mm]

[10.0] Mounting Clip
7 13.366
[339.5]
(6) places

8
9
10
11.024 10.088
11 [280.0] [256.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range
0.039 - 0.20 inch
Screw Torque
42 ~ 57 oz-in
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D
®
2-16 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T12C
Ports & Memory Expansion: 1
CF Slot #1
(Top of Panel)
DC Power Label 2
3
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location 4
Full Feature Model 5
EA7-T12C 6
7
PLC Serial Product Label
8
Communications
9
10
For Future Use
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download)
11
Audio Line Out
USB B
(Programming/
Download)
USB A
(Device Options) 12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-17
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T15C
1 Dimensions:
All the necessary mounting hardware is provided with the touch panel. Use the eight (8)
2 mounting clips and screws to secure the touch panel to the cabinet or enclosure surface. A
template is provided for marking the cutout dimensions on the mounting surface.
3 14.892
[378.3]
4 Gasket
1.654
5 [42.0]

6 0.394 Units: inches[mm]

[10.0]
7 16.748
[425.4] Mounting Clip
(8) places
8
9
10
11 13.000
[330.2]
11.230
[285.2]

12
13
14
A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip

C
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
D 8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

®
2-18 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

EA7-T15C
Ports & Memory Expansion: 1
2
CF Slot #1
DC Power Label
(Top of Panel)
3
4
Optional Expansion
Assembly Location
5
Full Feature Model 6
EA7-T15C
7
8
9
PLC Serial
Communications
Product Label 10
11
12
For Future Use
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
(PLC Communications,
Programming/Download)
13
Audio Line Out USB B
(Programming/
Download)
USB A
(Device Options)
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-19
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Mounting Clearances
1 The following drawing shows the mounting clearances for the C-more touch panel. There
should be a minimum of 4 inches of space between all sides of the panel and the nearest object
2 or obstruction and at least 2 inches between the rear of the panel and the nearest object or
obstruction.

3 Note: Make sure the touch panel is mounted on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper
cooling.

4
5 Mounting Clip

6 4“ Min.

7 2“ Min.

8 4“ Min. 4“ Min.

9
10
11
4“ Min.
12 Air
Flow

13
14 Front View Side View

A
B
C
D
®
2-20 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Communications Ports
Compact Flash
memory slot #1
is located at the
top of panel.
PLC Serial Communications

8 1
Pin
1
2
Signal
Frame GND
TXD (232C)
Pin
6
7
LE
Signal

CTS (232C)
Pin
11
Signal
TXD+ (422/485)
12 TXD– (422/485)
1
2
15 9 3 RXD (232C) 8 RTS (232C) 13 Term. Resistor
4 Future 9 RXD+ (422/485) 14 do not use
5 Logic GND 10 RXD– (422/485) 15 do not use

Bottom View
3
For Future Use

Audio Line Out,

stereo, 1 Volt rms,
3.5mm Mini Jack
(Amplifier Required)
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T
PLC Communications,
Programming/Download
4
5
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 TD+ 5 do not use
USB Port - Type B USB Port - Type A 2 TD– 6 RD–
Programming/Download USB Device Options 3 RD+ 7 do not use
Pin Signal
4 do not use 8 do not use

6
Pin Signal
1 Vbus
2 1
1 Vbus 1 8
2 D– 1 2 3 4
3 4
2 D– Link Status LED (Green) Network Activity LED (Orange)
3 D+
3 D+ On Ethernet Linked On Active Network Data
4 GND
4 GND Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle

7
Shell Shield
SHELL Shield

Note: Device is not available on Base Feature touch panels, part numbers EA7-S6M-R and EA7-T6CL-R.

8
Note: Use USB Programming Cable, for example p/n USB-CBL-AB15.

Ethernet Port
The Ethernet port can be used several ways: for programming the panel (downloading a
project), for PLC communication, and for the advanced features, such as sending e-mail, web 9
server, FTP access, and allowing users to access and control the panel remotely.
The Ethernet connector is an RJ-45 Module jack type. It has a green and an orange LED. 10
• The orange LED indicates the Ethernet communication status. It illuminates when there is data
activity on the network.
• The green LED indicates link status and illuminates when a link is established.
11
Ethernet connections to devices: 12
•D  irect LOGIC Ethernet
• Productivity3000 Ethernet
• Modbus TCP/IP
13
• Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP™ Server - Generic I/O Messaging (ControlLogix™, CompactLogix™,
and FlexLogix™) 14
• Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Client - Tag Based (ControlLogix, CompactLogix, and FlexLogix)
• Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Client - (MicroLogix and SLC5) A
• Entivity Modbus TCP/IP
• Mitsubishi Q/QnA Ethernet B
• Omron Ethernet FINS
• Siemens Ethernet ISO over TCP C
Note: The base panels ( -R part numbers) do not include an Ethernet port, and do not have these capabilities.
D
Refer to http://cmore.automationdirect.com for the latest driver information.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-21
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Communications Ports (cont’d)

1 USB Port B
Program C-more via the USB programming port. It’s fast and easy, with no baud rate settings,
2 parity, or stop bits to worry about. We stock standard USB cables for your convenience, such
as part no. USB-CBL-AB15. USB Port B can be used to upload or download projects to and
from a PC (personnel computer).
3 USB Port A
4 The Universal Serial Bus (USB) type A port is a standard feature for all models and can be used
to connect various USB 1.1 HID (Human Input Device) devices to the panel, such as:
• USB pen drives
5 • USB keyboards
• USB barcode scanners
6 • USB card scanners
C-more can log data to the USB pen drive as well as load projects to the panel from the pen
7 drive. You can also back up project files and panel firmware.
Sound Interface (Audio Line Out)
8 When attached to an amplifier and speaker(s), C-more can play warning sounds, or
pre-recorded messages such as: “conveyor is jammed”. C-more supports WAV type files.
The output is stereo. See the next page for the WAV file specifications. Various “Objects” in
9 the C-more programming software support sounds. Sound files are stored in the sound library.
See the C-more programming software help support for additional details.
10 PLC Port
The PLC port is an RS-232C, RS-422A or RS-485A female 15-pin D-sub connector. Use this
11 port for serial connections to PLCs. The port supports the following PLC protocols:
• All AutomationDirect.com PLCs:
Productivity3000
12 CLICK
Direct LOGIC K-sequence
Direct NET
13 Modbus (Koyo Addressing)
• Allen Bradley:
14

DF1 Full & Half Duplex
DF1 Full & Half Duplex - Tag Based
PLC5 DF1
A DH485
• Modbus RTU
B • Entivity Modbus RTU
• GE SNPX (90/30, 90/70, Micro 90, VersaMax Micro)
• Omron:
C

Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500)
FINS (CJ1, CS1)
• Mitsubishi
D
QnA
Melsec FX

• Siemens PPI (S7-200 CPU)

®
2-22 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Audio WAV File Specifications

The C-more Audio Line Out port supports the following WAV file specifications: 1
Audio Format (codec): PCM
Audio Sample Rate: 11 kHz, 22 kHz or 44 kHz 2
Channels: 1 (mono) or 2 (stereo)
Audio Sample Size: 8-bit or 16-bit 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-23
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Memory Organization
1 The following diagram outlines the relationships between the internal memory of the panel
and any external memory device. It also shows how the various memory areas can be used for
2 different functions. The 6”, 8” and 10” panels have a project area of 10 MB, while the 12” and
15” panels have a 40 MB project area.

3 USB Flash Drive

(USB Port Built-in)
CompactFlash Card
(Slot #2 Optional)
CompactFlash Card
(Slot #1 Built-in)

4 Use additional memory for:

■ Project Transfers
■ Project Back-up/Restore
Any capacity Any capacity Any capacity ■ Alarm Logging

5 available available available ■ Message Logging

■ Screen Captures
■ Trend Data Logging
■ Additional Font Memory
External
Memory Devices
■ Recipe Sheets

6 USB 1.1 Port, Type A CF2 Slot

10 MB*
Use additional memory for: Project Memory

7 ■ Project Back-up/Restore
■ Alarm Logging
■ Message Logging
■ Screen Captures
CF1 Slot
■ Trend Data Logging

8 C-more Touch Panel

9 NOTE:
The Project is loaded into the
Internal SDRAM memory from
the Internal Flash Memory and

10 executed in the SDRAM memory.

If a CompactFlash memory
card is plugged into CF1 Slot,
then its Project is loaded into
Internal Flash
Memory
Project and user data run in
the internal SDRAM while
the Internal SDRAM memory the panel is powered.

11
10 MB*
and executed. Project Memory This data is backed-up internally
& Font Memory (32 MB* Internal Flash memory),
and loaded/copied into SDRAM
on power up.

12 Internal SDRAM
Memory
22 MB
Reserved
External Memory devices can
also be used for back-up of
C-more projects.
(Operating System,
*Note: 12” and 15” units have:

13 Firmware, etc.)
■ 64 MB SDRAM
■ 64 MB Internal Flash
■ 40 MB of Available Project
Memory

14 Working
Memory
Internal
256 KB SRAM
Memory

A (Battery Backed)

B Log Buffer
Alarm, Message, and Trend Data
Logging is buffered in SRAM
pending transfer to an External
Memory device:
■ When the buffer nears full

C NOTE:
The Project and Font memory
sizes can be checked by viewing
the Project Transfer dialog box in Retentive
■ Periodically, every 5 minutes
■ When one of the internal ‘eject’
tags is activated via an Object
or Event
the C-more Programming Software. Tag Data

D
®
2-24 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Handling External Memory Devices

Consider the following to prevent data error risk when utilizing data logging. 1
• Do not turn off power to the C-more touch panel at any time the external memory device is being
accessed.
• Do not remove any external memory device when the device is being accessed by the touch panel.
2
Note: A system tag, such as SYS %device% WriteStatus can be used to detect when the external memory 3
device is being accessed. See the C-more programming software on-line help for additional information on
System Tag Names.
4
• If a CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1 slot while the panel is running, the project
will continue to run from the project that is currently in the internal SDRAM. If power is cycled and
there is a good project stored on the CompactFlash, then that project will be loaded into the internal
5
SDRAM and ran.
• Be sure to backup the memory device at regular intervals. 6
• A CompactFlash memory card plugged into the CF1 slot that includes a project that is being run
cannot be used for backup. 7
• If you suspect the memory device is bad, you may want to use a PC to re-format the device, or use a
known good memory device. 8
Note: The C-more touch panel requires that all external memory devices be formatted with a FAT or FAT32
file system. The FAT file system is recommended for better performance. 9
• The number of times the memory device can be written to is limited, approximately 300,000 times.
Consequently, frequent writing at short intervals may shorten the service life of the memory device. 10
Try to use as long as possible sampling times for logging data to reduce the amount of times the
memory device is accessed.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-25
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period

1 It is important to have an understanding of how the touch panel handles power loss as it applies
to data logging and retentive name tag data. The C-more touch panel system CPU will receive
2 a power loss interrupt signal when the incoming DC voltage level drops below 19.2 VDC. If
using the optional AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, then an interrupt signal will occur when
the incoming AC voltage level drops below 58 VAC (+/- 5%). When power loss is detected, the
3 backlight will turn off immediately to allow extending the power retention period. Any logging
to either CompactFlash memory or an USB pen drive will also stop. This will allow time to
4 complete writing any data to the internal 256 KB SRAM. The 256 KB SRAM along with CPU
Date/Time registers are battery backed.

5 Because the 24 VDC power retention time period is very short, only data backup to the internal
256 KB SRAM memory buffer can occur. When power is restored, the contents of the SRAM
will be written to the selected memory storage device.
6 Data Logging Function and Logging Media
7 Considering the power retention period and the CF card write performance, the EA-CF-
CARD memory card is recommended to minimize data loss. It is also recommended to further
8 reduce the risk of losing data, a uninterruptible power supply (UPS) should be used to provide
power to the touch panel.

9 Data Logging - Memory Device Full

The following explains what occurs when logging data from an object, such as Line Trending,
10 and the memory device becomes full. The memory device can be a USB pen drive plugged into
the USB port, or a CompactFlash memory card plugged into location CF1 or CF2.
11 The answer is when the memory device that is being used for logging is full, the panel will stop
writing to the log and a RTE-001 Runtime Error will be displayed on the screen. The displayed
12 error message will read “Log Failed. Not enough Memory Space in %Device%”. (%Device%
can be USB, CF1, or CF2.) The data logging object will continue to execute.
The user can monitor the System Tag “SYS %DEVICE% FreeMemory” with the Event
13 Manager, and display a message to the operator to warn when the memory device is close to
full.
14 The user can also use a Pushbutton object with the tag “SYS Copy Log to %Device%” to copy
ALL logs on ALL other devices to %Device% and therefore save the current data.
A For example, if the application is logging to CF1 and CF2, the user can monitor “SYS CF1
FreeMemory” and “SYS CF2 FreeMemory” in the Event Manager. When the value of either
B gets below a set value in the Event Manager, then the Event Manger can issue an Alarm, send an
email, etc. The operator can then insert a USB pen drive into the panel’s USB port, and press a
pushbutton that is configured with System Tag “SYS Copy Log to USB”. This action will copy
C all of the logged data to the USB pen drive from both CF1 and CF2. The operator can then
use the System Setup Screen’s Memory selection to clear both CompactFlash CF1 and CF2.
D This example can work with different combinations of the memory devices, but the preferred
method is using a USB pen drive because it is the easiest device to insert and remove.

®
2-26 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility
The C-more touch panels comprise three different materials that may be exposed to outside
elements: a gasket, a screen sheet and a bezel.
1
The C-more panel serial number can be found on the label on the back of the panel. It has the
format MODEL NUMBER + yymddBsss. The characters yym represent the year and month
2
of manufacture. These are the characters that determine the materials used in construction of
your panel as follows: 3
All panel gaskets are Silicone
4
Screen Sheet Bezel Frame
Panel Size Date Code Material Material 5
6 inch
05m through 077
078 through 112
PET
PC 6
113 through current PET ABS
05m through 077 PET 7
8 inch 078 through 082
083 through current
PC
PPE/PS 8
05m through 077 PET
10 inch 078 through 081
PC
ABS
9
082 through current PPE/PS
05m through 077 PET
ABS
10
078 through 081
12 and 15 inch
082 through 096
PC
PPE/PS
11
097 through current PET

Chemical compatibility tables begin on the next page. 12

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-27
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

1 The following tables are provided to make you aware of the general compatibility between
chemicals that may be present in your work environment and the various materials used in the
2 manufacture of the panel. Use the table to determine those chemicals that are safe to use around
your C-more touch panel and those that may harm it. The tables are made up of  specifications
provided by the manufacturer of the listed material. The tables rate these chemicals as
3 either Excellent, Good, Not Recommended, or Not Usable. Because the ratings are for ideal
conditions at room temperature, consider all factors when evaluating your application. Areas
4 left blank have not been tested by the manufacturer and therefore information of compatibility
is not available.

5 The values in [brackets] represent the chemical’s density at room temperature, 20 °C.
Screen Sheet – Screen Sheet – Bezel – PPE Gasket –
Bezel – ABS
6 Chemicals
PET
[Density %,
PC
[Density %,
[Density %,
/ PS [Density %,
Temperature
Silicone
[Density %,
Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C] °C] Temperature °C]
7 Acetaldehyde Not Recommended Not Usable
[10, 20 °C] Excellent
8 [Glacial] Excellent
[10, 20 °C] Excellent
[50, 20 °C] Not Usable
Acetic Acid
9 [50-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[100, 20 °C] Not Usable
10 Acetic anhydride Not Recommended
Acetone Excellent Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable

11 Acetophenone
Acetylene
Not Usable
Excellent
Not Usable

12 Acrylonitrile
Alcohol - Butyl Ether
Not Recommended Not Usable
Excellent
Alcohol - Ethanol Excellent
13 Alcohol - Isopropyl Excellent
Alums NH3, Cr, K Excellent
14 Aluminum acetate Excellent
Aluminum bromide Good
A Aluminum chloride Good
Aluminum nitrate Excellent

B Aluminum sulfate
Ammonia
Excellent

Good Good Good

[anhydrous] (10%)
C Ammonia gas [cold] Good
Ammonia liquid Good
D Table continued at top of next page.

®
2-28 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

Screen Sheet –
PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS Gasket – Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %,
Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
2
[12%] Not Usable [12%] Not Usable
Ammonia water

Ammonium carbonate
[28%] Not Usable [28%] Not Usable
Excellent
3
Ammonium chloride
Ammonium hydroxide
Excellent

Excellent
4
[ammonia water]
Ammonium nitrate Excellent 5
Ammonium nitrite Excellent
Ammonium persulfate
Ammonium phosphate
Excellent
Excellent
6
Ammonium sulfate
Amyl acetate
Excellent
Not Usable
7
Amyl alcohol
Aniline dyes
Good
Not Recommended 8
Animal oil [lard] Good
Aqua regia Not Usable 9
Arsenic acid Not Recommended
Asphalt Excellent 10
Barium chloride Excellent
Barium hydroxide
Barium sulfate
Excellent
Excellent
11
Barium sulfide
Beer
Excellent
Excellent Good
12
Beet sugar liquors
Benzaldehyde
Excellent
Not Recommended Not Usable 13
Benzene [Benzol] Not Recommended Not Usable
Benzene Excellent Not Usable Not Usable 14
Benzine Not Usable Not Usable
Benzyl alcohol Not Recommended Not Usable A
Benzyl benzoate Not Usable Not Usable
Benzyl chloride
Borax
Not Usable
Excellent
Not Usable
B
Boric acid
Bromine
Good
Not Usable
C
Butane Excellent
D
Table continued at top of next page.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-29
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

1 Screen Sheet –
PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS Gasket – Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %,
2 Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Butter Good
3 Butyl acetate Not Usable Not Usable
Butyl acrylate Not Usable Not Usable

4 Butyl alcohol [Butanol]

Butyl Cellosolve Not Usable
Good Good

5 Calcium actetate
Calcium bisulfite
Excellent
Good
Calcium chloride Excellent
6 Calcium hydroxide Excellent
Calcium hypochlorite [20,RT] Excellent
7 Calcium nitrate Excellent
Calcium sulfide Excellent
8 Cane sugar liquors Excellent Good
Carbon dioxide Excellent

9 Carbon disulfide
Carbonic acid
Not Usable
Good

10 Carbon tetrachloride
Castor oil
Excellent Not Usable
Not Recommended
Not Usable
Not Usable
China wood [tung] oil Excellent Not Usable
11 Chlorine gas [dry] Not Usable
Chlorine gas [wet] Not Usable
12 Chlorine liquid Not Usable
Chlorinated solvents Not Usable Not Usable
13 Chloroacetic acid
Chloroacetone
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable

14 Chloroform
Chlorophenol
Excellent
Not Usable
Not Usable Not Usable
Not Usable

A Chlorosulfonic acid
Chlorotoluene
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
[2, 70 °C] Not Usable [2, 70 °C] Not Usable
B [5, 70 °C] Not Usable [5, 70 °C] Not Usable
Chromic acid [10, 70 °C] [10, 70 °C]
C Not Usable
[25, 70 °C]
Not Usable
[25, 70 °C]
Not Usable Not Usable
D Citric acid Good

Table continued at top of next page.

®
2-30 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

Screen Sheet –
PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS Gasket – Silicone 1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %,
Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
2
Cocoanut oil Good Not Usable
Copper chloride Excellent 3
Copper cyanide Excellent
Copper sulfate
Corn oil
Excellent
Good Not Usable
4
Cottonseed oil
Creosol
Good
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
5
Cyclohexane Good Not Usable
Cyclohexanol Good Not Usable 6
Cyclohexanone Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable
Developing solutions
[Hypos]
Excellent 7
Dibutyl phthalate [DBP]
Dichlorobenzene
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
8
Diethylene glycol Good Not Usable
Diethyl ether Not Usable Not Usable 9
Disopropyl ketone Not Usable Not Usable
Dimethyl aniline Not Usable Not Usable 10
Dimethyl formamide Not Usable Not Usable
Dioxane Not Usable Not Usable 11
Dipentene Not Usable Not Usable
Epichlorohydrine
Ethyl acetate Excellent
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
12
Ethyl acetoacetate
Ethyl acrylate
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
Not Usable
13
Ethyl alcohol Not Recommended Good
Ethyl benzene Not Usable Not Usable 14
Ethyl chloride Not Usable Not Usable
Ethylene chlorohydrin Not Usable Not Usable A
Ethylene diamine Not Usable Not Usable
Ethylene dichloride Not Usable Not Usable B
Ethylene glycol Excellent Good
Ethylene oxide
Fatty acid
Not Usable
Good
Not Usable
Not Usable
C
Ferric chloride Excellent
D
Table continued at top of next page.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-31
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

1 Screen Sheet
– PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS
Gasket –
Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C]
Ferric nitrate Excellent
3 Ferric sulfate Excellent
Fluorboric acid Not Recommended

4 Fluorobenzene
Fluosilicic acid
Not Usable
Not Recommended
Not Usable

5 Formaldehyde [40, 20 °C] Good

[40, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[25, 20 °C] Excellent
6 Formic acid [50, 20 °C] Good
[90, 20 °C] Not
7 Freon [45°C] Excellent
Recommended

Freon 11 Not Recommended

8 Freon 12 Good
Freon 113 Not Usable
9 Freon 114 Not Recommended
Fuel oil Good
10 Gasoline (Leaded) Good Not Recommended Not Usable Not Usable
Gasoline (Unleaded) Good Not Recommended Not Usable Not Usable

11 Gelatin
Glauber’s salt
Excellent
Excellent

12 Glucose
Glue
Excellent
Excellent
Glycerin Excellent Good
13 Grease Excellent Good
Hexane Not Recommended Not Usable
14 Hexyl alcohol Good Not Usable
[20, 20 °C] Not Usable
A Hydrobromic acid
[20-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[37, 20 °C] Not Usable
B [18%] Excellent
[10, 20 °C] Excellent [10, 20 °C] Good
[20, 20 °C] Good
C Hydrochloric acid [20-80, 20 °C]
Not Recommended
Good
[35%] Good [35%] Good
[38,20 °C]
D Not Recommended
Table continued at top of next page.

®
2-32 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

Screen Sheet –
PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS
Gasket –
Silicone
1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] 2
Hydrocyanic acid Excellent

Hydrofluoric acid
[10, 20 °C] Excellent
[20, 20 °C] Excellent
3
Hydrofluoric acid
[40, 20 °C] Good
4
Not Usable
anhydrous
Hydrogen Excellent 5
[5, 20 °C]

Hydrogen peroxide
Not Recommended
[5-50, 20 °C] 6
Not Recommended
[30, 20 °C]
Not Usable 7
Hydrogen sulfide Excellent
Hydorquinone
Hypochlorous acid
Not Recommended
Not Recommended
8
Isobutyl alcohol
Isopropyl acetate
Good Good
Not Usable
Good
Not Usable
9
Isopropyl alcohol
JP fuels (1-6)
Good
Good
Good
Not Usable
10
Kerosene Good Not Usable
Lacquer Not Usable 11
Lactic acid Excellent
Lard Excellent 12
Lead acetate Excellent
Lead nitrate
Lead sulfamate
Good
Good
13
Linoleic acid
Linseed oil
Excellent
Excellent Not Usable
14
Liquified petroleum gas
[LPG]
Excellent
A
Lubricating oil Excellent
Lye solution
Magnesium chloride
Excellent
Excellent
B
Magnesium hydroxide
Magnesium sulfate
Excellent
Excellent
C
Maleic acid Excellent
D
Table continued at top of next page.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-33
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

1 Screen Sheet –
PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS Gasket – Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 [Density %, [Density %,
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Marcuric chloride Excellent
3 MEK Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable
Mercury Excellent
4 Metacresol Not Usable
Methylene Chloride Not Usable

5 Methyl acetate
Methyl alcohol Excellent
Not Usable
Not Recommended
Not Usable
Not Usable

6 Methyl Benzoate
Methyl chloride
Not Usable
Not Usable Not Usable
Methyl ethyl ketone
7 [MEK]
Methyl isobutyl
Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable

Not Usable Not Usable

8 ketone [MIBK]
Methyl methacrylate Not Usable Not Usable
Methyl dichloride Not Usable Not Usable
9 Methyl Salicylate Not Usable
Milk Excellent
10 Mineral oil Excellent Excellent
Monochlorobenzene Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable

11 Naptha
Napthalene
Good
Excellent

12 Napthenic acid
Natural gas
Good
Excellent
Natural oil Excellent
13 Nickel acetate Excellent
Nickel chloride Excellent
14 Nickel sulfate Excellent
[10, 20 °C] Good [10, 20 °C] Not Usable
A [35%] Good
[10-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[10-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[30, 20 °C] [30, 20 °C]
B Nitric acid
Not Usable
[30-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[30-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable Not Usable
C [60%] Not Usable
[61.3, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[61.3, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[Vapor, 20 °C] [Vapor, 20 °C]
D Not Usable Not Usable

Table continued at top of next page.

®
2-34 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

Screen Sheet
– PET
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS
Gasket –
Silicone
1
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %,
Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] 2
Nitrobenzene Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable
Nitroethane Not Usable Not Usable 3
Nitromethane Not Usable Not Usable
Nitropropane
Nitrogen
Not Usable
Excellent
Not Usable
Good
4
Octyl alcohol
Oleic acid
Good
Excellent Not Usable
5
Olive oil Excellent Not Usable
Oxalic acid Excellent 6
Oxygen Excellent
Ozone Not Recommended 7
Palmitic acid Excellent
Perchloroethylene Not Usable Not Usable 8
Petroleum Excellent Not Usable
Phenol Not Usable Not Usable
[50, 20 °C] Good
Not Usable
9
[50-70, 20 °C]
Phospheric acid Not Usable
[75, 20 °C]
10
Not Usable
[Sulfuric acid 20%
+ nitric acid 4%] Good
11
Pickling solution [Sulfuric acid 40%
+ nitric acid 15%]
Not Recommended
12
Pine oil
Potassium chloride
Good
Excellent
13
Potassium cyanide Excellent
Potassium dichromate [10, 20 °C] Excellent 14
Potassium hydroxide [10%] Not Usable Excellent
Potassium nitrate Excellent A
Potassium permangante [5, 20 °C] Excellent
Potassium sulfate Excellent B
Propane Excellent
Propyl acetate
Propyl alcohol
Not Usable
Good
Not Usable
Good
C
Salt water Excellent Good
D
Table continued at top of next page.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-35
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

1 Screen Sheet
– PET
Screen Sheet
– PC
Bezel – ABS Bezel – ABS
Gasket –
Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %, [Density %, [Density %,
2 Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C] Temperature °C]
Temperature °C]
Silicone oils Good Good
3 Silver nitrate Excellent
Skydrol 500 Not Usable

4 Skydrol 7000
Soap solutions
Not Usable
Excellent
Not Usable

5 Soda ash
Sodium bicarbonate
Excellent
Excellent
Sodium bisulfate
6 Sodium borate
Good
Excellent
Sodium carbonate [10%] Excellent
7 Sodium chloride Excellent Good
Sodium cyanide Excellent
8 [40%] Not Usable [40%] Not Usable [10, 20 °C] Excellent
Sodium hydroxide [30, 20 °C] Excellent Good
9 [30-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
[5, 20 °C] Excellent
10 Sodium hypochlorite
[5-70, 20 °C] Not Usable
Sodium
Excellent
11 metaphosphate
Sodium nitrate Excellent
Sodium perborate Excellent
12 Sodium peroxide Not Usable
Sodium phosphate Excellent
13 Sodium thiosulfate Excellent
Sodium sulfate
Good
14 [Glauber’s salt]
Sodium sulfite Excellent
Soybean oil
A Stannic chloride
Excellent
Good
[below 150 degrees]
B Steam
Not Usable
[above 150 degrees]
Not Usable
C Stearic acid Excellent
Styrene Not Recommended Not Usable

D Sucrose solutions Excellent Good

Table continued at top of next page.

®
2-36 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 2: Specifications

Chemical Compatibility (cont’d)

Screen Sheet
Screen Sheet
– PC Bezel – ABS
Bezel – ABS Gasket – 1
– PET [Density %, Silicone
Chemicals [Density %, [Density %,
[Density %,
Temperature °C]
Temperature
°C]
Temperature °C]
Temperature
°C]
[Density %,
Temperature °C] 2
Sulfur
Sulfur dioxide
Excellent
Good 3
[10, 20 °C] Excellent [10, 20 °C] Good
[40%] Excellent
[10-70, 20 °C] Not Usable
4
Sulfuric acid
[60%] Excellent [30, 20 °C] Excellent
[30-70, 20 °C]
Not Usable
5
Not Recommended

[70%] Excellent
[98, 20 °C] Not Usable
[Vapor, 20 °C] Not
6
Usable
[80%] Not Usable 7
Sulpherous acid [10, 20 °C] Good
Tannic acid
Tar
Good
Not Recommended
8
Tartaric acid
Terpineol
Excellent
Not Recommended
9
Tetrachloroethane
Tetraethyl lead
Excellent Not Usable
Good Not Usable 10
Tetralin Not Usable
Tetrahydrofuran Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable 11
Thionyl chloride Not Usable Not Usable
Toluene Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable 12
Trichloroethylene
Not Usable Not Usable
[Trichlene]
Triethanol amine Good Not Usable
13
Turpentine oil Good Not Usable
Vegetable oil Good Not Usable 14
Vinegar Excellent Good
Water Excellent Good A
Whiskey Excellent
Xylene Excellent Not Usable Not Usable Not Usable B
Zeolites Excellent
Zinc acetate
Zinc chloride
Excellent
Excellent
C
Zinc sulfate Excellent
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
2-37
 Chapter
Accessories
3
2
In This Chapter...
Accessories.................................................................................................................. 3–2
Accessories Overview.................................................................................................. 3–3
Accessories at a Glance.............................................................................................. 3–4
AC/DC Power Adapter – EA-AC................................................................................. 3–5
Expansion Assembly – EA-EXP-OPT............................................................................ 3–9
CF Card Interface Module – EA-CF-IF....................................................................... 3–12
CompactFlash Memory – EA-CF-CARD..................................................................... 3–14
6” Adapter Plate – EA-6-ADPTR............................................................................... 3–17
D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter – EA-ADPTR-4................................. 3–19
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter – EA-COMCON-3................................... 3–20
Non-glare Screen Covers – EA-xx-COV2, xx = 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15............................ 3–22
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories
1 Part Number Description Part Number Description
The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for
2 C-more touch panels only, and is powered
from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power
source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ D-SUB 15-pin to 6-terminal PLC serial
communication port adapter to allow wire
EA-AC 1.5 A. Power Fault features help protect EA-COMCON-3
3 data being logged to CompactFlash during
power failures. The C-more panel must
terminal connections for RS-422/485 PLC
communication cable.
have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or
4 higher for proper operation.
Expansion Assembly, is used to allow Non Glare 6 Inch Screen Cover, protective
installation of the optional CF Card overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-EXP-OPT Interface Module for CF card use and also EA-6-COV2
5 provides a slot for future option modules.
while helping to reduce the glare from
external light sources. (pk of 3)
CF Card Interface Module, is used with the Non Glare 8 Inch Screen Cover, protective
6 EA-CF-IF Expansion Assembly to allow use of CF
cards, such as the CompactFlash Memory, EA-8-COV2
overlay used to protect the touch screen
while helping to reduce the glare from
p/n EA-CF-CARD. external light sources. (pk of 3)

7 EA-CF-CARD
CompactFlash Memory Card Option,
industrial grade, high speed memory for EA-10-COV2
Non Glare 10-Inch Screen Cover, protective
overlay used to protect the touch screen
non-volatile storage. while helping to reduce the glare from
8 6 Inch Adapter Plate, allows C-more 6”
external light sources. (pk of 3)
Non Glare 12-Inch Screen Cover, protective
touch panels to be mounted into EZTouch overlay used to protect the touch screen
EA-6-ADPTR 6” non-slim bezel cutouts without having EA-12-COV2
9 to make alterations. NEMA 4/4X.
while helping to reduce the glare from
external light sources. (pk of 3)

10 EA-ADPTR-4
D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree PLC serial
communication port adapter to allow a PLC
communication cable to be plugged in at EA-15-COV2
Non Glare 15-Inch Screen Cover, protective
overlay used to protect the touch screen
a 90 degree angle to reduce panel depth while helping to reduce the glare from
11 requirements. external light sources. (pk of 3)

12
13 SH
-1
- F LAH CARD

14 Warning: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or

Flash memory cards with the C-more touch
E
512
Z LA
KB
F
te
Da 38
0 2
S

Co
de

:
ING this
panels. RN with

A Ins
WAodulewn.
m o
tall ide d
s

B
C
D
®
3-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories Overview
NOTE: CompactFlash memory card designations – CF Slot #1 is at the top of the panel and CF Slot #2 is the
1
CF Card Interface Module, EA-CF-IF.
2
CF Card
3
CompactFlash Memory Card Interface Module
EA-CF-CARD EA-CF-IF 4
CF card interface
module installs
in right slot only,
5
left slot for future

CF card plugs
6
into slot #1

C-more
at top of panel 7
Touch Panel Expansion Assembly
EA-EXP-OPT
8
9
AC/DC Power Adapter
EA-AC
10
11
12
NOTE: Refer to the individual product data sheets that are included with the accessories for additional
information.
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-3
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Accessories at a glance:
1
2 AC/DC Power Adapter:
EA-AC
6 inch Adapter Plate:
EA-6-ADPTR
(Used to retrofit new
Non glare 15 inch screen cover:
EA-15-COV2
(pk of 3)

3 C-more 6” touch panel

into existing EZTouch
non-slim panel cutout.)
Non glare 12 inch screen cover:

4 Expansion Assembly:
EA-EXP-OPT
D-SUB 15 pin 90 degree
EA-12-COV2
(pk of 3)
Comm Port Adapter:

5 EA-ADPTR-4
Non glare 10 inch screen cover:
EA-10-COV2
(pk of 3)

6 CF Card Interface Module:

EA-CF-IF
D-SUB 15 pin to
Terminal Block Adapter:
EA-COMCON-3 Non glare 8 inch screen cover:
EA-8-COV2

7 (pk of 3)

CompactFlash Non glare 6 inch screen cover:

8 CF Memory Card:
EA-CF-CARD
EA-6-COV2
(pk of 3)

9
10
11
12 WARNING
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate
13 the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and it is your responsibility
to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation are in
14 compliance with the latest revision of these codes.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We

A do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any
responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional
B information, please call us at 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At Automationdirect.com® we
C constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or
publications at any time without notice and without obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may

D not be available in certain revisions of the product.

®
3-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter

The optional C-more AC/DC Power Adapter can be used to power the C-more touch panels
from a 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz, voltage source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A
1
to the touch panel’s DC power connector and can be conveniently secured to the touch panel
with two captive screws. The adapter provides a power loss signal to the touch panel that can be 2
used to track power outages. This signal also allows the touch panel by way of a timed sequence
to stop writing data to CompactFlash memory devices providing a controlled shutdown for 3
increased data logging reliability.
4
Warning: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C touch panel when
operating temperatures are expected to exceed 40 °C [104 °F]. 5
NOTE: 1.)The AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, is for C-more touch panels only, and is powered from a
6
100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz power source. The adapter provides 24 VDC @ 1.5 A.
2.) Power Fault features help protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. 7
The C-more panel must have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation.
8
Part No. EA-AC AC/DC Power Adapter Wiring 9
10
0
AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
11
when operating temperatures are expected

12
to be above 40 deg C.

13
Recommended AC Supply Fuse

14
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

50/60 Hz

Tightening Torque
Power supply cable torque 71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm)
A
Power connector mounting torque
Mounting flange screw torque
71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm)
57 - 71 oz-in (0.4 - 0.5 Nm)
B
NOTE: Use 60 / 75 °C copper conductors only. C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-5
 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications

1 Part Number
AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications
EA-AC
Input Voltage & frequency 100-240 VAC; 50/60 Hertz
2 Voltage Range
Permissible Momentary
85-264 VAC w/ Under Voltage and Over Voltage Shutdown
Within 40 ms, see explanation in the Note below.
3 Power Failure
Input Power 68 VA or less
0 °C to 50 °C [32 to 122 °F] Maximum surrounding temperature rating, 50 °C
4 Operating Temperature Range (For the EA7-T15C touch panel, maximum temperature is 40° C, [104 °F] when
using the AC/DC Power Adapter.)
Storage Temperature Range -20 to 60 °C [-4 to 140 °F]

5 Operating & Storage Humidity

Noise Immunity
10-85% RH (non-condensing)
1000 VAC p-p (Pulse width 1 µs, rise time: 1 ns)
With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
6 Hi-pot 1000 VAC, 1 minute
With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
500 VDC, 10 M ohm or above
7 Insulation Resistance With proper ground connection on AC terminal block.
Vibration Compliant with IEC61131-2

8 Shock Pulse shape: Sine half wave, Peak acceleration: 147 m/s2 (15 G),
X, Y, Z: 3 directions, 2 times each
Thermal Protection 140 °C [284 °F], with autorecovery
9 Short Circuit Protection
Static Electricity Discharge
85 VAC: 2.6 A, 100 VAC: 2.8 A, 264 VAC: 3.9 A
Compliant with IEC61000-4-2, Contact: 4 kV, Air: 8 kV
Resistance
10 Agency Approvals UL508, cUL, CE, EMC EN61132-2
Environment For use in pollution degree 2 environment

11 Grounding Ground resistance: less than 100 ohm

3.00” (H) x 3.66” (W) x 1.42” (D) [76.2 mm x 93.0 mm x 36.1 mm]
Diemnsions - inches [mm] (Excluding DC Power Connector.)
12 Weight
Cooling Method
6.13 oz. [175 g]
Natural convection when installed on vertically mounted touch panel.

13 Included Parts
Removable AC Power Connector
AC Power Connector, Data Sheet Insert
EA-AC-CON or DECA Switchlab MC101-508-03G
Secure with (2) captive M2.5 screws, torque to 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm]
14 Output Voltage and Ripple
Output Current
21.6 - 26.4 VDC, Ripple < 100 mV p-p
Maximum 1.5 A

A Inrush Current
For 100 VAC: 15 A, 3 ms or less
For 240 VAC: 20 A, 3 ms or less
Power Fail Detection Voltage 58 VAC ±5%
B Recommended AC Supply Fuse
Power Supply Cable Torque
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3
71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm)
Mounting to Touch Panel Secure with (2) spring loaded captive M3-20 screws, torque to 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm]
C NOTE: Permissible momentary power failure: The C-more touch panel will turn off the LCD backlight instantly
when the power failure is detected (less than 58 VAC +/- 5%) for extending the Power Retention Period that
D enables the CPU to run longer. The backlight turns on automatically when the power returns to the C-more
operating voltage.

®
3-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Dimensions

Dimensions
1
Screw
3.661
AC Power Label 2
[93.0]

3
3.001
4
[76.2]

5
DC Power
6
Screw Connector

7
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW REAR VIEW

AC Power
Connector

Units: inches [mm]

8
1.421 ±0.02
[36.1 ±0.5]

9
0.579

10
[14.7]

BOTTOM VIEW

11
Panel Depth with AC/DC Power Adapter Installed 12
X.XXX
[XX.X]
13
EA7-S6M-R = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T6CL-R = 2.921 [74.2]
14
EA7-S6C-R = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6M = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6C = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T6C = 2.921 [74.2]
A
EA7-T6CL = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T8C = 3.157 [80.2]
EA7-T10C = 3.106 [78.9]
B
EA7-T12C = 3.102 [78.8]
EA7-T15C = 3.075 [78.1]

Units: inches[mm]
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-7
 Chapter 3: Accessories

AC/DC Power Adapter Installation

1 Warning: This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may be caused by
static electricity discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
2
3
1 2
4
5
6
7 Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a lint-free Insert the AC/DC Power Adapter into the touch panel’s
soft surface to prevent scratching the display screen if not 5-position DC power connector.
8 already installed in a control cabinet. Remove the DC power
connector if it is installed.

9
10 3 4
11
12
13
14 Secure the AC/DC Power Adapter to the touch panel by
tightening the two (2) spring loaded captive M3-20 screws
Plug the wired 3-pin AC Power Connector into its mating
connector on the adapter and secure in place by tightening
to a torque of 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm]. the two (2) captive M2.5 screws to a torque of 70 oz-in [0.5
A Nm]. (Wiring details shown on page 3-5.)

B
C
D
®
3-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly
The C-more Expansion Assembly is used to allow installation of the optional CF Card Interface Module for CF card use and
also provides a slot for future option modules.
1
2
Part No. EA-EXP-OPT Expansion Assembly Dimensions
2.165
3
[55.0]

4
1.618
Units: inches [mm]
5
[41.1]
2.067
[52.5]

Connector Cover
6
7
3.567
[90.6]
8
9
0.459
10
[11.7]

Screw
11
12
Panel Depth with
Expansion Assembly Installed Expansion Assembly Details
13
EA7-S6M = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-S6C = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T6C = 2.921 [74.2]
14
Units: inches[mm] EA7-T6CL = 2.921 [74.2]
EA7-T8C = 3.157 [80.2]
EA7-T10C = 3.106 [78.9]
EA7-T12C = 3.102 [78.8]
A
X.XXX
[XX.X]
EA7-T15C = 3.075 [78.1]
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-9
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly Installation

1 Warning: This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
working with electronic equipment. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
2
3
1 2
4
5
6
7
Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a lint- Remove expansion area cover by pressing down on the
8 free soft surface to prevent scratching the display screen
if not already installed in a control cabinet.
left and right line markings and at the same time, slide
the cover in the direction of the embossed arrow.

9
10 3 4
11
12
13
14 The cover will stop at the “Remove” position indicated
by a tic mark on the cover lining up with the “Remove”
tic mark on the panel. At this position, lift the cover up.
Position the expansion assembly over the opening so
that the tic mark to the right of the fastening screw lines
up with the “Remove” tic mark.

A
B
C
D
®
3-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Expansion Assembly Installation (cont’d)

1
5 6 2
3
Note: The Expansion Assembly 4
is shown in the photos with two
covers. The unit is shipped with
only one cover in place.
5
Slide the expansion assembly in a downward direction Secure the Expansion Assembly to the touch panel by
6
until the tic marks at the home position line up. tightening the spring loaded captive M3-20 screw to a
torque of 50 oz-in [0.35 Nm].
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-11
 Chapter 3: Accessories

CF Card Interface Module

1 The C-more CF Card Interface Module is used with the Expansion Assembly to allow use
of CompactFlash™ cards, such as the CompactFlash Memory, EA-CF-CARD.
2 Part No. EA-CF-IF
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CF Card Interface Module Dimensions
10 0.780
[19.8]
2.122
Product Label
11 [53.9]

12 EA-CF-IF

13 3.024
[76.8]

14
A
B
Units: inches [mm]
C
D
®
3-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

CF Card Interface Module Installation

Warning: The CF Card Interface Module is designed to be installed in the right hand side slot of the
Expansion Assembly only. This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are
1
experienced in working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may
be caused by static electricity discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding. 2
3
1 2 4
5
6
7
Preparation: Place the touch panel face down on a
lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the display
screen if not already installed in a control cabinet. Again,
Install the CF Card Interface Module, p/n EA-CF-IF,
into the right hand side slot by carefully aligning the
female connector of the interface module with the male
8
make sure the input power is disconnected. Remove the connector on the touch panel. There are PCB guides at
right hand side protective slot cover, if it is installed, by
squeezing the pinch tabs and lifting the cover off.
the top and bottom of the slot to accept the edge of the
Interface Module’s printed circuit board. It is also helpful
9
to preset the locking tabs of the Interface Module so they
are swung inward, top and bottom.
10
3 4 11
12
13
14
Continue to slide the interface module into the slot until The above photo shows the CF Card Interface Module
fully installed. To remove the Interface Module in the
A
the front of the module is flush with the front of the
future, pry out on the top and bottom locking tabs at
Expansion Assembly. Press on the front of the Interface
Module until the locking tabs snap into place. the same time and the module will release from the
connector. Lift the module from the slot. The Interface
B
Module should only be removed from the slot with input
power disconnected.
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-13
 Chapter 3: Accessories

CompactFlash Memory
1 EA-CF-CARD is a high speed industrial grade CompactFlash™ memory card for non-
volatile storage. Its 85 °C operating temperature makes it perfect for data logging in
2 industrial applications (recommended for C-more touch panels).

3
Part No. EA-CF-CARD Specifications/Features:
4 • CompactFlash™ Compatibility
• W/E Endurance: 100,000 cycles
5 • Data transfer rate: 16MB/second
• Operating Temp: -13° to 185° F (-25° to 85° C)
6 • Operating Humity: 85% max, non-condensing
• Storage Temp: -13° to 194° F (-25° to 90° C)
7 • Storage Humity: 95% max, non-condensing

8
9
10
11
12
13 CF Slot #1 Location CF Slot #2 Location
14
A
B
C
D
®
3-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

CompactFlash Memory Card Installation

Warning: Take the necessary steps to prevent damage that may be caused by static electricity
discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding.
1
Preparation: If the touch panel is not already installed into a control 2
cabinet, then in a clean environment, place the panel face down on a lint-
CF Card Installed in CF Slot #1: free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.
3
1 2
Protective CF Slot #1
dust cover 4
5
6
7
Remove the protective dust cover from the CF Slot #1
at the top of the touch panel by prying up on one edge.
Orientate the CompactFlash memory card so that the
front label is facing the back of the panel and the CF card 8
Discard the dust cover or store it for future use when a CF connector faces into the slot. There are guides on each
card is not being used. side of the slot that will match the guides on the CF card.
The CF card can only be inserted one way. 9
3 4
CF card
eject button
10
11
12
13
Gently press the CF card into the slot until it stops. You To remove the CF card from the CF Slot #1, press in on the 14
should feel a slight resistance as the CF card connector eject button to the right of the CF card. This will cause the CF
mates with the slot’s connector. The CF card should be
flush with the slot’s opening. The dust cover can then be
re-installed.
card to be partially ejected from the slot allowing removal.
A
- F
Z LAS
SH
-1
LAH CARD
B
E F
KB

C
de
Warning: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or 512
te
Da 38
Co
0 2 :
Flash memory cards with the C-more touch ING this
RN with
WAodulewn.
panels. m o
tall ide d
Ins s

D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-15
 Chapter 3: Accessories

CompactFlash Memory Card Installation (cont’d)

1
2 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then
remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean environment,

3 CF Card Installed in CF Slot #2:

place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching
the front of the panel.

4
1 CF Slot
#2 2
5
6
7
8 Orientate the CompactFlash memory card so that the Gently press the CF card into the slot until it stops. You
front label is facing the power supply connector and the should feel a slight resistance as the CF card connector
9 CF card connector faces into the slot. There are guides on
each side of the slot that will match the guides on the CF
mates with the slot’s connector. The CF card should be
flush with the slot’s opening.
card. The CF card can only be inserted one way.
10
11 3 Warning: Do NOT use EZTouch RAM or
Flash memory cards with the C-more touch
panels.
12
13 CF card H-1
AS ARD
Z -FLLASH C
eject button E F
14 512
KB
te
Da 38
2
0
Co

R w
d e

G: his
NIN ith t
WAodulewn.

A
m o
tall ide d
Ins
To remove the CF card from the CF Slot #2, press in on s

the eject button at the bottom of the CF card. This will

cause the CF card to be partially ejected from the slot
B allowing removal.

C
D
®
3-16 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

6” Adapter Plate
The adapter plate has been designed to simplify the retrofit of a new C-more 6” touch
panel into an existing cabinet cutout for an EZTouch 6” non-slim touch panel, such as
1
AutomationDirect part number EZ-S6C-K, EZ-S6C-F, EZ-S6M-R or EZ-S6M-F. The new
C-more 6” touch panel will directly mount into the existing cutout opening for any 2
EZTouch 6” slim touch panel.
Part No. EA-6-ADPTR 6” Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions 3
8.076
[205.1]
4.250
4
[108.0] 0.837

5
2.125 [21.3]
[54.0]
Adapter Plate
Outline

0.218 Dia.
Centerline
6
[5.5] CUTOUT

7
(6 places)

6.222 5.624
[158.0] [142.8]

3.111
[79.0] Units: inches [mm]
2.812
[71.4]
8
9
0.705
[17.9]
3.761
[95.5]
7.522
[191.1]
0.705
[17.9]
0.837
[21.3] 10
11
12
6” Adapter Plate Dimensions
13
8.932
[226.9]
0.618
[15.7]
0.118 ±0.04
[3.0 ±1.0]
8.076 ±0.02
[205.1 ±0.5]
4.250 ±0.02
14
[108.0 ±0.5]

A
7.299
[185.4] M4
Thread
Centerline
6.223 ±0.02
[158.1 ±0.5] B
Insert
Units: inches[mm]

C
(6 places)

Adapter Gasket
Front View Side View Rear View
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-17
 Chapter 3: Accessories

6” Adapter Plate Installation

The adapter plate has been designed to simplify the retrofit of a new C-more 6” touch
1 panel into an existing cabinet cutout for an EZTouch 6” non-slim touch panel, such as
our part number EZ-S6C-K, EZ-S6C-F, EZ-S6M-R or EZ-S6M-F. The new C-more 6” touch
2 panel will directly mount into the existing cutout opening for any EZTouch 6” slim touch
panel.

3 Two sets of mounting screws are provided with the adapter plate. Set A contains six
M4 metric screws by 8mm in length for a control cabinet thickness range of 0.02-0.118”
[0.5-3mm]. Set B contains six M4 metric screws by 10mm in length for a control cabinet
4 thickness range of 0.118-0.197” [3-5mm]. Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm].
The two DIN mounting clips that secure the C-more 6” touch panel to the adapter plate
5 are provided with the touch panel. The adapter plate has an integral sealing gasket and
the touch panel includes a gasket to seal the panel to the adapter.
6 Use of the adapter plate will maintain the NEMA 4/4X (indoor) rating of the C-more
touch panel.
7 Dimensions for the cutout with mounting hole locations and an assembly diagram are
shown in this chapter.
8 Preparation: Confirm the existing cutout with the dimensions shown on the previous
page when using the adapter plate to replace an existing EZTouch 6” non-slim touch
panel with a new C-more 6” touch panel.
9
Warning: Mount the adapter plate and touch panel on a vertical surface to allow proper
10 cooling.

11 6“ C-more
Touch Panel
6” Adapter Plate Assembly

12 C-more
Adapter Plate
Enclosure

13 Two sets of mounting screws provided:

Set A - M4-8 metric screws for an enclosure
14 thickness range of 0.02-0.118 inch [0.5-3mm]
Set B - M4-10 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.118-0.197 inch [3-5mm]
Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]
A DIN Mounting
Clips

B
C
D Screw Torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]

®
3-18 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin 90 degree Comm Port Adapter

The EA-ADPTR-4 adapter is plugged
1.695
allow a PLC communication cable[43.1]
into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the panel to
to be plugged in at a 90 degree angle to reduce panel
1
depth requirements. UL Recognized.
2
Part No. EA-ADPTR-4
3
Rear Panel Dimensions with
View Units: inches [mm]
Connector Installed 4
R
0.333
[8.5]
5
6
Front
View
7
8
Comm Port Adapter Dimensions
9
Units: inches [mm]
10
0.412
[10.5]

11
0.751
[19.1]

Date code
1.605
[40.8]

Country of Origin

KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

EA-ADPTR-4
IOIOI – PLC
12
1.873 0.793
13
[47.6] [20.2]
14
A
B
C
Installation D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-19
 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter

1 The EA-COMCON-3 adapter is1.695 plugged into the 15-pin serial port on the rear of the panel to
allow wire terminal connections [43.1]
for RS-422/485 PLC communication cable. UL Recognized.
2 Part No. EA-COMCON-3
3 Rear Panel Dimensions with
View

4 Connector
Units: inches [mm] Installed
0.687
[17.5]
5
R

6
Front

7 View

8 Terminal Block Adapter Dimensions

9 Units: inches [mm]
0.564
[14.3]

10
11
0.903
[22.9]

Date code
Country of Origin
1.756
[44.6]

12 KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.

EA-COMCON-3
TERM
GND

RD+
RD–
SD+
SD–

13
1.873 1.126
14 [47.6] [28.6]

A
B
C
D Installation

®
3-20 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter (cont’d)

Terminal Block Adapter Wiring Diagram
1
D-SUB 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter 2
(P/N EA-COMCON-3)

GND
Wiring Diagram 5
GND
15-pin
D-sub
3
(male)
SD–
12

11
TXD–
15
4
SD+ TXD+
Terminals
RD–
10
RXD– 5
TERM
GND

RD+
RD–
SD+
SD–

9
1
6
RD+ RXD+
13
TERM TERM

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-21
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Non-glare Screen Covers

1 Non Glare 6 Inch Screen Cover, protective overlay used to protect the touch screen while
helping to reduce the glare from external light sources. (pk of 3)
2 Part No. EA-6-COV2, EA-8-COV2, EA-10-COV2, EA-12-COV2 & EA-15-COV2
3
4
5
Screen Cover Dimensions
6 12.563 0.197
[319.1] [5.0]

7 EA-15-COV2
0.157
[4.0]
Adhesive

8
10.260 0.197
[260.6] [5.0]

0.157
[4.0]

EA-12-COV2

9 9.374
8.906
[226.2]
0.197
[5.0]

0.157
[4.0]
[238.1]

10
EA-10-COV2
7.642 7.315 0.197
[194.1] [185.8] [5.0]

0.157
[4.0]

11
EA-8-COV2

6.614
[168.0] 4.913 0.197
[124.8] [5.0]

5.441

12
[138.2]
EA-6-COV2
0.157
[4.0] 15”
12”
3.795

13
[96.4]

10”

Units: inches [mm] 8”

14
6”

A
B
C
D
®
3-22 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 3: Accessories

Non-glare Screen Covers (cont’d)

Clear Screen Overlay Installation
1
Step 1 Step 2 2
3
4
5
Check to be sure that the proper size non-glare screen cover is Start in one corner and peel the screen 6
being used on the subject touch panel. Notice that the outer cover from the backing.
perimeter of the screen cover has an adhesive band. The adhesive
band will be located on the outside edge of the touch panel’s
white frame bordering the touch area when installed.
7
Step 3 Step 4 8
9
10
11
Smooth out the screen cover and press all around the
Align the screen cover over the touch panel’s
white frame, then start on one side and gently
lay the cover over the entire touch area.
outside perimeter to secure the cover in place. The screen
cover can be removed by lifting up on the small tab and
12
gently pulling the cover away form the touch panel’s surface.

Step 5 13
14
A
B
Remove the protective sheet.

C
NOTE: The protective cover ships with a thin protective sheet on the face of the cover that needs to be
carefully removed. If your panel is not clear, the protective sheet may not have been removed. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
3-23
 Chapter
Installation & Wiring
4
In This Chapter...
Safety Guidelines........................................................................................................ 4–2
Introduction................................................................................................................ 4–3
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL – Cutout Dimensions................. 4–4
EA7-T8C – Cutout Dimensions................................................................................... 4–5
EA7-T10C – Cutout Dimensions................................................................................. 4–6
EA7-T12C – Cutout Dimensions................................................................................. 4–7
EA7-T15C – Cutout Dimensions................................................................................. 4–8
6” Adapter Plate – EA-6-ADPTR................................................................................. 4–9
Mounting Clearances............................................................................................... 4–11
Wiring Guidelines..................................................................................................... 4–12
Agency Approvals.................................................................................................... 4–12
Marine Use.............................................................................................................. 4–12
Providing Power to the Touch Panel....................................................................... 4–13
DC Wiring Diagram................................................................................................. 4–13
AC Wiring Diagram (EA-AC).................................................................................... 4–14
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Safety Guidelines
1 NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards
as specified by CE directives provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
2 instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
on our Web site: http://www.automationdirect.com
3
Warning: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility
4 and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail
and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment. Do not
rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. You should use external
5 electromechanical devices, such as relays or limit switches, that are independent of the PLC application
to provide protection for any part of the system that may cause personal injury or damage. Every

6 automation application is different, so there may be special requirements for your particular application.
Make sure you follow all national, state, and local government requirements for the proper installation
and use of your equipment.
7
Plan for Safety
8 The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment safety
part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine which areas
9 are critical to operator or machine safety. If you are not familiar with control system installation
practices, or your company does not have established installation guidelines, you should obtain
10 additional information from the following sources.
• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C.
publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems. You can
11 order these publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
12  ICS 3, Industrial Systems
 ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
13 • NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and use of
various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be obtained from your
local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
14 • Local and State Agencies — many local governments and state governments have additional
requirements above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local
A Electrical Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.

B
C
D
®
4-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Introduction
The installation and wiring of the C-more® touch panels requires selecting an appropriate
location for the touch panel, laying out the cutout dimensions on the surface of the control
1
cabinet that the panel will be mounted through, securing the touch panel with the provided
mounting clips, tightening the screws to the appropriate torque rating to assure the gasket is 2
sealing correctly, and finally connecting the appropriate power source to the touch panel.
Warning: C-more touch panels need to be mounted on a vertical surface to ensure proper cooling of the
3
panel and its components.
4
Note: Each C-more touch panel is provided with a cutout template to make marking the proper cutout size on
the surface of the control cabinet that the panel will be mounted through a simple task.
5
The C-more 6” touch panels include two mounting clips. The clips can be viewed as a long
metal bracket with two screws in each clip. The 6” panel clips can be fitted to the touch panel 6
at two different depth locations that allow the 6” panel to be mounted through a wide range
of enclosure thicknesses. The 8” through 12” touch panels include six mounting clips while
the 15” touch panel includes eight. The 8” through 15” panel mounting clips are all the same.
7
They are fitted to the touch panel by inserting two tabs into mating wide slots around th panel
and then sliding the clip into a narrower slot to secure it in place. There is one screw on each 8
clip that needs tightening to secure the panel in place.
Any C-more touch panel can be mounted directly through the existing cutout of a same size
EZTouch slim touch panel. There is a simple solution for the need to replace an EZTouch 6”
9
non-slim (rounded bezel) touch panel as explained in the following note.
10
NOTE: The C-more 6” touch panels will fit into the existing cutout of any EZTouch 6” slim bezel panel. Use
the C-more 6” Adapter Plate, EA-6-ADPTR, to install C-more 6” panels into existing cutouts of EZTouch 6”
non-slim (rounded bezel) panels. The adapter plate gasket is included.
11
This chapter only covers the proper mounting of the touch panel and connecting power. Once 12
power is applied to the touch panel, the user will want to read Chapter 5 on the System Setup
Screens in order to set the internal time and date for the panel, check the information menu
to make sure the panel is the correct unit for the application and is the latest version, set
13
communication port parameters that may be required, become familiar with the touch panel
test features, and check memory options. 14
The next step will be to select the appropriate PLC protocol and communications cable as
described in Chapter 6. A
6” Mounting Clips 8-15” Mounting Clip B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-3
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL –

1 Cutout Dimensions
2 The C-more 6” touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and secured
with two (2) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel. There
is a set of four (4) rectangular holes (slots) on each side of the touch panel’s short dimension
3 that the two tabs on each mounting clip will match. You will need to select either the upper
or lower set of holes depending on your control cabinet’s material thickness. The table below
4 shows the different thickness ranges. The mounting clips are held in place, and pull the front
bezel of the panel tight to the mounting surface, by tightening the screws into the rear of the
control cabinet. The screws need to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below
5 so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.

6 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

7 7.460 +0.04
-0.0
[189.5 +1.0
-0.0]
Mounting Clip
(2) places
0.630
8 [16.0]

9 0.315
[8.0]
0.294
[7.5]
0.294
10 5.512 +0.04
-0.0
[140.0 +1.0
[7.5] CUTOUT
-0.0 ] Bezel Outline
11 0.315
Cutout Outline

[8.0] Units: inches[mm]

12
0.630
13 [16.0]
6.533 0.709
[165.9] [18.0]
14 0.709
[18.0]

A Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges

and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
B
Mounting Clip
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
C
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
Thickness Range
6” – lower mounting 0.039 - 0.24 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
clip position [1 – 6 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
D 6” – upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
clip position [5 – 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]

®
4-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T8C – Cutout Dimensions

The C-more 8” touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel.
1
The mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch
panel. Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The 2
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below 3
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling. 4
0.394 9.250 +0.04
-0.0 0.394
5
[10.0] [235.0 +1.0
-0.0] [10.0]
0.822 4.625 0.822 0.394
[10.0]
6
[20.9] [117.5] [20.9]
7
Mounting Clip
8
(6) places
CUTOUT 0.837
[21.3]
9
7.075 +0.04
-0.0
[179.7 +1.0
-0.0 ]
10
Cutout Outline

Bezel Outline Units: inches [mm] 3.537

[89.9]
11
12
13
0.837 0.394
[21.3] [10.0]
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges A
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque B
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
C
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm] D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-5
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T10C – Cutout Dimensions

1 The C-more 10” touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel.
2 The mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch
panel. Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
3 screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
4 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

5 0.394
[10.0]
11.908 +0.04
-0.0
[302.5 +1.0
-0.0]
0.394
[10.0]

6 0.877
[22.3]
5.954
[151.2]
0.877
[22.3]

7 Mounting Clip
(6) places
0.876
[22.3]
0.394
[10.0]

8
9
CUTOUT
10
8.917 +0.04
-0.0

11 Cutout Outline
[226.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]

12 Units: inches [mm] 4.459

[113.2]

Bezel Outline
13
14
0.876 0.394
A [22.3] [10.0]

Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges

B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
C Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
D 8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

®
4-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T12C – Cutout Dimensions

The C-more 12” touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with six (6) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel.
1
The mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch
panel. Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The 2
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below 3
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling. 4
0.354
[9.0]
12.579 +0.04
-0.0
[319.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.354
[9.0] 5
0.394
[10.0]
6.289
[159.7]
0.394
[10.0] 0.354
6
[9.0]
7
8
Mounting Clip 0.394
(6) places
CUTOUT [10.0] 9
10.236 +0.04
-0.0
10
[260.0 +1.0
-0.0]

11
5.118

Cutout Outline
Units: inches [mm] [130.0] 12
13
Bezel Outline

14
0.394 0.354
[10.0] [9.0]
A
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque B
C
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm] D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-7
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

EA7-T15C – Cutout Dimensions

1 The C-more 15” touch panels are mounted into a cutout through the control cabinet and
secured with eight (8) mounting clips. The mounting clips are provided with the touch panel.
2 The mounting clips will insert into a series of slots around the rear perimeter of the touch
panel. Each clip has two tabs that will mate to two slots, using the larger rectangular holes. The
mounting clips are held in place by sliding the clip toward the smaller rectangular holes. The
3 screw of each mounting clip needs to be tightened to the torque rating shown in the table below
so that the gasket is compressed to form the proper seal between the panel and cabinet surface.
4 Note: Mount the touch panel on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper cooling.

5 0.395
[10.0]
14.960 +0.04
-0.0
[380.0 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.395
[10.0]

6 0.894
[22.7]
7.480
[190.0]
0.894
[22.7] 0.406
[10.3]

7
8 Mounting Clip
(8) places
0.864
[21.9]
9 CUTOUT

10 11.276 +0.04
-0.0
[286.4 +1.0
-0.0 ]

11 Cutout Outline
5.638
[143.2]
12 Bezel Outline
Units: inches[mm]

13
14 0.864
[21.9]
0.406
[10.3]

A
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
B and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
C Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
D 8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]

®
4-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

6” Adapter Plate
Use the C-more 6” Adapter Plate, p/n EA-6-ADPTR,
to install a C-more 6” touch panel into the existing
1
cutout of an EZTouch 6” non-slim (rounded bezel)
touch panel. Gasket and mounting hardware is 2
included.

Part No. EA-6-ADPTR 3

4
5
6
7
6” Adapter Plate Assembly
8
6“ C-more
Touch Panel
9
C-more
Adapter Plate
10
Enclosure
11
Two sets of mounting screws provided:
Set A - M4-8 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.02-0.118 inch [0.5-3mm]
12
Set B - M4-10 metric screws for an enclosure
thickness range of 0.118-0.197 inch [3-5mm]
Mounting screw torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm] 13
DIN Mounting
Clips 14
A
B
Screw Torque: 100 oz-in [0.7 Nm]
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-9
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

6” Adapter Plate (cont’d)

1 6” Adapter Plate Dimensions
2 8.932
[226.9]
0.618
[15.7]
8.076 ±0.02
[205.1 ±0.5]
0.118 ±0.04 4.250 ±0.02

3 [3.0 ±1.0] [108.0 ±0.5]

4
7.299 6.223 ±0.02

5 [185.4]

Units: inches[mm]
M4
Thread
Insert
(6 places)
Centerline [158.1 ±0.5]

6 Adapter Gasket

7
Front View Side View Rear View

8 6” Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions

9 8.076
[205.1]

10 2.125
4.250
[108.0] 0.837
[21.3]
[54.0]
11 Adapter Plate
Outline

12 Centerline

0.218 Dia.
CUTOUT
13 [5.5]
(6 places)

6.222 5.624
14 [158.0] [142.8]

A 3.111 2.812
[71.4]
[79.0] Units: inches [mm]

B
C 3.761
[95.5]
0.837
[21.3]
0.705 7.522 0.705

D [17.9] [191.1] [17.9]

®
4-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Mounting Clearances
The following drawing shows the mounting clearances for the C-more touch panel. There
should be a minimum of 4 inches of space between all sides of the panel and the nearest object
1
or obstruction and at least 2 inches between the rear of the panel and the nearest object or
obstruction. 2
Note: Make sure the touch panel is mounted on a vertical surface to allow convection air flow for proper
cooling.
3
4
Mounting Clip 5
4“ Min.
6
2“ Min.
7
4“ Min. 4“ Min.
8
9
10
11
4“ Min.
Air
Flow 12
13
Front View Side View 14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-11
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines
1 Warning: To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and
national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from
2 area to area and it is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify
that the equipment, installation, and operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
3 Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable
codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for
your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation,
4 or operation.
If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
5 additional information, please call us at 1-800-633-0405 or 770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
Automationdirect.com® we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve
6 the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without
obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of
the product.
7
Agency Approvals
8 Some applications require agency approvals for particular components. The C-more touch
panel agency approvals are listed below:
9 • UL (Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)
• CUL (Canadian Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.)
10 • CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
• CE (European Economic Union)
11 Marine Use
12 American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) certification requires flame-retarding insulation as per
4-8-3/5.3.6(a). ABS will accept Navy low smoke cables, cable qualified to NEC “Plenum
rated” (fire resistant level 4), or other similar flammability resistant rated cables. Use cable
13 specifications for your system that meet a recognized flame retardant standard (i.e. UL, IEEE,
etc.), including evidence of cable test certification (i.e. tests certificate, UL file number, etc.).
14 NOTE: Wiring needs to be “low smoke” per the above paragraph. Teflon coated wire is also recommended.

A
B
C
D
®
4-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines (cont’d)

Providing Power to the Touch Panel 1
•C
 onnect a dedicated 24 VDC (20.4 - 28.8 VDC) switching power supply rated for a minimum of
1.5 A to the DC connector on the rear of the C-more touch panel. Connect the ground terminal to
a proper equipment ground.
2
• o r install a C-more AC/DC Power Adapter (EA-AC) to the rear of the touch panel and connect an
AC voltage source of 100-240 VAC, 50/60Hertz, to its AC connector.
3
• t hen turn on the power source and check the LED status indicators on the rear of the C-more touch
panel for proper operation. See the LED Status Indicator diagram on the next page for reference. 4
DC Wiring Diagram
5
6
DC Wiring
7
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
Panel Size Rating
6“ – 10” 2.5 A
ADC p/n
MDL2-5
8
+
12“ & 15” 4.0 A MDL4
9
24 VDC, -15%, +20%

–
(20.4 - 28.8 VDC)
10
GND
Equipment
PWR

CPU 11
Ground

12
BATT

Recommended DC Power Supply:

AutomationDirect Part No. PS24-050D
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
4-13
 Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Guidelines (cont’d)

1 AC Wiring Diagram
2
AC Wiring
3
4
5 AC/DC Power Adapter
AC Power Adapter
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.

6 EA-AC

7
8 Recommended AC Supply Fuse
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

100 - 240 VAC

9 50/60 Hz

10 Warning: The AC/DC Power Adapter is not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C touch panel when
operating temperatures are expected to exceed 40 °C [104 °F].
11
12 Note: Power Fault features help protect data being logged to CompactFlash during power failures. The
C-more panel must have firmware version 1.21 Build 6.18E or higher for proper operation.

13
C-more LED Status Indicators
14 Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
A Off Power Off
PWR Off Power Off
Green Normal – CPU Run State CPU

B
TxD
Red Memory Error RxD
BATT
Blinking Operating System not found
Red Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

C Blinking
Orange
Blinking
Green
LCD Backlight Failure
Power Loss Detection
IOlOl–PLC
On Comm. is active
Off No communication
Rear View
D
®
4-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter
System Setup Screens
5
In This Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................................................ 5–2
Chapter Organization................................................................................................. 5–3
Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded)........................................ 5–4
Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded)..................................... 5–5
System Setup Screens – Enable Password in Software............................................. 5–7
System Setup Screens Flowchart............................................................................. 5–13
Main Menu............................................................................................................... 5–14
Information Menu.................................................................................................... 5–15
Setting Menu............................................................................................................ 5–19
Test Menu................................................................................................................. 5–25
Memory Menu.......................................................................................................... 5–35
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Introduction
1 The C-more touch panels include a series of built-in System Setup Screens that allow the user to
view detailed information about the panel, adjust certain features, configure communications,
2 test various functions of the touch panel, backup & restore system, recipe, log and project
memory, clear memory, and reset all values and conditions back to the original factory defaults.

3 The following is presented to give the user a detailed step by step look at 1.) how to access the
System Setup Screens, 2.) what adjustments and features are available, 3.) when and why the
feature may need to be adjusted or used, and 4.) how to adjust and/or interrupt the features.
4 The System Setup Screens from the Main Menu are split into four different categories to make
it simple for the user to select the area for viewing information, making adjustments, testing
5 the touch panel or working with the internal and/or external memory options. The four Main
Menu selections are:
6 Information
Information Here you will find detailed information in regards to the touch panel
7 model, the panel’s name, version information for the hardware, boot loader
and firmware, clock source, battery status and beeper status. Also available
8 are details on the panel’s internal memory and the status of any external
memory devices, such as CompactFlash memory and USB pen drives.
Communication port details are also available in this area, as well as an
9 error log to help in trouble-shooting the system.

Setting
10 Setting This is the area for 1.) making adjustments to the internal clock,
2.) adjusting the brightness (color panels) and contrast (grayscale panels)
11 of the display, 3.) adjusting (calibrating) the touch panel, 4.) enabling or
disabling the internal beeper, and 5.) the IP Address of the touch panel can
12 also be configured from this menu area. Access to the IP Address Setting
screen is covered later in this chapter.

13 Test Menu
Test Menu From this sub menu, the user can 1.) test the touch panel, 2.) test the
14 display, 3.) test the communication ports, and 4.) test both the internal
beeper or the audio line output, if a speaker with an amplifier is connected.
A WAV sound file is system provided for the audio line output test.
A Memory
B Memory Select the Memory menu item to either backup or restore your project, log
data, recipe data and/or system memory. Selections can be made to backup
to optional CompactFlash memory or USB pen drive memory. The menu
C selections also give the user the ability to clear the memory, and there is
also a selection to reset all of the touch panel settings back to the original
D factory defaults.

®
5-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Chapter Organization
The System Setup Screens chapter is organized in the following order:
1.) Accessing the system setup screens with no project loaded will take the user directly to the
1
Main Menu – page 5-4.
2.) Accessing the system setup screens with a project loaded will first take the user to a dialog box
2
warning the user that the panel will stop running and waits for an acknowledgement – page 5-5.
a.) If a password is not enabled, the user is taken directly to the Main Menu after the warning
message is acknowledged – page 5-6.
3
b.) If a password is enabled, then the Enter Security Code keypad is presented after the warning
message is acknowledged – page 5-6. 4
3.) How to enable a password in the C-more Programming software is explained – page 5-7.
4.) System Setup Screens organized as shown in the following flowchart: 5
Main Menu
[pg. 5-14] 6
Information
[pg. 5-15 to 5-18]
General/Memory/Ports/Error
[pg. 5-15 to 5-18] 7
Setting Adjust Clock
[pg. 5-19] [pg. 5-20]
8
Adjust Display
[pg. 5-21]

Adjust Touch Panel

9
(Touch Screen Calibration)
[pg. 5-22]

Beeper
10
11
[pg. 5-23]

IP Address Setting
(press upper left corner)

Test Menu
[pg. 5-24]

Test Touch Panel

12
[pg. 5-25] [pg. 5-26]

Test Display
13
[pg. 5-27]

Test Communication Port

[pg. 5-28]
14
Test Beep/Sound
[pg. 5-33] A
Memory
[pg. 5-35]
Backup
[pg. 5-37] B
Restore
[pg. 5-44]

Clear Memory
C
[pg. 5-50]
Touch Screen Calibration
(press upper left corner) Reset to Factory Default
D
[pg. 5-14] [pg. 5-55]

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-3
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Accessing the System Setup Screens (no project loaded)

1 To access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens prior to downloading a
project, press the extreme upper left corner of the panel display area for 3 seconds as shown
2 below. The Main Menu will then be displayed as shown below.

3
4 Press in the extreme upper
left corner for 3 seconds to
5 bring up the System Setup
Screens’ Main Menu.

6
7
8
9
10 MAIN MENU

Information Setting

11
12
Test Menu Memory

13 Exit

14 NOTE: The ability to directly activate the Main Menu of the System Setup Screens by pressing the upper left
corner of the touch panel for 3 seconds will only occur when there is no project loaded into the memory of the

A panel. Refer to the next section on accessing the System Setup Screens with a project loaded for procedure
details and recommendations.

B
C
D
®
5-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Accessing the System Setup Screens (with project loaded)

To access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup Screens with a project loaded into
memory, press the upper left corner of the panel display area for 3 seconds as shown below.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The following WARNING dialog box will appear on the the touch screen.
Dialog Box Actions: 9
• Pressing OK will display the system setup screen.

System Screen Called

See the WARNING below!
• Pressing Cancel will take you back to the project
10
Activating System Screen will stop the
screen.
• Communications with the PLC is active while the
11
Panel Run Mode. Warning is displayed.
Do you want to continue?
• The dialog box will close if no action is taken for 12
60 seconds.

OK Cancel
• The dialog box will not display if the touch panel
does not have a project loaded.
13
• The dialog box will not display if the System
Screen password is enabled.
14
Warning: Pressing OK at this point will STOP the PLC driver and therefore all communications between
A
the touch panel and PLC will cease. It is strongly recommended that the password system tag
“SYS SYSTEMSCREENPW” be enabled to add a safeguard step in accessing the system setup screens. B
See the next section for a quick overview for setting the System Tags in the Event Manager Database.
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-5
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens (no password enabled)

If no password is enabled for the system setup screens, then pressing the OK button in the
1 Warning dialog box will bring up the Main Menu as shown below. You can then proceed to
the other system setup screens.
2 MAIN MENU

3 Information Setting

4
5 Test Menu Memory

6
7 Exit

8 System Setup Screens (password enabled)

9 NOTE: If the password system tag SYS SYSTEMSCREENPW is enabled, procedure described on the next
page, then the Enter Security Code keypad shown below will be displayed. Entering the correct password
code will then bring up the Main Menu system setup screen. If the wrong password code is entered, the
10 keypad clear from its display the value entered and will stay present until the correct value is entered or the
Cancel key is pressed.

11
Enter Security Code
12
13 7 8 9

14 4 5 6

A 1 2 3 Enter

B – 0 CL Cancel

C
D
®
5-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password in Software

Under the C-more Programming Software’s Navigation window, select the Function tab, then
select the Event Manager’s Database function to display the Event
1
Manager Database shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Click on the Add button
to add an event to the
12
database that will be used
to enable the System 13
Screen Password.
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-7
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password (cont’d)

1 The Event Add dialog box will be displayed as shown next:

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Click on the Tag Name: pull down menu and select the internal System Bit On
10 (SYS BIT ON) tag as shown. This will force the tag event type to be continuously active.

11
12
13
14 Tag Name: SYS BIT ON

A
B
C
D
®
5-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password (cont’d)

Use the Event Name: text box to document the event as “System Screen PW” for record
keeping This is optional.
1
In the Action box, click once on the displayed 01-Alarm under the Sequence List: so that
01-Alarm is highlighted. Then click the Delete Action button to remove the 01-Alarm.
2
3
Event Name:
4
5
6
7
Delete Action 8
9
10
11
12
13
The Sequence List will
14
now be cleared out.
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-9
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password (cont’d)

1 In the Action box, click on the Add Action... button. This will bring up the Add Action dialog
box as shown below:
2
3
4
5
6
7 Add Action

8
9
10 Click on the Command: pull down list in the Add Command box, select Tag from the list,
then click OK.
11
12
13
14 Tag

A
B
C
D
®
5-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password (cont’d)

A 01-Tag action item will then be added to the Sequence List. 1
2
3
4
01-Tag
5
6
7
8
9
Click on the Tag Name: pull down list down arrow in the Action box’s Tag tab, select SYS
SYSTEMSCREENPW from the list, and click OK. 10
11
12
13
SYS SYSTEMSCREENPW
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-11
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens – Enable Password (cont’d)

1 Enter a numeric value into the Value: box, such as “777”. This value becomes the Password
code to access the System Setup Screen’s Main Menu.
2
3
4
5 Password Value – 777

6
7
8
9
10 Click the Add button in the Event Add dialog box and then the Close button to return to the
Event Manager Database. You now will see that the first event in the database is for the System
11 Screen Password and it is enabled.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

System Setup Screens Flowchart

Main Menu
1
[pg. 5-14]
2
Information General/Memory/Ports/Error
[pg. 5-15 to 5-18] [pg. 5-15 to 5-18] 3
Setting Adjust Clock
[pg. 5-19] [pg. 5-20] 4
Adjust Display
[pg. 5-21] 5
Adjust Touch Panel
(Touch Screen Calibration)
6
[pg. 5-22]

Beeper
7
[pg. 5-23]
8
IP Address Setting
(press upper left corner)
[pg. 5-24]
9
Test Menu
[pg. 5-25]
Test Touch Panel
[pg. 5-26]
10
Test Display 11
[pg. 5-27]

Test Communication Port

12
[pg. 5-28]

Test Beep/Sound
13
[pg. 5-33]
14
Memory Backup
[pg. 5-35] [pg. 5-37]
A
Restore
[pg. 5-44] B
Clear Memory
[pg. 5-50] C
Touch Screen Calibration
(press upper left corner)
[pg. 5-14]
Reset to Factory Default
[pg. 5-55]
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-13
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Main Menu
1 MAIN MENU The Main Menu system setup screen is the top layer in
the menu structure.
2 Information Setting The menu is displayed at full screen on the 6 inch
touch panel models. It is displayed in the center on the
3 8, 10, 12, or 15 inch models.

4 Test Menu Memory

5
Exit
6
7 Item No.
1
Function
Information
Description
Press to go to the Information Menu.
Comment

2 Setting Press to go to the Setting Menu.

8 3 Test Menu Press to go to the Test Menu.
4 Memory Press to go to the Memory Menu.
9 5 Exit Press to return to the user screen.
While the Main Menu system setup screen This feature is only used if the touch
is being displayed, the extreme upper left panel data becomes corrupted and
10 6 Touch Screen Calibration corner of the touch panel can be pressed
for 3 seconds to access the Touch Screen
touching the Main Menu buttons
does not work. It allows a shortcut
Calibration display. to the touch panel calibration screen.

11
12
13
MAIN MENU

14 Information Setting

A Test Menu Memory

B Ex it

C
D
®
5-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu – General tab

The General tab under the Information
menu provides detailed information
1
of the C-more Touch Panels model,
Panel Default Name based on Model 2
type and MAC address, hardware, boot
loader and firmware versions, etc. 3
4
5
6
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
EA7-S6M-R,
EA7-T6CL-R,
8
EA7-S6C-R,

1 Model
EA7-S6M,
EA7-T6CL,
EA7-S6C,
9
EA7-T6C
EA7-T8C,
EA7-T10C,
10
EA7-T12C,
EA7-T15C
[Model Name]-01XXXX e.g. 11
“01 XXXX” is the lower 3 bytes of the EA7-S6M-01004D
2 Panel Default Name Mac Address
MAX: 15 characters (15 bytes)
This is the default name.
The name can be changed in the
C-more Programming Software.
12
1.)Hardware: XXXX
2.)Boot loader: XXXX 13
3.)Firmware
Files reside in the C-more touch
3 Version a) OS:Timestamp of NK.BIN file
b) Runtime: X.X.X.X (Version of
Runtime.EXE file)
panel’s memory. 14
c) System Screen: X.X.X.X (Version of

4 Clock
Panel.exe file)
Internal/External clock selection. Configured in the C-more
A
Programming Software.
5 Battery Battery status, either OK or Battery Low.
Configurable in the Setting Menu –
B
6 Beep Enable/Disable the internal beeper. Beeper shown on page 5-23 or in

7 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

the C-more Programming Software.
Main Menu shown on page 5-14.
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-15
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu – Memory tab

1 C-more Memory Organization

2 32 MB*
SDRAM
Memory 10 MB*
Project and user data reside
in SDRAM while the panel is
powered.
Project Memory This data is backed-up internally
3 (32 MB Internal Flash memory -
not shown), and loaded/copied
into SDRAM on power up.

4 22 MB
Reserved
External Memory devices can
also be used for back-up of
C-more projects.
(Operating System,

5 Firmnware, etc.)
*Note: 12” and 15” units have:
C-more ■ 64 MB SDRAM
Internal ■ 64 MB Internal Flash Back-up
Memory ■ 40 MB of Available Project
Memory
6 (Built-in)

256 KB
SRAM
Memory 189 KB

7 (Battery
Backed)
Log Buffer
(11 KB per Object)
Alarm, Message, and PLC Log
Data is buffered in SRAM
pending transfer to an External
33 KB Memory device:
8 Alarm Log/
Count Buffer
■ When the buffer nears full
■ Periodically, every 5 minutes
■ When one of the internal ‘eject’
32 KB tags is activated via an Object

9 Retentive Tag Data

2 KB
or Event

SRAM Index
10 USB Flash Drive
Use additional memory for:
■ Project Transfers
(USB Port Built-in)
C-more ■ Project Back-up/Restore
11 Additional
Memory
Any
capacity
(Optional) available
CompactFlash Card
(Slot #1 Built-in)
■ Alarm Logging
■ Message Logging
■ Screen Captures
■ PLC Data Logging
12 CompactFlash Card
(Slot #2 Optional) ■ Additional Font Storage

13 Item No. Function Description Comment

SRAM 1.) Total:
14 1 System Memory
2.) Usage:
3.) Free:

Built-in Flash 1.) Total:

A 2 Memory
2.) Usage:
3.) Free:
Size of unit displayed:
1.) KB
1.) Total: When size is 1 to 999 bytes.
Expansion Memory
B 3 1.) CF1:
2.) CF2:
2.) Usage:
3.) Free:
It will be shown as 1KB.
2.) KB or MB
3.) MB or GB
Note: N/A - not available on base featured
(only visible when present)
C Expansion Memory
models (–R)
1.) Total:
4 3.) USB: 2.) Usage:
D 5
(only visible when present)
Main Menu
3.) Free:
Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

®
5-16 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu – Ports tab

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item No. Function Description Comment
12
1 COM
(Built-in Ports)
PLC Serial Communications Port Settings:
baud rate/party/data bit, stop bit
Configured in the C-more
Programming Software. 13
Ethernet Settings:
MAC Address: 00 D0 7C 01 XX XX 14
Address Type: DHCP/Static

2 Ethernet
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Configurable in the Setting Menu –
IP Address Setting shown on page A
(Built-in Ports) Default Gateway: 5-24 or in the C-more Programming
DNS: 1.) Automatically
2.) Use Designated Address
Software.
B
Note: N/A - not available on base featured
models (–R)
C
Ethernet
3 Future Future

4
(CF1 Slot)
Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-17
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Information Menu – Error tab

1
2
3
Error message format
4
5 Navigation buttons

6
7 Error message format:
Item No. Function Description Comment
8 Order of error message functions:
Error Number, Date, Time, Error Port, Device Name, Error Type, PLC Device, Access Bytes, Error Message
9 1 Date Format: MM/DD/YY Date error occurred.
2 Time Format: HH/MM/SS Time error occurred.
10 3 Error Port PLC Serial Communications Port:
Ethernet:
Configurable in the C-more
11 4 Device Name The assigned device name in the
programming software. Programming Software Panel
Manager
RD: Read
12 5 Error Type WT: Write
The assigned address of the PLC that caused
6 PLC Address the error.
13 7 Access Bytes The number of access bytes.
The error message is the same as the A list of Error Massages is shown in
8 Error Message message displayed in the upper left of the
14 C-more touch panel’s display. Appendix A

Error message navigation buttons:

A Item No. Function Description Comment
Press to clear all error messages. This
B 1 Clear button is grayed out when there are no error
messages to display.
Press to go to to the next page. This button is
C 2 Page Down grayed out when there is no error messages
on the next page.
Press to go to the previous page. This button
D 3 Page Up is grayed out when there is no error messages
on the previous page.
4 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.

®
5-18 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting Menu
The Setting Menu is used to adjust the time &
date, adjust the contrast or brightness of the display
1
depending on which model is being used, adjust
(calibrate) the touch screen, and enable or disable the 2
internal beeper.
3
4
5
6
Item No.
1
Function
Adjust Clock
Description
Press to go to the Adjust Clock screen.
Comments
7
2 Adjust Display Press to go to the Adjust Display screen.
3 Adjust Touch Panel Press to go to the Adjust Touch Panel screen. 8
4 Beeper Press to go to the Adjust Beeper screen.
5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.
The IP Address setting screen is only
9
accessible form the Setting Menu
6 IP Address setting
While the Setting Menu system setup screen is
being displayed, the extreme upper left corner of
the touch panel can be pressed for 3 seconds to
screen as described. There is no
direct button to call it from any of
10
access the IP Address setting screen. the setup screens. The IP Address
can also be assigned in the C-more
Programming Software. 11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-19
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – Adjust Clock

1
2
3
4
5
6
Color Touch Panel Grayscale Touch Panel
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
8 Time: Each press of the Select button will
cycle thru the following settings.
1.) No Selection to Hours
9 1 Select
2.) Hours to Minutes
3.) Minutes to Seconds
4.) Seconds back to Hours
Date: Each press of the Select button will
10 cycle thru the following settings.
1.) Month to Day
2.) Day to Year
11 3.) Year back to Month
Press to increment the value by “1” with
2 Up
12 each press.

Press to decrement the value by “1” with

3 Down
13 each press.

4 OK Press to accept the changes.

14 5 Cancel Press to return to the Setting Menu screen
without accepting the changes.
A NOTE: The function buttons used to adjust the clock settings on the panel’s setup screen are disabled if an
External clock source is selected in the C-more programming software. The choice of an internal or external
B clock source is available by selecting Clock Source in the C-more programming software under the Main
Menu drop down function Setup.

C NOTE: The panel’s clock can also be adjusted from the C-more programming software. The Adjust Clock
function can be accessed in the software by selecting Adjust Clock under the Main Menu drop down function
D Panel or selecting Adjust Clock under the Panel tab in the software’s Navigation window.

®
5-20 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – Adjust Display

1
2
3
4
5
6
Color Touch Panel Grayscale Touch Panel

Item No. Function Description Comments

7
The STN type display models can have the contrast adjusted. The TFT type display models can have the brightness
adjusted. See the table below.
8
Press to increment the value by “1” with
9
1 Up each press.
10
2 Down Press to decrement the value by “1” with
each press.
11
3 OK Press to accept the changes.
12
4 Cancel Press to return to the Setting Menu screen
without accepting the changes. 13
Model
Selection Range Default 14
Brightness Contrast Brightness Contrast
TFT Models:
EA7-T6CL-R, EA7-T6CL, EA7-T6C
A
1 to 7 N/A 7 N/A
EA7-T8C, EA7-T10C,
EA7-T12C & EA7-T15C B
STN Grayscale:
EA7-S6M-R &
EA7-S6M
N/A 1 to 7 N/A 6
C
STN Color:
EA7-S6C-R
EA7-S6C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-21
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – Touch Screen Calibration

1 This procedure is used to calibrate the touch screen to ensure accuracy of the touch areas. There
are five points on the touch screen that the calibration is based around. The adjustment relies
2 on very narrow areas for the calibration points.
NOTE: The panel will display the Touch Screen Calibration window on power up until the calibration

3 procedure is completed and saved.

4 Item No. Function Description Comment

The touch screen calibration crosshairs will If the touched co-ordinate point is
appear individually in the order of point 1a too far off from normal, then the
1 Points 1a thru 1e
5 thru 1e respectively as each proceeding procedure will return to Point 1a.
crosshair is pressed.
Press to return to the Setting Menu screen
2 Cancel
6 without accepting the changes.

to accept the changes and return to the If you do not save, you will have to
Press here to save & quit. Press
7 3 Setting Menu screen. calibrate the panel again after the
next power cycle.

The current adjustment data is canceled and

8 4 Press here to retry. the procedure is returned to point 1a.

9 Touch Screen Calibration

Calibrate the Touch Screen by
10 touching the center of the crosshairs
+ with your finger or a stylus. Press here to save and quit.

11
12 Cancel

13 Press here to retry.

14
A Points 1a thru 1e Final

B
C
D
®
5-22 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – Beeper
This system setup screen function is used
to enable or disable the touch panel’s
1
internal beeper.
2
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments 7
1 Yes Change Enable to Beeper.

2 No Change Disable to Beeper.

8
3 OK Press to accept the changes and return to the
Setting Menu screen. 9
Press to return to the Setting Menu screen
4 Cancel without accepting the changes.
10
11
NOTE: The project settings in the C-more programming software Panel Manager will override the touch
panel’s internal setting upon initial download. 12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-23
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Setting – IP Address Setting

1
2
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comment
7 “DHCP” is enabled as the default when this
system setup screen is first selected.
1 DHCP
8 All of the other selections on this screen are
dimmed when “DHCP” is selected and are
not available.

9 The “Use the following IP Address” setting is

selected when its radio button is pressed.
An IP Address can be assigned as follows:

10 1.) Select the address type:

a.) IP Address
b.) Subnet Mask
Note: If an Ethernet cable is not
connected to the touch panel from
2 IP Address c.) Default Gateway an active Ethernet device, then the IP
11 2.) Use the numerical keypad to input the
address. Use the decimal key to enter the
Address will show as 0.0.0.0.

dot separator.
12 3.) Press the “ENT” key when finished with
each field.

13 3
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Select the field that needs to be assigned by Each field can be independently
touching the entry value and use the keypad assigned.
to enter the desired address.
Default Gateway
14 The keypad is used to enter the Address:
Use the numeric keys and the “dot” key to
The “ENT” key must be pressed to
accept the entry. If the “ENT” key
enter the address, e.g: 192.168.10.1 is not pressed, then the previous
4 Keypad
A “ENT” = Enter key sets value
“CL” = Clear value entered
“DEL” = Delete 1 character with each press
value will remain when another area
is selected or the “Cancel” key is
pressed.

B 5 OK Press to accept the changes and return to the

Setting Menu screen.
Press to return to the Setting Menu screen
6 Cancel
C without accepting the changes.

D
®
5-24 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu
The Test Menu gives the user the ability to test the
operation of the touch screen, test the LCD display,
1
test the various communication ports, and also test
the internal beeper and the audio line out through an 2
user supplied amplified (stereo) speaker(s).
3
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments 7
1 Test Touch Panel Press to go to the Test Touch Panel screen.
8
2 Test Display Press to go to the Test Display screen.

3 Test Communication Port Press to go to the Test Communication Port

screen.
9
4 Test Beep/Sound Press to go to the Test Beep/Sound screen. 10
5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-25
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Touch Panel

1 Using this test, normal or unusual operation of the
analog touch panel can be determined.
2 Testing:
If an area of the touch screen is suspected to be
3 inoperable, touch that area of the screen while in
the Test Touch Panel screen mode. The screen
4 pixels should turn black in that area. If the screen
pixels do not turn black when touched, then the
touch screen is defective or needs to be calibrated.
5 See Setting - Adjust Touch Screen on page 5-22.

6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments

8 Display Size
6 Inch
Touch Area
320 X 240
1 Touch area 8/10 Inch 640 X 480 Both the title bar (Test Touch Panel)
9 12 Inch
15 Inch
800 X 600
1024 X 768
and Cancel button can be drawn
across to test the touch operation.

10 2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

11
Note: The Touchscreen is designed to respond to a single touch. If it is touched at multiple points at the
12 same time, an unexpected object may be activated.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-26 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Display

There are two different test patterns that may be run on the LCD display to allow the user to
check for display screen defects. If the screen is not touched within 3 seconds of Test Pattern
1
1 being displayed, then Test Pattern 2 will be displayed until the screen is touched, otherwise
Test Pattern 1 will remain until cancelled. 2
Test Pattern 1 displays a test pattern of 16 grayscale graduations and RGB colors.
3
4
5
6
7
Test Pattern 2 will follow the pattern as shown in the following chart with the color wiping
across the screen in the direction indicated by the arrows, then repeats: 8
Color 1st Time 2nd Time 3rd Time 4th Time
9
RED
10
GREEN 11
1
BLUE
12
13
Item No. Function Description Comments
Touch the Test Display Press the screen anywhere except the Cancel If the Test Display screen is not 14
1 button and the shown Test Pattern 1 remains. touched, then in three seconds the
screen.

2 Cancel (Test Pattern 1) Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

display will move to Test Pattern 2.
A
3 Touch Anywhere
(Test Pattern 2)
Touch the sceen anywhere during Test
Pattern 2 and return to the Test Menu screen.
B
Test Results: If any pixels on the screen do not appear the same color as the surrounding pixels,
C
the LCD screen may be defective. A single pixel gone bad is relatively common. Surrounding
pixels going bad over time is another indication the LCD screen may be defective. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-27
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Communication Ports: Serial

1 The following test can be used to check the operation
of the serial communication port, with the use of a
2 loop back connector and can also check the status
of the serial communications to any connected and
configured PLC.
3 Continued on the next two pages.

4
5
6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments

8 1 Loop Back Test This function checks the serial comm port for
proper operation with a loop back connector.

9 This function allows the ability to select any

PLC that that may be connected to the touch Note: The PLC serial communications
2 PLC Enquiry Test panel via a serial connection and checks port settings must be configured in
10 to see if the communications are working the C-more programming software.
correctly.

11 3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

12
13 RS-232 Loop-back Connector RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector
7 CTS 15-pin D-sub
14 15-pin D-sub
(male) 8 (male)
RTS
2 TXD
A 3 RXD
15 9
11
RXD+
15

TXD+
7
B 8
CTS
RTS
10
12
RXD–
1
1 TXD–
C Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram

D
®
5-28 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Serial Port Test

PLC Serial Comm Port – Loop Back Test 1
Item No. Function Description Comments 2
1.) When testing an RS-232C serial
connection, connect pin 2 to 3 and pin
7 to 8 on an appropriate D-SUB 15-pin
male connector and plug it into the serial
3
PLC comm port on the rear of the touch
1 Determine Loop Back
Connector
panel.
2.) When testing an RS-422 or RS-485 serial
4
connection, connect pin 9 to 11, pin 10
to 12 and pin 7 to 8 on an appropriate
D-SUB 15-pin male connector and plug it 5
into the serial PLC comm port on the rear
of the touch panel.

Press the Loop Back Test button to start the

6
2 Start Test serial comm port test.

1.) Bytes Sent:

7
The number of bytes sent after a test is
started.
2.) Receive Counts:
8
The number of bytes which are received Note: The test will continue to run

3 Test Results
after the test is started.
3.) Error Counts:
until the Cancel button is pressed.
If there are any error counts, check 9
The number of bytes which have not been the loop back connector. If it is OK,
received after the test is started.
4.) RTS/CTS Test: Pass/Fail
call Tech Support.
10
RTS is turned on and if CTS receives
the signal then the test shows “Pass”,
otherwise the test shows “Fail”. 11
Press to return to the Test Comm. Port
4 Cancel screen.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-29
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – PLC Enquiry Test: Serial Connection

1 This function allows the ability to select any PLC
that may be connected to the touch panel through
2 a serial comm. port connection and checks to see if
the communications are working correctly.

3 Note: The communications protocol for

the PLC being selected must be configured
the same as the C-more touch panel. The
4 touch panel’s PLC serial communications are
configured using the C-more Programming
Software’s Panel Manager.
5
6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments
Select any PLC that is shown in the drop Only PLC’s that have been configured
8 1 Select PLC down menu. The PLC selected will connect to in the C-more Programming Software
the touch panel at the time of a test. will appear in the Select PLC: list.

9 2 PLC Enquiry Test

Four test read packets are sent to the selected
PLC.
Test result will be either Pass or Fail.
10 3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-30 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Communication Ports: Ethernet

Test Comm. Port
The following test feature can be used to check
the operation of the Ethernet communication
1
Serial Ethernet port by indicating if an Ethernet link has been
established or not, and can also check the status of 2
Link : Online the Ethernet communications to any connected
Address : Static
192.168.100.4
PLC Enquiry Test

Select PLC:
PLC. 3
Base featured models (-R) do not include
DL ECOM Module
an Ethernet port, therefore this check is not
displayed.
4
192.168.100.3
Note: The communications protocol for the
PLC being selected must be configured the
5
same as the C-more touch panel. The touch
Cancel
panel’s PLC serial communications are 6
configured using the C-more Programming
Software’s Panel Manager.
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
This area displays information to whether
an Ethernet link has been established for
8
the touch panel’s Ethernet comm port or
1 Ethernet Connected not. Displays panel’s IP address and shows
whether it is static or assigned by a DHCP 9
server.
This function allows the ability to select
any PLC configured in the project that may 10
2 PLC Enquiry Test be connected to the touch panel via an
Ethernet connection and checks to see if the
communications are working correctly. 11
3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

Example of displayed message when the touch

12
panel’s Ethernet port is not connected.

Test Comm. Port

Typical Ethernet connection
with Ethernet switch.
13
Serial Ethernet
Stride™
Ethernet Switch
14
10/100 Base-T

A
Link : Offline (such as SE-SW5U)
Address : Static PLC Enquiry Test
0.0.0.0
Select PLC: H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module C-more

B
1

Ethernet
Touch Panel Port

DL06 PLC
Ethernet CAT5
(Bottom View)

C
Cable - Straight-thru

Cancel
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-31
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – PLC Enquiry Test: Ethernet Connection

1 Test Comm. Port
This function allows the ability to select any
PLC configured in the project that may be
2 Serial Ethernet connected to the touch panel through an
Ethernet port connection and checks to see if the
Link : Online
PLC Enquiry Test communications are working correctly.
3 Address : Static
192.168.100.4
Select PLC: Note: The communications protocol for the
DEV001 PLC being selected must be configured the
4 DEV001
DEV008
same as the C-more touch panel. The touch
panel’s PLC serial communications are
DEV009
configured using the C-more Programming
5
DEV010
DEV011
Software’s Panel Manager.
Cancel
6
7 Item No. Function Description Comments

8 1 Select PLC Select any PLC that is shown in the drop

down menu.

9 The following are the steps that the Ethernet

PLC Enquiry Test performs:
1.) Ping the network 4 times for the PLC

10 2 PLC Enquiry Test

selected.
2.) Four of the test read packets are sent to
the selected PLC.

11 Test result will be either Pass or Fail.

However, if the result of pinging the network
shows an error, the test is stopped.

12 3 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-32 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Beep/Sound

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item No. Function Description Comments
The internal Beeper can be tested from this
system setup screen whether the Beeper is 8
1 Beep Test enabled or disabled. After the Beep Test
button is pressed then released, the Beeper
will sound for 500 msec. 9
2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-33
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Test Menu – Test Beep/Sound (cont’d)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Warning: Hearing damage may occur if the volume on the user supplied external amplified speaker is
8 set too high.

9 Item No. Function Description Comments

The Speaker Test function requires that a
10 speaker(s) with an amplifier (can be stereo)
be connected to the Audio Line Out stereo
1 Speaker Test jack on the rear of the touch panel.
11 After the Speaker Test button is pressed then
released, a system provided Test.WAV file will
play once.
12 2 Cancel Press to return to the Test Menu screen.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-34 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory Menu
The user’s project, system, log and recipes files can
be backed up and restored to either a CompactFlash
1
memory card (CF1 or CF2), or a USB memory device.
From this menu the user can also clear the project log 2
files. The user also has the ability to clear the memory
within the C-more touch panel. 3
Base featured models (-R) do not include CF1 or CF2.
4
5
6
Item No. Function Description Comments
Any USB 1.1 pen drive or
CompactFlash memory device
7
Backup project, system, log & recipe files to capacity available is supported.
the following memory devices: The backup data files are created and
copied to a folder on the memory
8
USB port - Type A: USB pen drive
1 Backup device named “EA_Memory Copy.”
CF Slot #1 (standard port): CompactFlash
CF Slot #2 (optional port): CompactFlash
The project file is named
StartupStorage.eas
9
See page 5-37 for details. “Log” and “Recipe” folders with the
appropriate data files are also created
on the memory device.
10
Restore project, system, log & recipe files
to the internal memory from one of the
A folder on the memory device
named “EA_Memory Copy” must 11
exist containing a file named
following memory devices:
2 Restore USB port - Type A: USB pen drive
“StartupStorage.eas”. The project
data file is stored in this file, and if the
system data file was backed up, it also
12
CF Slot #1 (standard port): CompactFlash will be stored in this file. Any backed
CF Slot #2 (optional port): CompactFlash
See page 5-44 for details.
up log or recipe data files will be
located under the appropriate “Log” 13
or “Recipe” folders.
Clear selected data files from the memory
of the following internal memory or external
14
memory devices: Can only clear project, log and recipe
3 Clear Memory
Built-in FLASH Memory
USB port - Type A: USB pen drive
data files of the Built-in FLASH
memory.
A
CF Slot #1 (standard port): CompactFlash Can clear entire contents or individual
CF Slot #2 (optional port): CompactFlash
data files of external memory devices.
B
See page 5-50 for details.

4 Reset to Factory Default The touch panel’s internal memory is set to Clears all project memory.
the original factory defaults.
C
5 Main Menu Press to return to the Main Menu screen. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-35
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Project Executed from CompactFlash (CF Slot #1)

1 If a CompactFlash card is located in the CF1 slot at the time a project is transferred to the
panel, the project will be stored on the CompactFlash card, not in the internal Built-in FLASH
2 memory.
If CF1 slot contains a CompactFlash with a project and:
3 1.) The touch panel’s power is cycled, then
2.) The project file stored on the CompactFlash is loaded into the touch panel’s internal DRAM

4 memory and executed. Please note that the project stored in the panel’s internal FLASH memory is
NOT loaded into the internal DRAM memory when a CompactFlash memory card is present. Any
project in the internal FLASH memory is cleared.
5
Warning: During power up with a CompactFlash plugged into the CF1 Slot, please do not remove the
6 memory card from the slot. Damage to the CompactFlash and possibly the touch panel may result.

7 Warning: After a firmware update, the project files which are located in either the touch panel’s internal
FLASH memory or the CompactFlash plugged into CF1 Slot are cleared. The programming software
8 will need to be used to Transfer the project file back into the panel. If you wish to retain the project on
the CompactFlash, power down the panel and remove the CompactFlash before performing a firmware
9 upgrade.

10 Increasing Project Memory Size using a CompactFlash in CF1 Slot:

11 If a project is transferred to the panel with a CompactFlash card in CF1 Slot, the Font and
Recipe data files are not included in the 10MB (40MB for 12” and 15” models) project size.
Therefore using CF1 can allow a project to be loaded that is larger than 10MB if the excessive
12 size is caused by Fonts and/or Recipe Sheets.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-36 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup
Backup The Memory - Backup selection allows you to
backup the panel’s Project, Log files, Recipe
1
Step–1 : Select backup device

1 2 3
files or even the System (firmware & OS) files to
either a CompactFlash (CF) or USB pen drive. 2
USB The available memory devices will be displayed
Total : 488 MB
Free : 488 MB
showing the total and free available memory for 3
that device. If the device is not available, it will be
CF1 CF2
grayed out. The Next button is grayed out until
a device is selected.
4
Total : N/A Total : N/A
Free : N/A Free : N/A The Cancel button can be pressed at any time to
return to the Memory Menu screen. 5
Next >> Cancel
6
Backup This is an example of a USB memory device
7
Step–1 : Select backup device

1 2 3
selected to be used for backing up the panel’s
data file(s). 8
The selected device is highlighted. Pressing again
USB
Total : 488 MB un-selects it. 9
Free : 488 MB
When there are more than two available backup
CF1 CF2
devices, the one selected will be highlighted. If 10
there is only one available memory device, it still
Total : N/A
Free : N/A
Total : N/A
Free : N/A needs to be highlighted in order to go to the next
step.
11
Next >> Cancel Press the Next button to continue to Step 2.
12
13
Note: If you have a memory device inserted into the proper port on the touch panel, but it doesn’t show up as
highlighted in Step 1 of the Backup setup screen, then try a different device to determine if the memory device
is defective or if there is a possible problem with the memory device connection. It may not be compatible
14
with the panel. This rarely happens with CF memory, but some USB pen drives are not USB 1.1 compatible
and will not work with C-more touch panels. Also, some USB pen drives may take several minutes before A
they are recognized by the panel.
B
Please read the explanation for the availability of CF1 under different conditions as shown
on the next two pages. C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-37
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

1 CF1 Availability Explanation:
If there is no CompactFlash inserted into CF1
2 Backup

Step–1 : Select backup device

Slot, then the CF1 button’s Total and Free
memory will show as N/A and be grayed out.
3 1 2 3

USB

4 Total : N/A
Free : N/A

5 Total : N/A
CF1
Total : N/A
CF2

Free : N/A Free : N/A

6
Next >> Cancel

7
8
Backup
If the panel is powered up or rebooted with
9 Step–1 : Select backup device
a CompactFlash inserted into CF1 Slot, then
the CF1 button’s Total and Free memory will
1 2 3 be displayed.
10 USB
Total : N/A

11 Free : N/A

CF1
12
CF2
Total : 121 MB Total : N/A
Free : 99 MB Free : N/A

13 Next >> Cancel

14
A
B
C
D
®
5-38 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

CF1 Availability Explanation (cont’d): 1
If a CompactFlash is inserted into CF1 Slot
Backup

Step–1 : Select backup device

and a project is transferred using the C-more 2
Programming Software’s Project Transfer
1 2 3

USB
utility Panel > Transfer, then the CF1 will
not show up in the Memory - Backup Step
3
1 device choices. The CompactFlash will
Total : N/A
Free : N/A have the runtime files stored on it that get 4
loaded into the touch panel’s internal DRAM
Total : N/A
CF2 memory when powered up or rebooted. 5
Free : N/A

6
Next >> Cancel

7
Below is an example of the folder and file structure that is stored on the CompactFlash
in the CF1 Slot for a project that was directly transferred from the C-more Programming 8
Software’s Project Transfer function when viewed in Windows® Explorer on a PC.
Folders X 9
TOSHIBA512M (F:)
Font
arial_1_30.ttf
Font Files used in 10
TrueType font file Project

Log
151 KB

Log files.
11
Mmd

Prj
12
13
DEV001.inf
Setup Information Project Files
2 KB
EARun.atr Max: 1 0MB for 6” - 10”
ATR File 40MB for 12” & 15”
1 KB
EARun.net
NET File
14
1 KB
EARun.prj
PRJ File
1 KB
EARun.tag
A
TAG File
4 KB
INTERNAL.inf
Setup Information
B
2 KB
Scr1.scr
AutoCAD LT Script
1 KB
TransFile.ini
C
Configuration Settings

Recipe
1 KB
Recipe Sheet files. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-39
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

1 Note: The following definitions are for the various file types that can be backed up:
Project data – consists of the actual developed project data that is created in the C-more programming
2 software and includes all functionality, objects, screens, tag names, labels, comments, graphics, etc.
Included in backup file name StartupStorage.eas.
Recipe data – consists of all the data values and labels that have been created for the various recipe
3 sheets. Includes all recipe sheets loaded to the panel. Only recipe sheets used in the project are loaded to
the panel.
System data – consists of the operating system, firmware and run time files. Included in backup file name
4 StartupStorage.eas.
Log data – consists of the Alarm Log, Message Log and Trend Data Logging files.
5
Backup
Select the data file(s) to be backed up by
6 Step–2 : Select Data Area to Backup
pressing the appropriate data file button.
1 2 3 The selection will be highlighted.
7 Project
Total : 172 KB
Recipe
Total : 1 KB
Pressing the highlighted data file button
8 again will turn it off.
Log System

9 Total : 268 KB Total : 16 MB

The Next >> button will stay grayed out until
at least one data file is selected.
10 << Prev. Next >> Cancel Any file type not available will be grayed
out.
11 Backup

Step–2 : Select Data Area to Backup

This is an example of data files selected for
12 1 2 3
backing up.

13
Project Recipe
Total : 172 KB Total : 1 KB The selected data files are highlighted.

14 Log System
The Next >> button is now enabled.
Total : 268 KB Total : 16 MB Pressing Cancel will return to the previous
A menu.

B << Prev. Next >> Cancel

Press the Next button to continue.

C Note: In the case of the Project and System files, these can be Restored later to another panel.
In the case of the Recipe files, they can be edited externally from the panel and then Restored to the panel.

D The Log files are for viewing purposes only.

See Page 5-44 for instructions on Restoring the Project, System and or Recipe files to a Panel.

®
5-40 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

Backup Data Files Naming and Organization 1
The following graphic shows how the various data files are organized on the memory
device when doing a Backup and also the file naming convention that is used when 2
viewed in Windows® Explorer on a PC.
3
Folders X 4
Desktop
My Documents
My Computer
5
Backup memory device
Local Disk (C:)
DVD/CD-RW Drive (D:)
6
Removable Disk (E:)
TOSHIBA512M (F:)
Project & System
backup file. 7
EA_MemoryCopy
StartupStorage.eas
EAS File
160 KB
Log backup files.
8
Log
Alarm_080131.txt
Text Document
1 KB
9
Screen1.jpg Recipe Sheet

Recipe
320 x 240
JPEG Image backup files. 10
Steel.csv
Microsoft Office Excel Comma ...
1 KB 11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-41
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

1 The next system setup screen allows the
verification of the data file selections. When
2 the OK button is pressed, the backup begins.
The user can return to the previous screen by
3 pressing the << Prev button.

4
5
6
7 This message is displayed during the Backup
copying process. Press the Cancel button to
8 abort the backup.
The following text is shown in the copying
9 progress message box:
Copy to USB Memory:
10 “Please do not Power Off or Remove USB”
Copy to CF1 or CF2:
11 “Please do not Power Off or Remove CF”
Warning: During the copying process, Do
not power off the touch panel or remove
12 the memory device.

13 This message is displayed to indicate the Backup

is complete. Press the OK button to return to the
previous menu selection.
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-42 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Backup (cont’d)

Warning Messages 1
If the destination does not have enough
space to store the selected memory size, then 2
the message shown here will be displayed.
Press the OK button to clear the warning
message.
3
The warning message will read “Not enough
Memory Space in %Device%”. 4
%Device% will show either “CF1”, “CF2”, or
“USB”. 5
6
7
This warning message will be displayed if the
backup Memory device fails or is removed
8
during the backup. Press the OK button to
clear the warning message. 9
The warning message will read “Backup
Failed. “%Device% cannot be found”. 10
%Device% will show either “CF1”, “CF2”, or
“USB”. 11
Refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for
additional help. 12
13
For any other reason the backup fails, then 14
this warning message will be displayed. Press
the OK button to clear the warning message. A
The warning message will read “Backup
Failed”. B
Refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for
additional help.
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-43
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore
1 The Memory - Restore function is used to:
1.) Restore a project previously backed up on a
2 CompactFlash card or USB pen drive memory
device to the same panel. See Memory -
3 Backup on page 5-37.
2.) Copy a project from one panel to another
panel using a memory device to physically
4 transport the data files.
3.) Restore a project into the panel that was
5 transfered to an “External Memory Device” using
the C-more Programming Software.
6 4.) Restore Recipe Sheet(s) previously backed
up to a memory device or copied to the memory
7 device using a PC.
The available memory devices will be displayed
8 showing the total and free available memory for
that device. If the device is not available, it will be
grayed out. The Next button is grayed out until a
9 device is selected.
The Cancel button can be pressed at any time to
10 return to the Memory Menu screen.

11 This is an example of a USB memory device

selected to be used for restoring the data file(s).
12 The selected device is highlighted. Pressing again
unselects it.
13 When there are more than two available restore
devices, the one selected will be highlighted. If
14 there is only one available memory device, it
needs to be highlighted in order to go to the next
step.
A Press the Next button to continue to continue
to Step 2.
B Note: If you have a memory device inserted into the proper port on the touch panel, but it doesn’t show up

C as highlighted in Step 1 of the Restore setup screen, then try a different device to determine if the memory
device is defective or if there is a possible problem with the memory device connection. It may not be
compatible with the panel. This rarely happens with CF mamory, but some USB pen drives are not USB 1.1
D compatible and will not work with C-more touch panels. Also, some USB pen drives may take several minutes
before they are recognized by the panel.

®
5-44 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore (cont’d)

Please read the explanation for the availability of CF1 under different conditions as
shown on this page and the next.
1
CF1 Availability Explanation: 2
Restore If there is no CompactFlash inserted into CF1
Step–1 : Select Device where data is stored Slot, then the CF1 button’s Total and Free 3
1 2 3 memory will show as N/A and be grayed out.
USB 4
Total : N/A
Free : N/A
5
CF1 CF2
Total : N/A
Free : N/A
Total : N/A
Free : N/A
6
Next >> Cancel
7
8
Restore
If the panel is powered up or rebooted with
9
Step–1 : Select Device where data is stored

1 2 3
a CompactFlash inserted into CF1 Slot, then
the CF1 button’s Total and Free memory will 10
be displayed.
Total : N/A
Free : N/A
USB
11
CF1 CF2
12
Total : 121 MB Total : N/A
Free : 99 MB Free : N/A
13
Next >> Cancel
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-45
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore (cont’d)

1 Restore
CF1 Availability Explanation (cont’d):
Step–1 : Select Device where data is stored
If a CompactFlash is inserted into CF1 Slot
2 1 2 3 and a project is transferred using the C-more
USB
Programming Software’s Project Transfer
3 Total : N/A
Free : N/A
utility Panel > Transfer, then the CF1 will
not show up in the Memory - Backup Step 1
device choices. The CompactFlash will have
4 CF2 the runtime files stored on it that get loaded
Total : N/A into the touch panel’s internal DRAM memory
5 Free : N/A
when powered up or rebooted.

6 Next >> Cancel

See page 5-39 for an example of the folder and file structure that is stored on CF1.
7
Note: The following definitions are for the various file types that can be backed up:
8 Project data – consists of the actual developed project data that is created in the C-more programming
software and includes all functionality, objects, screens, tag names, labels, comments, graphics, etc.
Included in backup file name StartupStorage.eas.
9 Recipe data – consists of all the data values and labels that have been created for the various recipe
sheets. Includes all recipe sheets loaded to the panel. Only recipe sheets used in the project are loaded to

10 the panel.
System data – consists of the operating system, firmware and run time files. Included in backup file name
StartupStorage.eas.
11 Log data – consists of the Alarm Log, Message Log and Trend Data Logging files.

12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-46 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore (cont’d)

Restore Select the data file(s) to be restored by
pressing the appropriate data file button.
1
Step–2 : Select Data Area to Restore

1 2 3
The selection will be highlighted. The data
file can be either the Project, System and/or 2
Project Recipe Recipe files. The selected data is restored to
Total : 172 KB Total : 1 KB
the internal built-in FLASH memory if there is 3
no CompactFlash memory card inserted into
Log System
the CF1 slot.
Pressing the highlighted data file again will
4
Total : 268 KB Total : 16 MB
turn it off.
The Next >> button will stay grayed out until
5
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel at least one data file is selected.
Any file type not available will be grayed
6
out.
7
Restore

Step–2 : Select Data Area to Restore This is an example of a file selected to

8
restore.
1 2 3
9
Project Recipe
Total : 172 KB Total : 1 KB The selected file is highlighted.
10
Log
Total : 268 KB
System
Total : 16 MB
The Next >> button is now enabled. 11
Pressing Cancel will return to the previous
menu.
12
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel

13
Note: The following definitions are for the various file types that can be backed up:
Project data – consists of the actual developed project data that is created in the C-more programming 14
software and includes all functionality, objects, screens, tag names, labels, comments, graphics, etc.
Included in backup file name StartupStorage.eas.
Recipe data – consists of all the data values and labels that have been created for the various recipe
A
sheets. Includes all recipe sheets loaded to the panel. Only recipe sheets used in the project are loaded to
the panel.
System data – consists of the operating system, firmware and run time files. Included in backup file name
B
StartupStorage.eas.
Log data – consists of the Alarm Log, Message Log and Trend Data Logging files. C
Press the Next button to continue. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-47
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore (cont’d)

1 The data selected to restore is checked. If
the data is good, then the OK button can be
2 pressed to start the restore.
If there is a problem with the data, the OK
3 button will remain grayed out and the user can
return to the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4 The problem could be caused by a corrupted
data file. See Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for
5 additional help.

6
7 This message is displayed during the Restore
process. Press the Cancel button to abort the
8 backup.
The following text is shown in the copying
9 progress message box:
Copy to USB Memory:
10 “Please do not Power Off or Remove USB”
Copy to CF1 or CF2:
11 “Please do not Power Off or Remove CF”
Warning: During the copying process, Do
not power off the touch panel or remove
12 the memory device.

13 This message is displayed to indicate the Restore

is complete. Press the OK button to return to the
14 previous menu selection.

A
B
C
D
®
5-48 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Restore (cont’d)

Warning Messages: 1
If the system memory does not have enough
space to restore the selected memory 2
size, then the message shown here will be
displayed. Press the OK button to clear the
warning message.
3
The warning message will read “Not enough
Memory Space in System Memory”. 4
The Project size must be less than 10 MByte
for 6”-10” panels and less than 40 MByte for 5
12” & 15” panels.
6
7
This warning message will be displayed if the
8
restore Memory device fails or is removed
during the backup. Press the OK button to 9
clear the warning message.
The warning message will read “Restore 10
Failed. “%Device% cannot be found”.
%Device% will show show “CF1”, “CF2”, or
“USB”.
11
Try using a different device with known good
data in the same connector or using the
12
device that is causing the error in a different connector.
13
For any other reason the restore fails, then
14
this warning message will be displayed. Press
the OK button to clear the warning message. A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-49
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Clear Memory

1 This function is used to clear individually
selected data files, or all data files, within
2 the panel’s Built-in Memory, or any installed
memory device such as a USB pen drive,
CompactFlash (CF1 or CF2).
3 Select the memory device to clear. If the
device is not available, it will be grayed out.
4 The Next button is grayed out until a device
is selected.
5
6
7
8 The selected device is highlighted. Pressing
again un-selects it.

9 When there are more than two available

backup devices, the one selected will be
10 highlighted. If another is selected, then the
highlight will change to the last one pressed.
11 Only one device can be selected at a time.

12 Press the Next button to continue.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-50 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Clear Memory (cont’d)

Clear Memory Select the data file(s) to be cleared. 1
Step–2 : Select Data Area to Erase This is an example of CF1, CF2 or USB memory
1 2 3 that was selected in Clear Memory - Step-1. 2
Project Recipe
Total : 0 KB Total : 0 KB The selected file will be highlighted. Pressing 3
again un-selects it.
Log Clear All
The Next >> button will stay grayed out until
file(s) are selected.
4
Total : 0 KB Total : 70 MB

5
Selecting Clear All will erase all files located
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel
on the memory device. 6
Clear Memory
7
This is an example of Built-in Memory that
Step–2 : Select Data Area to Erase

1 2 3
was selected in Clear Memory - Step-1. 8
Project
Total : 2 KB
Recipe
Total : 0 KB
Notice the ability to select either the Project
file, Log files, Recipe files, or the System files.
9
Log System
Note: System files can not be cleared from 10
Total : 0 KB Total : 7 MB
the internal memory.
11
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel
12
Clear Memory
13
This is an example of the Project data file
Step–2 : Select Data Area to Erase

1 2 3
being selected for clearing. 14
Project
Total : 5 KB
Recipe
Total : 0 KB The selected memory area is highlighted. A
Pressing again un-selects it.
The Next >> button is now enabled. B
Log System
Total : 0 KB Total : 7 MB

Pressing Cancel will un-select the file(s).

C
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel
Press the Next button to continue.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-51
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Clear Memory (cont’d)

1 The data file(s)selected to clear are checked. If
the data file is good, then the OK button can
2 be pressed to start the clear procedure.
If there is a problem with the data file, the OK
3 button will remain grayed out and the user can
return to the previous screen by pressing the
<< Prev button.
4
5
Press the OK button to continue.
6
7 This message is displayed during the clearing
process. Press the Cancel button to abort the
clearing.
8 The following text is shown in the clearing
progress message box:
9 Clearing Built-in Memory:
“Please do not Power Off”
10 Clearing USB Memory:
“Please do not Power Off or Remove USB”
11 Clearing CF1 or CF2
“Please do not Power Off or Remove CF”
12
Warning: During the clearing process, do not power off the touch panel or remove the memory device.
13
14 The following message is displayed when the
clearing process is complete:
A “%Device% cleared”
%Device% will show either “CF1”, “CF2”, or
B “USB”.
Press the OK button to return to the Memory
C Menu screen.

D
®
5-52 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Clear Memory (cont’d)

Clear Memory The following is an example of Clear All
selected for clearing.
1
Step–2 : Select Data Area to Erase

1 2 3 2
Project Recipe
The selected device is highlighted.
Total : 0 KB Total : 0 KB
3
The Next >> button is now enabled.
Log Clear All 4
Total : 0 KB Total : 70 MB
Pressing Cancel will un-select the Clear All.
5
<< Prev. Next >> Cancel
6
Note: If Clear All is selected, all files will be erased from the memory device, even those not related to the
C-more touch panel.
7
The data file(s)selected to clear are checked. If 8
the data file is good, then the OK button can be
pressed to start the clear procedure. 9
If there is a problem with the data file, the OK
button will remain grayed out and the user can
return to the previous screen by pressing the
10
<< Prev button.
11
12
Press the OK button to continue.
13
The warning message shown here will be
displayed to give the user the opportunity to
14
decide if they want to proceed or not.
A
Press the OK button to continue.
B
The Clear All process will start with a warning
message as seen in the first example and continue
C
until a message saying the device is cleared or a
warning message as shown on the next page will D
appear.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-53
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Clear Memory (cont’d)

1 The warning message shown here will be
displayed if the clearing process fails.
2 “Clear Failed”.
Press the OK button to return to the Clear
3 Memory screen and try again.
If the selected memory still fails to clear,
4 then refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for
additional help.

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
5-54 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 5: System Setup Screens

Memory – Reset to Factory Default

Memory After pressing the Reset to Factory Default
button from the Memory Menu, the message
1
Backup Restore
box shown will be displayed.
Resetting to the Factory Defaults produces the
2
System Screen

Are you sure you want to reset Panel to

following actions:
1.) The touch screen calibration is
3
Factory Default?
reset to the Factory Defaults.
Clear Memory

OK
Reset to
Factory Default
Cancel 2.) The project file is cleared.
4
3.) The log, recipe & WAV files are
cleared. 5
Main Menu
4.) The IP address is set to DHCP.
6
Warning: Please make a backup file to either a CF or USB memory device using the Memory Backup
function before resetting to the Factory Defaults as a precautionary measure.
7
Memory The message shown here is displayed once the
Factory Default values have been stored into the
8
Backup Restore
system memory.
9
System Screen

Reset to Factory Default was completed.

Press OK to continue. 10
11
Clear Memory Reset to
Factory Default
OK

12
Main Menu

After pressing OK, the touch panel will reboot 13

Touch Screen Calibration and startup on the Touch Screen Calibration
Calibrate the Touch Screen by
touching the center of the crosshairs
procedure as shown here. 14
The following note is also shown on the calibration
+ with your finger or a stylus.
Note: The panel will not
screens to remind the user that the Project File
has been cleared, there’s no communications
A
communicate or run its project in this with the PLC, and the calibration procedure
mode. most be performed in order to ready the panel to B
download a project:
Cancel Note: The panel will not communicate or run C
its project in this mode.
Also, the C-more Programming Software will
not connect to the panel in this situation.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
5-55
 Chapter
PLC Communications
6
In This Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................................................ 6–2
DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection.................................................................... 6–2
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams....................................................... 6–5
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial:..................................................................... 6–7
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A:.............................................................. 6–10
Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON:....................... 6–16
Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON:............................................... 6–17
RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples........................................ 6–18
Allen-Bradley:.......................................................................................................... 6–22
GE:.......................................................................................................................... 6–27
GE VersaMax Micro:................................................................................................ 6–27
Mitsubishi:.............................................................................................................. 6–27
Omron:................................................................................................................... 6–29
Modicon ModBus RS-232:....................................................................................... 6–30
Modicon Micro Series:............................................................................................ 6–30
Modicon ModBus with RJ45:................................................................................... 6–30
Siemens:.................................................................................................................. 6–31
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Introduction
1 The C-more family of touch panels is capable of communicating with a wide variety of
Programmable Logic Controllers. C-more is capable of communicating over RS232,
2 RS422 and RS485 serial networks as well as Ethernet networks. It communicates with all
AutomationDirect PLC’s utilizing various protocols. C-more also communicates with other
brands of PLCs by their different protocols. The table on the next page lists all of the various
3 PLCs and protocols that can be configured. The page after the protocol table lists the various
serial communication cables that are available to purchase. The rest of this chapter is devoted
4 to show the pin to pin connections of all the available cables plus wiring diagrams that the user
can refer to in order to construct their own cables, along with wiring diagrams of cables that
are not available for purchase. To simplify RS422/RS485 wiring schemes, we have included
5 wiring diagrams showing connections for available terminal connectors such as our ZIPLink
Communication Adapter Module, p/n ZL-CMA15, used for example with our DL-06 and
6 D2-260 PLCs and C-more D-Sub 15-pin to Terminal Block Adapter p/n EA-COMCON-3.
If you have difficulty determining whether the particular PLC and/or protocol you are using
7 will work with the C-more series of touch panels, please contact our technical support group
at 770-844-4200

8 DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection

9 NOTE: Many DirectLogic PLCs support multi-level password protection of the ladder program. This allows
password protection while not locking the communication port to an operator interface. The multilevel
10 password can be invoked by creating a password with an upper case “A” followed by seven numeric
characters (e.g. A1234567). Please refer to the specific PLC user manual for further details.

11 C-more
Touch Panel
12
DL-06 PLC
13
14
C-more to
A Direct LOGIC
VGA 15-pin port
Port 2
B serial cable
p/n EA-2CBL-1

C
D
®
6-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Protocol & Cables

Compatibility Table
Model Protocols
1
Productivity3000
P3000 Serial
P3000 Ethernet 2
CLICK Modbus (CLICK)

all
K-Sequence
Direct NET
3
DL05/DL06

H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
4
DL105 all K-Sequence
D2-230 K-Sequence 5
K-Sequence
D2-240
Direct NET
K-Sequence
6
DL205 D2-250/D2-250-1/D2-260 Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
7
Direct NET
D2-240/D2-250-1/D2-260
Using DCM Modbus (Koyo addressing) 8
H2-ECOM/H2-ECOM100 Direct LOGIC Ethernet
D3-330/330P (Requires the use of a Data Communications Unit)
D3-340
Direct NET
Direct NET
9
AutomationDirect
DL305 D3-350
K-Sequence
Direct NET
10
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

D3-350 DCM
Direct NET 11
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

D4-430
K-Sequence
Direct NET
12
D4-440
K-Sequence
Direct NET
13
K-Sequence
DL405
D4-450 Direct NET 14
Modbus (Koyo addressing)

All with DCM

Direct NET
Modbus (Koyo addressing)
A
H4-ECOM/H4-ECOM100
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.2 or later and Studio any version
Direct LOGIC Ethernet
Think & Do Modbus RTU (serial port)
B
H2-WinPLC (Think & Do) Live V5.5.1 or later and Studio V7.2.1 or later Think & Do Modbus TCP/IP (Ethernet port)

GS Drives
GS Drives Serial C
GS Drives TCP/IP (GS-EDRV)
SOLO Temperature Controllers SOLO Temperature Controller D
PLC Compatibility Table continued on the next page.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-3
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Protocol & Cables (cont’d)

1 Compatibility Table (cont’d)
Model Protocols
2 MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5-01/02/03 DH485/AIC/AIC+
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400 and 1500
3 SLC 5-03/04/05 DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix™, CompactLogix™, FlexLogix™
4 Allen-Bradley
PLC-5 DF1 Full Duplex
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based DF1 Half Duplex; DF1 Full Duplex

5 ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Generic I/O Messaging EtherNet/IP Server

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix - Tag Based

6 MicroLogix 1100, 1400 and SLC 5/05, via native Ethernet port EtherNet/IP Client
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5-03/04/05, all via ENI adapter

7 GE 90/30, 90/70. Micro 90, VersaMax Micro

FX Series
SNPX
FX Direct

8 Mitsubishi
Q02, Q02H, Q06H, Q12H, Q25H
Q, QnA Serial
Q CPU
QnA Serial

9 Q, Qna Ethernet
984 CPU, Quantum 113 CPU, AEG Modicon Micro Series 110 CPU: 311-xx, 411-xx,
QnA Ethernet
Modbus RTU
512-xx, 612-xx
10 Modicon
Other devices using Modicon Modbus addressing
Modbus RTU
Modbus TCP/IP

11 Omron
C200 Adapter, C500
CJ1/CS1 Serial
Host Link

FINS
12 CJ1/CS1 Ethernet
S7-200 CPU, RS-485 Serial PPI
Siemens
13 S7-200 CPU, S7-300 CPU, S7-1200 CPU; Ethernet Ethernet ISO over TCP

14
A
B
C
D
®
6-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams

Purchased Cable
Description
Cable
Part Number
1
AutomationDirect Productivity Series, CLICK,
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-12 port, DL05, DL06, DL105, EA-2CBL
DL205, D3-350, D4-450 & H2-WINPLC (RS-232C)
2
Direct LOGIC (VGA Style) 15-pin port
DL06, D2-250 (250-1), D2-260
(RS-232C)
EA-2CBL-1 3
Direct LOGIC PLC RJ-11 port, D3-340
(RS-232C) EA-3CBL Part No. EA-2CBL 4
Direct LOGIC DL405 PLC 15-pin D-sub
port, DL405 (RS-232C)
Direct LOGIC PLC 25-pin D-sub port,
EA-4CBL-1
5
DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU and EA-4CBL-2
all DCM’s (RS-232C) 6
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix 1000, 1100,
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
1200, 1400, 1500 (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05,
7
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix, MicroLogix EA-SLC-232-CBL
DF1 port (RS-232C)
Allen-Bradley PLC-5 DF1 port
8
(RS-232C) EA-PLC5-232-CBL Part No. EA-2CBL-1

Allen-Bradley MicroLogix, SLC 5-01/02/03, PLC5

DH485 port (RS-232C) EA-DH485-CBL
9
GE 90/30, 90/70, Micro 90, VersaMax Micro
15-pin D-sub port (RS-422A) EA-90-30-CBL 10
MITSUBISHI FX Series 25-pin port
(RS-422A) EA-MITSU-CBL
11
MITSUBISHI FX Series 8-pin mini-DIN
EA-MITSU-CBL-1
(RS-422A)
OMRON Host Link
12
C200 Adapter, C500 EA-OMRON-CBL
(RS-232C) Part No. EA-3CBL
13
NOTE 1: The above list of pre-made communications cables may be purchased. See further in this chapter
14
for wiring diagrams of additonal user constructed cables. This chapter also includes wiring diagrams for the
pre-made cables. A
NOTE 2: EZTouch serial PLC communication cables are compatible with C-more touch panels. B
C-more PLC Serial
Communications Port
8 1
D-Sub 15-pin female C
on rear of touch panel
15 9
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-5
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams

1
2
3
Part No. EA-4CBL-1
4 Part No. EA-4CBL-1

5
6
7 Part No. EA-MLOGIX-CBL Part No. EA-SLC-232-CBL

8
9
10
11 Part No. EA-PLC5-232-CBL Part No. EA-DH485-CBL

12
13
14
A Part No. EA-90-30-CBL Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL

B
C
D Part No. EA-MITSU-CBL-1 Part No. EA-OMRON-CBL

®
6-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams (cont’d)

The following series of wiring diagrams show the connectors and wiring details for the
communication cables that are used between the C-more touch panels and various PLC
1
controllers. Part numbers are included with the pre-made cables that can be purchased from
AutomationDirect. The information presented will allow the user to construct their own cables 2
if so desired.
EA-2CBL 3
Productivity Series, Do-more, CLICK and Direct Logic PLC RJ12 port:
To PLC
RJ12 Port
DL05, DL06, DL105, DL205, DL350, DL450, H2-WINPLC
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 4
RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL)

RJ12 6-pin 15-pin

5
Phone Plug D-sub
1 = Sig GND
2 = do not use
(6P6C)

TXD 4
Wiring Diagram

3 RXD
8 = do not use
7 = do not use
6 = do not use
(male)
15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
13 = do not use
6
3 = RXD 5 = Logic GND
7
3 2 12 = do not use
4 = TXD RXD TXD
4 = do not use 11 = do not use
5 = do not use GND 1 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
123456
6 = do not use 1 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
shield 1
1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 8
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial: EA-2CBL-1 9
Direct Logic PLC (VGA style) 15-pin HD port:
To PLC
15-Pin HD Port
D2-250, D2-250-1, D2-260, DL06
RS-232C (p/n EA-2CBL-1)
To C-more Touch Panel
Serial Port2 10
15-pin Wiring Diagram
11
15-pin
HD D-sub
8 = do not use
7 = Sig GND
(male)
15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
TXD
RXD
2
3
3 RXD
2 TXD
8 = do not use
7 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
15 14 = do not use
12
6 = do not use 13 = do not use GND 7 5 6 = donot use 13 = do not use
5 = CTS
4 = RTS
3 = RXD 1 6
12 = do not use
11 = do not use RTS
10 = do not use CTS
4
5
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
13
2 = TXD 9 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
1 = +5 VDC - N/C
HD = High Density shield 1 1 = Frame GND

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-7
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial (cont’d):

1 EA-3CBL
Direct Logic PLC RJ11 port: D3-340 To C-more Touch

2 To PLC
RJ11 Port
RS-232C (p/n EA-3CBL) Panel PLC Port

3 RJ11 4-pin
Phone Plug
15-pin
D-sub
(4P4C) Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
4 1 = RXD
2 = TXD
TXD 2
1
3
2
RXD
7 = do not use
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
14 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
RXD TXD
3 = do not use 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
5 4 = Sig ground 1234
GND 4
shield
5
1
3 = RXD (232C)
2 = TXD (232C)
1 = Frame GND
1
10 = do not use
9 = do not use

6 Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
6-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial (cont’d):

EA-4CBL-1 1
To PLC Direct Logic PLC 15-pin D-sub port: DL405, To C-more Touch
15-Pin Port
RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-1) Panel PLC Port
2
TXD 2
Wiring Diagram
3 RXD
3
15-pin 15-pin
4
RXD 3 2 TXD
D-sub D-sub
8 = YOM Sense (male) 15 = Logic GND online 4 5 8 = do not used (male) 15 = do not use
7 = CTS 14 = Logic GND 7 = do not used 14 = do not use
6 = do not use
15
13 = Logic GND GND 13 15
6 = do not used 13 = do not use
5 = do not use
4 = Online
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
GND 14
GND 15
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not used
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
5
2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use YOP 1

6
2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
1 = YOP Sense 1 7 1 = Frame GND
CTS
See PLC user manual YOM 8
for pin out details.
1
shield
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable. 7
8
EA-4CBL-2
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct Logic PLC 25-pin D-sub port:
DL405, D3-350, DL305 DCU, and all DCMs,
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
9
RS-232C (p/n EA-4CBL-2)
10
11
25-pin Wiring Diagram 15-pin
D-sub D-sub
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 2 3 RXD 8 = do not use
12 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
25 24 = do not use 3 2 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
23 = do not use RXD
12
11 = do not use TXD 15 13 = do not use
10 = do not use 6 = do not use
22 = do not use GND 7 5
5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
9 = do not use 21 = do not use
8 = do not use 4 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
7 = Signal GND 20 = do not use RTS 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
13
19 = do not use CTS 5
6 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
5 = CTS 18 = do not use 1 = Frame GND
4 = RTS 17 = do not use shield 1
3 = RXD 16 = do not use
2 = TXD
1 = do not use
1 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-9
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A:

When using the RS-422A/RS-485A capabilities of the C-more PLC communications port, the
1 termination resistor is placed between the RXD– and RXD+ terminals on the PLC side of the
connection between the touch panel and PLC. The Termination Resistor value is based on the
2 characteristic impedance of the cable being used. To enable the built-in 120 Ohm Termination
Resistor, jumper pin 13 to pin 9 (RXD+) on the C-more 15-pin PLC communications port.

3 To PLC Direct LOGIC DL-06, D2-250, D2-250-1, D2-260 (all Port 2) To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
15-Pin Port RS-422A
User Constructed
4
5
Wiring Diagram 13
15-pin Term. 15-pin
HD D-sub D-sub
TXD+ 9 9 RD+
(male) 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
TXD– 10 10 RD– 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
6 8 = do not use
7 = Sig GND
6 = RXD–
15
15 = CTS–
14 = CTS+
RXD+
RXD–
13
6
11
12
SD+
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
SD– 4 = do not use
15
13 = Termination
12 = SD– (RS422)
11 = SD+ (RS422)
5 = do not use 13 = RXD+
7 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422)
7 4 = do not use
3 = do not use
2 = do not use
1 6
12 = RTS-
11 = RTS+
10 = TXD–
GND
RTS– 12
15
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = RD+ (RS422)

9 = TXD+ CTS–
1 = do not use
8 RTS+
CTS+
11
14
shield 1

9 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

10 To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct LOGIC D2-DCM*, D3-DCM* & D4-DCM* To C-more Touch
RS-422A Panel PLC Port

11 User Constructed
12 13 = CTS–
25-pin
D-sub
(male)
25 = do not use
24 = do not use TXD+ 14
Wiring Diagram 13 Term.
9 RD+
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
12 = CTS+ 23 = do not use

13 11 = RTS–
10 = RTS+
9 = do not use
25 22 = do not use TXD–
21 = do not use RXD+ 17
20 = do not use
15 10 RD– 7 = do not use
11 SD+ 6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
12 = SD– (RS422)
8 = do not use 16 12 SD– 4 = do not use
19 = do not use RXD– 11 = SD+ (RS422)

14 7=0V
6 = do not use
5 = do not use
18 = do not use
17 = RXD+
(RS422)
0V
RTS–
7
11
5 3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD– (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422)
4 = do not use 13
16 = RXD–
A 3 = do not use CTS–
2 = do not use (RS422)
RTS+ 10 * Note: The DCM modules must be set for:
1 = do not use 1 15 = TXD–
CTS+ 12 Direct NET Slave, HEX mode.
(RS422)

B 14 = TXD+
(RS422)
shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

C NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more

D than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-18 if more than one PLC will be
connected to a panel.

®
6-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (cont’d):

User Constructed 1
To PLC Direct LOGIC D4-430/D4-440/D4-450 Port 1 and D3-350 Port 2
25-Pin Port To C-more Touch
RS-422A Panel PLC Port

2
25-pin
D-sub
14
Wiring Diagram 13
9
Term. 15-pin
D-sub
3
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD+ RD+
12 = do not use 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
11 = CTS+
10 = RXD–
(RS422)
24 = do not use
25 23 = CTS–
22 = do not use
TXD–
RXD+
16
9
10
11
RD– 7 = do not use
SD+
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
12 = SD– (RS422)
4
21 = do not use 10 12
9 = RXD+ RXD– SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
(RS422)
8 = do not use
7=0V
20 = do not use
19 = RTS+
18 = RTS–
0V
RTS–
7
18
5 3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD– (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422) 5
6 = do not use 17 = do not use
23
5 = do not use
4 = do not use
3 = do not use 1
16 = TXD–
(RS422)
15 = do not use
CTS–
RTS+ 19
11
6
2 = do not use 14 = TXD+ CTS+
1 = do not use (RS422) shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
7
8
User Constructed
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Direct LOGIC D4-450 Port 3 To C-more Touch 9
RS-422A Panel PLC Port
RTS and CTS are not present on this port.
10
13 = TXD–
25-pin
D-sub
(male)
25 = RXD–
(RS422) TXD+ 12
Wiring Diagram 13
9
Term.
RD+
15-pin
D-sub 11
(RS422) 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
12 = TXD+ 24 = RXD+ 13 10
(RS422)
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
25 (RS422)
23 = do not use
22 = do not use
TXD–
RXD+ 24
25
11
12
RD– 7 = do not use
SD+
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
15
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
12 = SD– (RS422)
12
9 = do not use RXD– SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
21 = do not use
8 = do not use
7=0V
6 = do not use
20 = do not use
19 = do not use
18 = do not use
0V 7
shield
5
1
3 = do not use
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
10 = RD– (RS422)
9 = RD+ (RS422) 13
5 = do not use

14
4 = do not use 17 = do not use
3 = do not use 16 = do not use
2 = do not use 1 15 = do not use
1 = do not use 14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
A
NOTE: The RS-422 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
B
than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-18 if more than one PLC will be
connected to a panel. C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-11
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (cont’d):

User Constructed
1 To PLC Direct LOGIC DL-06, D2-260 (both Port 2) To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
15-Pin Port RS-485A
2
3 15-pin
HD D-sub
(male) RXD+ 13
Wiring Diagram 13
9
Term.
RD+
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
9 11 SD+ 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
4
TXD+
8 = do not use 15
10 10 6 = do not use 13 = Termination
7 = Sig GND 15 = CTS– TXD– RD–
15 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485)
6 = RXD– 14 = CTS+ 6 12 SD– 4 = do not use
RXD– 11 = SD+ (RS485)
5 = do not use 13 = RXD+

5
7 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485)
4 = do not use 12 = RTS- GND
2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485)
3 = do not use 1 6 11 = RTS+ RTS– 12
1 = Frame GND
2 = do not use 10 = TXD– 15
9 = TXD+ CTS–
1 = do not use
6 RTS+
CTS+
11
14
shield 1

7 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

8 NOTE: The RS-485 wiring diagram shown above is not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram example on page 6-18 if more than one PLC will be
9 connected to a panel.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
6-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (cont’d):

Direct LOGIC ZIPLink ZL-CMA15L Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter
RS-485A – PLC D2-260 or DL06 only – Port 2
1
Terminal Block Adapter
RS-232 RXD
RS-232 TXD Wiring Diagram
plugs into C-more 15-pin
PLC Serial Comm. Port 2
3
TERMINATE +5V
SIGNAL GND GND
ZL-CMA15L
RS-422/485 RX– RD–

RS422/485
RXD

TXD
232
RS-422/485 TX–
RS-422/485 RX+
SD–
SD+ 4
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-

RS-422/485 TX+ RD+

SG

ZL-CMA15L
shield
See ZL-CMA15L specifications on
TERM EA-COMCON-3
5
termination resistor jumper.

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent. 6
7
Direct LOGIC ZIPLink ZL-CMA15L Adapter Module to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter
RS-422A – PLC D2-250 (-1), D2-260 or DL06 – Port 2
Terminal Block Adapter
8
plugs into C-more 15-pin

9
RS-232 RXD
PLC Serial Comm. Port
RS-232 TXD Wiring Diagram
TERMINATE +5V

ZL-CMA15L

RXD
SIGNAL GND
RS-422/485 RX–
GND
SD–
10
RS-422/485 RX+ SD+

RS422/485
TXD
232
RS-422/485 TX– RD–
11
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG

RS-422/485 TX+ RD+

EA-COMCON-3
12
shield TERM

ZL-CMA15L See ZL-CMA15L specifications on

termination resistor jumper.

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
13
NOTE: The RS-422 and RS-485 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving
connecting more than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-18 if
14
more than one PLC will be connected to a panel.
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-13
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (cont’d):

1
Productivity3000 PAC RS485 Port to EA-COMCON-3 Terminal Block Adapter
2 Wiring Diagram
Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
PLC Serial Comm. Port

3 SIGNAL GND
TXD / RXD –
GND
RD –
*
4 TXD / RXD +

Productivity3000
SD –
SD +
PS485 Port RD +

5 * 120 Ω resistor
shield TERM

EA-COMCON-3
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
6
7
8
AutomationDirect Productivity PAC
9 Removable Connector
included with
Productivity3000 CPU
RS-485
To C-more Touch
Panel Serial Port2

10
Wiring Diagram 13 15-pin
11
Term.
D-sub
TXD+ / RXD+ 3 9 RD+
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
TXD+ / RXD+ + Term. 11 SD+ 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
15

12 8 10 6 = do not use 13 = Termination

TXD- / RXD- - TXD- / RXD- RD–
5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485)
12 SD– 4 = do not use
Ground G 11 = SD+ (RS485)
Ground 5 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485)

13 shield 1
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = RD+ (RS485)

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
Use 120 ohm resistors as termination resistors (Term.)
14
A
B
C
NOTE: The RS-485 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving connecting more
D than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-18 if more than one PLC
will be connected to a panel.

®
6-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A (cont’d):

AutomationDirect CLICK PLC

1
CLICK To C-more Touch
Analog CPU
Com Port 3
RS-485
Panel Serial Port2
2
Wiring Diagram 13 Term. 15-pin
3
D-sub
RS-485 3 9

4
RD+
Signal A 8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
RS-485 Signal A + Term. 11 SD+ 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
15
RS-485 8 10 6 = do not use 13 = Termination
RS-485 Signal B - Signal B
RD–
5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485)

5
12 SD– 4 = do not use
Logic Ground LG 11 = SD+ (RS485)
Logic 5 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485)
Ground 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485)
shield 1 1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
Use 120 ohm resistors as termination resistors (Term.)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
NOTE: The RS-422 and RS-485 wiring diagrams shown above are not for multi-drop networks involving
connecting more than one PLC to a panel. Refer to the wiring diagram examples starting on page 6-18 if
more than one PLC will be connected to a panel.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-15
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON:

1 FA-ISOCON Universal Isolated Network Adapter
RS-422A to RS-232C – PLC DL05 or D2-240 – Port 2 only
2 Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
PLC Serial Comm. Port
A COM B GND

3 RX–
RX+
SD–
SD+
RXD

4 TXD
TXD EN
TX–
TX+
RD–
RD+
B TXD shield TERM

5
RXD
CTS Ground the shield only at the equipment
C-A end where the FA-ISOCON is located. EA-COMCON-3
C +V
C-A
D

6
TX+
TX–
RX– See FA-ISOCON specificaitons to
RX+ properly configure the adapter. Note: When using multiple PLCs
C-B connected to one C-more touch
panel, only jumper the Term

7 FA-ISOCON
terminal to the RD+ terminal
when the panel is the last device
at one end of the network.

8 Port 2

9
10 Modular cable included
with the FA-ISOCON
PW
RU
CP
TX1
RX
1
R
N
U
DL05 PLC
TX2

11
2
RX

12 Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
6-16 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON:

F2-UNICON Universal Converter 1

RS-422A to RS-232C – PLC DL05 or D2-240 – Port 2 only
Wiring Diagram Terminal Block Adapter
plugs into C-more 15-pin
PLC Serial Comm. Port
2
GND GND
RXD–
RXD+
SD–
SD+
3
TXD–
TXD+
RD–
RD+ 4
shield TERM
Ground the shield only at the equipment
end where the F2-UNICON is located. EA-COMCON-3 5
F2-UNICON
See F2-UNICON specificaitons to
properly configure the converter.
Note: When using multiple PLCs
connected to one C-more touch
panel, only jumper the Term
6
terminal to the RD+ terminal
when the panel is the last device
at one end of the network.
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU
7
DL240
RUN

8
CPU TERM

D2-240 PLC CH 1

CH 2

9
CH 3

CH 4

10
PORT 1

PORT 2

Modular cable included

with the F2-UNICON
11
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-17
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples

1 DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes

2 (example device communicating

DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
across RS-422 connection) (Slave)
3
Port 2
4 ZL-CMA15L DirectLOGIC
(Slave) RXD
DL205 PLC
Cable Adapter
5
TXD
RS422/485 232

(example device communicating

TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG
(ZL-CMA15L shown) across RS-422 connection)

Port 2
6 ZL-CMA15L

Shielded Cable
When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC
RXD

Cable Adapter
7
TXD

use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15

RS422/485 232
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG

(ZL-CMA15L shown)

Shielded Cable

8
9
10 Notes: 1. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
2. Wiring Diagram for this example, ZL-CMA15(L)
To DL06 PLC port 2 To D2-250-1 PLC port 2
11 (example RS-422 connection) (example RS-422 connection)
RXD+

RXD+
RXD–

RXD–
TXD+

TXD+
RTS+

CTS+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD–

TXD–
RTS–
CTS–

RTS–

CTS–
GND

GND

12 7 10 9 6
*
13 11 14 12 15 7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15

13 7 = Sig GND
15-pin
HD D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
15
15 = CTS–
14 = CTS+
6 = RXD– 13 = RXD+

14
5 = do not use 12 = RTS-
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+
3 = do not use 10 = TXD–
2 = do not use 1 9 = TXD+
1 = do not use 6

A
HD = High Density

RXD+ RXD+

RXD– RXD–

B TXD+

TXD–
TXD+

TXD–
Signal GND Signal GND

C * Termination resistors required at both ends of the

network receive data signals to match the impedance
shield

of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).

Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram
D using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate

®
6-18 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (cont’d)

DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes
1
C-more

(example device communicating

DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
Touch Panel
2
across RS-422 connection)
3
4
(Slave)
(Master)
5
Port 2
6
e
e cod
Dat Origin
of
ntry
Cou .
., LTD
S CO
RIE

TERM
N-3
UST
IND
ICS
CO

RD+
ON

-COM
CTR

RD–
ELE
O
EA

SD+
KOY

SD–
GND
ZL-CMA15L

RXD

Cable Adapter
7
TXD
RS422/485 232
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG

(ZL-CMA15L shown)

Shielded Cable
Shielded Cable
8
9
Notes: 1. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
2. Wiring Diagram for this example, ZL-CMA15(L) 10
To DL06 PLC port 2 To C-more Touch Panel
(example RS-422 connection)
11

* Term.
RXD+
RXD–
TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD–

RTS–
CTS–

SHD
RD+
RD–

SD+
GND

SD–
GND

EA-COMCON-3
7 10 9 6 13 11 14 12 15 5 10 9 12 11 13 1
12
6 = RXD–
15-pin
HD D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
7 = Sig GND
15
15 = CTS–
14 = CTS+
13 = RXD+
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub 15 = do not use
13
7 = do not use (male) 14 = do not use
5 = do not use 12 = RTS-

14
6 = do not use 15 13 = Termination
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422)
3 = do not use 10 = TXD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
2 = do not use 1 9 = TXD+ 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422)
1 = do not use 6
2 = do not use 9 = RD+ (RS422)
HD = High Density 1 = Frame GND 1

RXD+ RXD+ A
RXD– RXD–

TXD+

TXD–
TXD+

TXD–
B
Signal GND Signal GND
shield
* Termination resistors required at both ends of the
network receive data signals to match the impedance
shield
C
of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Jumper pin
Typical RS-422 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram (cont-d)
using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate
13 to 9 on the C-more Touch Panel 15-pin connector
to place the 120q internal resistor into the network. If
the cable impedance is different, then use an external
resistor matched to the cable impedance.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-19
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (cont’d)

1 DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes

2 (example device communicating

DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
across RS-422 connection) (Slave)
3
Port 2
4 ZL-CMA15L DirectLOGIC
(Slave) RXD
DL205 PLC
Cable Adapter
5
TXD
RS422/485 232

(example device communicating

TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG
(ZL-CMA15L shown) across RS-422 connection)

Port 2
6 ZL-CMA15L

Shielded Cable
When connecting to a DirectLogic PLC
RXD

Cable Adapter
7
TXD

use connector ZL-CMA15L or ZL-CMA15

RS422/485 232
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG

(ZL-CMA15L shown)

Shielded Cable

8
9
10 Notes: 1. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
2. Wiring Diagram for this example, ZL-CMA15(L)

11 To DL06 PLC port 2 To D2-250-1 PLC port 2

(example RS-485 connection) (example RS-485 connection)

12
RXD+

RXD+
RXD–

RXD–
TXD+

RTS+

CTS+

TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD–

RTS–
CTS–

TXD–

RTS–

CTS–
GND

GND

7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15

13 *

15-pin
HD D-sub

14 8 = do not use (male)

7 = Sig GND
6 = RXD–
5 = do not use
15
15 = CTS–
14 = CTS+
13 = RXD+
12 = RTS-
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+

A
3 = do not use 10 = TXD–
2 = do not use 1 9 = TXD+
1 = do not use 6
HD = High Density

B TXD– / RXD–

TXD+ / RXD+
TXD– / RXD–

TXD+ / RXD+

Signal GND Signal GND

C
shield

* Termination resistors required at both ends of

the network to match the impedance of the cable
(between 100 and 500 ohms).
Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram
D using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate

®
6-20 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples (cont’d)

DL06 and DL205 used for illustration purposes
1
C-more

(example device communicating

DirectLOGIC
DL06 PLC
Touch Panel
2
across RS-422 connection)
3
4
(Slave)
(Master)
5
Port 2
6
e
e cod
Dat Origin
of
ntry
Cou .
., LTD
S CO
RIE

TERM
N-3
UST
IND
ICS
CO

RD+
ON

-COM
CTR

RD–
ELE
O
EA

SD+
KOY

SD–
GND
ZL-CMA15L

RXD

Cable Adapter
7
TXD
RS422/485 232
TX+
RX+

TXD
RXD
+5V
TX-
RX-
SG

(ZL-CMA15L shown)

Shielded Cable
Shielded Cable
8
9
Notes: 1. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.
2. Wiring Diagram for this example, ZL-CMA15(L) 10
To DL06 PLC port 2 To C-more Touch Panel
11
(example RS-485 connection)

* Term.
12
RXD+
RXD–

TXD+

RTS+

CTS+
TXD–

RTS–
CTS–

SHD
RD+
RD–

SD+
GND

GND

SD–
EA-COMCON-3
7 6 10 13 9 11 14 12 15 5 10 12 9 11 13 1

15-pin
13
HD D-sub
15-pin

14
8 = do not use (male) 15 = CTS–
7 = Sig GND 14 = CTS+ 8 = do not use D-sub 15 = do not use
6 = RXD– 15 13 = RXD+ 7 = do not use (male) 14 = do not use
5 = do not use 12 = RTS- 6 = do not use 15 13 = Termination
4 = do not use 11 = RTS+ 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485)
3 = do not use 10 = TXD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485)
2 = do not use 1
1 = do not use 6
9 = TXD+

HD = High Density
3 = do not use
2 = do not use
1 = Frame GND 1
10 = RD– (RS485)
9 = RD+ (RS485)
A
TXD– / RXD–

TXD+ / RXD+
TXD– / RXD–

TXD+ / RXD+ B
Signal GND Signal GND

C
shield shield

* Termination resistors required at both ends of the

network receive data signals to match the impedance
of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms). Jumper pin
Typical RS-485 Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram (cont-d)
using DirectLogic pin numbers to illustrate
13 to 9 on the C-more touch panel 15-pin connector
to place the 120q internal resistor into the network. If
the cable impedance is different, then use an external
resistor matched to the cable impedance.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-21
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley:
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
1 Allen-Bradley MicroLogix™ 1000/1100/1200/1400/1500 To C-more Touch
To AB MicroLogix RS-232
RS-232C (p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL) Panel PLC Port

2 communication channel

3 1 = do not use
2 = Sig GND
Mini Din
8-pin Male Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
7 = do not use 14 = do not use

4
3 = do not use TXD 7 3 RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
0.290”
4 = RXD 6 7 8
5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
3 4 5
RXD 4 2
5 = do not use 1 2
TXD
4 = do not use 11 = do not use
6 = do not use GND 2 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
0.35”

5 7 = TXD
8 = do not use
DIA. Nonstandard
keying shield 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

6
EA-SLC-232-CBL
7 To PLC
9-Pin Port
Allen-Bradley SLC 5-03/04/05, ControlLogix, CompactLogix,
FlexLogix, MicroLogix, DF1, RS-232C (p/n EA-SLC-232-CBL)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

8
9 9-pin
D-sub
(female) Wiring Diagram
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
1 = do not use 1 3 3
10
6 = do not use TXD RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use
2 = RXD 7 = do not use 5 = Logic GND
2 2 12 = do not use
3 = TXD 8 = do not use RXD TXD
4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 9

11 shield 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1

1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
9 = do not use

12
EA-PLC5-232-CBL
13 To PLC
25-Pin Port
Allen-Bradley PLC5 DF1
RS-232C (p/n EA-PLC5-232-CBL)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

14
Wiring Diagram
A 25-pin
D-sub
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 2
12 = do not use
3 RXD 8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
25 24 = do not use 3 2 TXD 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD
B 10 = do not use
9 = do not use
8 = do not use
22 = do not use GND 7
21 = do not use
shield
5
1
6
5
=
=
do not
Logic
use
GND
4 = do not use
15 13 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
7 = Signal GND 20 = do not use 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use

C 6 = do not use
5 = do not use
4 = do not use
19 = do not use
18 = do not use
17 = do not use
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

3 = RXD 16 = do not use

D 2 = TXD
1 = do not use
1 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

®
6-22 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (cont’d): EA-DH485-CBL

To AB SLC500
DH-485 Port
Allen-Bradley SLC500™, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485
Point-to-Point
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 1
RS-485A (p/n EA-DH485-CBL)

Wiring Diagram 2
RJ45 8-pin

1 = TXD/RXD+
2 = TXD/RXD–
Phone Plug
(8P8C)
TXD/RXD+ 1
13
9
Term.
RD+
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
3
3 = do not use 2 10 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
4 = Signal GND
5 = LE
6 = do not use
TXD/RXD–
11
12
RD–
SD+
6 = LE
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
15 13 = Termination
12 = SD– (RS485)
11 = SD+ (RS485)
4
SD– 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485)
5
7 = Signal GND
5 6 LE * 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485)
8 = do not use LE *
4 1 = Frame GND
GND
7 5 * Note: The LE signal is wired in the cable

6
GND
as shown, but not required for
shield 1 point-to-point communications.
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 9842 shielded cable or equivalent.

Allen-Bradley SLC500™, 5/01, /02, /03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more Touch Panels 7
RS-485A (using C-more cable p/n EA-DH485-CBL)

Allen-Bradley DH-485 Link

8
SLC 500 Modular (See manufacturer’s litature for details.)
PLC Controller

DH-485 DH-485
9
10
Peripheral Peripheral
J2 J2

CPU CPU
J1 J1

Channel 1 must be Power Power

set to DH485.

AB 1747-AIC
DH485 Link Coupler
AB 1747-AIC
DH485 Link Coupler
11
AB 1747-C11 A
Cable 12
13
14
C-more
Touch Panel
C-more
Touch Panel
A
B
C-more
EA-DH485-CBL
Cable
C-more
EA-DH485-CBL
Cable
C
Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more touch panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network
using the AB DH485 Link Coupler, p/n 1747-AIC. Select the “Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix” driver
in the C-more Programming Software when starting the project. Also, set the AB channel configuration for DH485.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-23
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (cont’d):
1 Allen-Bradley SLC500™ 5/03 DH-485/AIC to Multiple C-more Touch Panels
(using C-more cables p/n EA-MLOGIX-CBL, EA-SLC-232-CBL)

2 Allen-Bradley DH-485 Link

SLC 5/03 Modular (See manufacturer’s litature for details.)

3 PLC Controller

4 Channel 0 must be
set to DH485.

5 AB 1761-NET-AIC
AIC + Advanced
Interface Converter
AB 1761-NET-AIC
AIC + Advanced
Interface Converter

6 C-more
EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Cable

7 AB 1747-CP3
RS-232 Cable

8 To additional
C-more
Touch Panel

9 C-more
Touch Panel
C-more
Touch Panel

10
C-more
11 EA-MLOGIX-CBL
Cable
C-more
EA-SLC-232-CBL
Cable

12 Note: The above diagram shows connecting multiple C-more touch panels to an Allen-Bradley DH485/AIC network using the
AB AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter, p/n 1761-NET-AIC. Select the “Allen-Bradly DH485/AIC SLC500 MircroLogix” driver
in the C-more Programming Software when starting the project. Also, set the AB channel configuration for DH485.

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
6-24 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (cont’d):
Multiple Allen-Bradley PLCs connected to multiple C-more Touch Panels
(using AB Ethernet Network Interface p/n 761-NET-ENI with EtherNet/IP protocol)
1
Allen-Bradley
SLC 5/03 Modular
Allen-Bradley
MicroLogix 1000
Allen-Bradley
MicroLogix 1500
PLC Controller
2
PLC Controller PLC Controller

3
4
5
AB mini DIN to D-shell AB mini DIN to mini DIN
cable p/n 1761-CBL-AP00 cable p/n 1761-CBL-AM00

6
ETHERNET
RS232
FAULT

Ethernet
TX/RX ETHERNET
RS232
FAULT

Hub or Switch
IP

10/100 Base-T
TX/RX
PWR

7
ETHERNET CABLE IP
RS232
FAULT
EXTERNAL
PWR

TX/RX CABLE

EXTERNAL

IP
AB 1761-NET-ENI

8
PWR

AB 1761-NET-ENI
CABLE

EXTERNAL

Ethernet/IP
Network
AB 1761-NET-ENI

9
C-more
Touch Panel 10
C-more
Touch Panel
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-25
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Allen-Bradley (cont’d): User Constructed

1 To PLC
25-Pin Port
Allen Bradley PLC5 DF1
RS-422
To C-more
PLC Port

2
25-pin Wiring Diagram

3
15-pin
D-sub D-sub
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD + 2 10 RD – 8 = do not use
12 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
25 24 = do not use 3 12 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD + SD – 15 13 = do not use

4 10 = do not use
9 = do not use
8 = do not use
22 = do not use GND
21 = do not use
20 = do not use
TXD – 14
7 5
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
9 RD + 4 = do not use
12 = SD –
11 = SD +
7 = Signal GND 11 SD + 3 = do not use 10 = RD –
19 = do not use RXD – 16
5 6 = do not use
5 = do not use
4 = do not use
3 = RXD +
18 = do not use
17 = do not use
16 = RXD –
shield 1
2 = do not use 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = RD +

2 = TXD +
6 1 15 = do not use
1 = do not use 14 = TXD –
Notes:
1. Polarities must be swapped.

7 2. Handshaking is turned off

3. Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
4. Refer to the PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual Switch Setting Reference for details on switch settings to define
the controller's serial port electrical interface.

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
6-26 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

GE: EA-90-30-CBL
To PLC
15-Pin Port
GE 90/30 and 90/70 15-pin D-sub port,
RS-422A (p/n EA-90-30-CBL)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 1
2
Wiring Diagram 13
15-pin Term. 15-pin
8 = CTS(B’)
7 = Logic GND
D-sub
(male)
15
15 = CTS(A’)
14 = do not use
SD(B)
SD(A)
13
12
9
10
RD+
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
RD– 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
3
6 = do not use 13 = SD(B) 15
11 11 SD+ 6 = do not use
4
5 = +5V 12 = SD(A) RD(B’) 13 = Termination
5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422)
4 = do not use 11 = RD(B’) RD(A’) 10 12 SD– 4 = do not use
3 = do not use 10 = RD(A’) 11 = SD+ (RS422)
GND 7 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422)
2 = do not use 9 = do not use

5
2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422)
1 = do not use 1 CTS(B’) 8
1 = Frame GND
CTS(A’) 15
+5V 5
shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
6
GE VersaMax Micro: User Constructed 7
GE VersaMax Micro Port 1 To C-more Touch
To PLC
RJ45 Port 1 RS-232C
Panel PLC Port
8
RJ45 8-pin
Phone Plug Wiring Diagram
15-pin
D-sub
9
1 = RTS (8P8C) (male)
10
2 = CTS 8 = do not use 15 = do not use
TXD 4 3 RXD 7 = do not use
3 = RXD 15 14 = do not use
4 = TXD RXD 3 2 TXD 6 = donot use 13 = do not use
5 = DCD 8 5 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use

11
6 = DTR GND 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
7 = +5V shield 1 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
8 = GND 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use
1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
12
Mitsubishi: EA-MITSU-CBL
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Mitsubishi FX Series 25-pin D-sub port,
RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
13
14
13 = do not use
25-pin
D-sub
(male) 25 = do not use SD+ 3
Wiring Diagram 13 Term.
9 RD+
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
A
12 = do not use 25 24 = do not use SD– 16 10 RD– 7 = do not use

B
11 = do not use 23 = do not use 14 = do not use
15
10 = do not use 22 = do not use RD+ 2 11 SD+ 6 = do not use 13 = Termination
9 = do not use 21 = do not use RD– 15 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS422)
8 = do not use 12 SD–
20 = do not use 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
7 = Signal GND
C
7 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422)
6 = do not use 19 = do not use GND
18 = do not use GND 4 2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS422)
5 = do not use 1 = Frame GND
4 = Signal GND 17 = do not use 1
3 = SD+ (RS422) 16 = SD– (RS422) shield
2 = RD+ (RS422) 1
1 = do not use
15 = RD– (RS422)
14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-27
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Mitsubishi(cont’d): EA-MITSU-CBL-1
1 To PLC
8-Pin Port
Mitsubishi FX Series 8-pin MINI-DIN,
RS-422A (p/n EA-MITSU-CBL-1)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

2 Mini Din Wiring Diagram 13 15-pin

Term.
8-pin Male D-sub
3 1 = RD– (RS-422)
2 = RD+ (RS-422)
3 = Sig GND 6 7 8
SD+
SD–
7
4
9
10
RD+
RD–
8 = do not use
7 = do not use
6 = do not use
(male)

15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
13 = Termination
4 = SD– (RS-422) RD+ 2 11 SD+ 5 = Logic GND
4
12 = SD– (RS422)
3 4 5

5 = do not use 1 2
1 12
RD– SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS422)
6 = do not use
3 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS422)
7 = SD+ (RS-422) GND 2 = do not use 9 = RD+ (RS422)
8 = do not use 1 1

5 shield 1 = Frame GND

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend Belden 8103 shielded cable or equivalent.

6 User Constructed
7 Mitsubishi Q02 / Q02H / Q06H / Q12H / Q25H Serial Driver
and QnA Serial Driver with Direct Connection to To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
To PLC the Serial Port on Q00 and Q01 CPU’s
6-Pin Port
8 RS-232C

9 1 = RXD (232C)
2 = TXD (232C)
Mini Din
6-pin Male Wiring Diagram
8 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
TXD 2 3 RXD 7 = do not use
3 = Logic GND 15 14 = do not use
10 4 = do not use
5 = do not use
6 = do not use
5
3
6
4
RXD
GND
1
3
2
5
TXD 6 = donot use
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
13 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
1 2 1 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
11 shield
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

12 User Constructed
13 To PLC
9-Pin Port
Mitsubishi Q / QnA Serial PLC
QJ71C24N
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
RS-232C
14
Wiring Diagram

A 9-pin
CD 1
15-pin
DTR 4
D-sub D-sub
B 1 = CD 1
(female)

6 = DSR RS
DSR 6
7
8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
6 = do not use 15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
13 = do not use
2 = RXD 7 = RS 8 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
C 3 = TXD CS
8 = CS 3 3 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = DTR 9 = do not use TXD RXD
3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 9 2 2
RXD TXD 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
1
1 = Frame GND
D GND 5 5
shield 1

Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

®
6-28 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Omron:
EA-OMRON-CBL
To PLC
25-Pin Port
Omron Host Link (C200 Adapter, C500),
RS-232C (p/n EA-OMRON-CBL)
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
1
2
25-pin Wiring Diagram

3
15-pin
D-sub D-sub
13 = do not use (male) 25 = do not use TXD 2 3 RXD 8 = do not use
12 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
25 24 = do not use 3 2 7 = do not use 14 = do not use
11 = do not use 23 = do not use RXD TXD 15 13 = do not use
10 = do not use
9 = do not use
8 = do not use
22 = do not use GND 7
21 = do not use
20 = do not use RTS
4
5
6 = do not use
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
4
7 = Signal GND 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
19 = do not use CTS 5
6 = do not use
5 = CTS
4 = RTS
18 = do not use
17 = do not use shield 1
2 = TXD (232C) 1
1 = Frame GND
9 = do not use
5
3 = RXD 16 = do not use

6
2 = TXD 1 15 = do not use
1 = do not use 14 = do not use
Note: Use the above wiring diagram if you need to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

User Constructed 7
To PLC
9-Pin Port
Omron FINS (CQM1, CPM1, CPM2, C200, CJ1 & CS1)
RS-232C
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 8
9-pin 15-pin
9
D-sub D-sub

1 = do not use
(male)
9
6 = do not use TXD 2
Wiring Diagram

3 RXD
8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
6 = do not use 15
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
13 = do not use
10
2 = TXD 7 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use

11
3 = RXD 3 2
8 = do not use RXD TXD 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = RTS 9 = Signal GND SG 9 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = CTS 1 2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
RTS 4
1 = Frame GND 1
CTS 5
shield 1
12
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.
13
User Constructed
To Peripheral Omron Host Link CQM1 using CQM1-CIF02 Peripheral Port Connecting Cable To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port
14
Port Cable RS-232C
A
9-pin
D-sub
(male) Wiring Diagram 8 = do not use
7 = do not use
15-pin
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
B
1 = do not use 9 6 = do not use
C
6 = do not use TXD 3 3 RXD 15 13 = do not use
2 = RXD 7 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
3 = TXD 2 2
8 = do not use RXD TXD 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 1
D
2 = TXD (232C) 9 = do not use
shield 1 1 = Frame GND 1
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-29
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Modicon ModBus RS-232:

User Constructed
1 To PLC
9-Pin Port
Modicon™ ModBus™, 984 CPU, Quanum 113 CPU
RS-232C
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

2
9-pin 15-pin

3 1 = do not use
D-sub
(male)
9
Wiring Diagram
7 = do not use
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
14 = do not use
6 = DSR TXD 3 3 RXD 6 = do not use 15 13 = do not use

4
2 = RXD 7 = RTS 5 = Logic GND
2 2 12 = do not use
3 = TXD 8 = CTS RXD TXD
4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = DTR 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 1 2 = TXD (232C) 1
4 9 = do not use

5 DTR
DSR 6
7
1 = Frame GND

RTS

6 CTS 8
shield 1
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

7 Modicon Micro Series:

User Constructed
8 To PLC
9-Pin Port
AEG Modicon™ Micro Series:
110 CPU 311-xx, 110 CPU 411-xx, 110 CPU 512-xx, 110 CPU 612-xx
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

9 RS-232C

10 9-pin
D-sub
(female) Wiring Diagram
15-pin
D-sub
8 = do not use (male)
7 = do not use
15 = do not use
14 = do not use
1 = do not use 1 2 3 6 = do not use 13 = do not use
11 6 = do not use TXD RXD 15
2 = TXD 7 = do not use 5 = Logic GND 12 = do not use
3 = RXD 3 2
8 = do not use RXD TXD 4 = do not use 11 = do not use
4 = do not use 9 = do not use GND 5 5 3 = RXD (232C) 10 = do not use
5 = Signal GND 9 2 = TXD (232C)
12
9 = do not use
shield 1 1 = Frame GND 1
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

13 Modicon ModBus with RJ45: User Constructed

14 To PLC
RJ45 Port
Modicon™ ModBus™ with RJ45
RS-232C
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port

A RJ45 8-pin Wiring Diagram 15-pin

Phone Plug
B 1 = do not use
2 = do not use
3 = TXD
(8P8C) TXD
RXD
3
4
3
2
RXD
8 = do not use
TXD 7 = do not use
D-sub
(male) 15 = do not use
15 14 = do not use
4 = RXD GND 5 5 6 = donot use 13 = do not use

C 5 = Logic GND
6 = RTS
7 = CTS
RTS
CTS
6
7
5 = Logic GND
4 = do not use
3 = RXD (232C)
12 = do not use
11 = do not use
10 = do not use
8 = do not use 2 = TXD (232C) 1 9 = do not use

D shield 1 1 = Frame GND

Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend using 22 AWG shielded cable.

®
6-30 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 6: PLC Communications

Siemens:
User Constructed
To PLC
9-Pin Port
Siemens S7-200 CPU Port 0 or 1
RS-485A
To C-more Touch
Panel PLC Port 1
2
Wiring Diagram 13
9-pin Term. 15-pin
D-sub
(male)
9
RS-485
Signal B
3 9
11
RD+
SD+
D-sub
8 = do not use (male) 15 = do not use
7 = do not use 14 = do not use
3
1 = Logic Com 6 = +5 VDC 15
6 = do not use 13 = Termination
4
2 = Logic Com RS-485 8 10 RD–
7 = +24 VDC Signal A 5 = Logic GND 12 = SD– (RS485)
3 = RS485 Sig B 8 = RS485 Sig A 12
4 = do not use SD– 4 = do not use 11 = SD+ (RS485)
9 = do not use Logic 5 5 3 = do not use 10 = RD– (RS485)
5 = Logic Com 1 Common

5
2 = do not use 1 9 = RD+ (RS485)
shield 1 1 = Frame GND
Note: Use the above wiring diagram to make your own cable. We recommend AutomationDirect L19954 shielded cable or equivalent.

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
6-31
 Chapter
Maintenance
7
In This Chapter...
Project Backup............................................................................................................ 7–2
Check Operating Environment................................................................................... 7–2
Check Operating Voltage........................................................................................... 7–2
Check Status Indicators.............................................................................................. 7–2
Check Physical Conditions.......................................................................................... 7–3
Run Tests under System Setup Screens..................................................................... 7–3
Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens...................................................... 7–4
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast............................................................ 7–4
Check Error Log via System Setup Screens............................................................... 7–4
Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens.......................................................... 7–4
Replace Battery Periodically....................................................................................... 7–5
Cleaning the Display Screen...................................................................................... 7–5
Check Project Functionality........................................................................................ 7–6
Checks from C-more Programming Software............................................................ 7–6
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Maintenance
1 Although the C-more touch panels require very little maintenance, setting up a routine
maintenance schedule will insure the longevity of the product in your application.
2 The following are some suggestions of items to include in a preventive maintenance list or
schedule. Most of these items should be scheduled quarterly or bi-annually.

3 Project Backup
• During a routine preventive maintenance schedule is a good time to make sure that there is
4 an up-to-date backup of the application project. Although the C-more touch panel with its
programming software has the ability to upload the complete project from a panel through
5 the programming software, insurance is warranted just in case the worse case scenario happens
and the entire touch panel is destroyed.
Check Operating Environment
6 • Make sure the touch panel is operating in the proper temperature range:
(0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)).
7 • Make sure the touch panel is operating within the specified humidity range:
(10–85% RH, non-condensing).
8 • Make sure the operating environment is free of corrosive gasses. CORROSIVE

Check Operating Voltage

9 • Check the input voltage that is powering the touch panel to make sure it is within the
appropriate range.
10 DC: If the panel is being powered with a DC power source, then the acceptable range is
20.4 to 28.8 VDC. (24 VDC, -15%, +20%, minimum of 1.5 A)
11 AC: If the panel is being powered from an AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC, then the
acceptable input voltage range to the adapter is 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz.
12 Check Status Indicators
• During a routine maintenance check is a good time to take a quick look at the status indicators
13 on the rear of the touch panel. The Power LED (PWR) indicator should be on and there
should be activity on the TxD and RxD LED indicators when connected serially to a PLC or
14 control device. Check the status of the CPU LED and compare it to the chart shown in the
illustration below. Any indication of the CPU LED other than a solid green shows there is a
C-more
possible problem, and LED Status
the condition Indicators
needs to be corrected.
A Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On

B Off
Green
Power Off
Normal – CPU Run State
PWR

CPU
Off Power Off

TxD

C Red
Blinking
Red
Memory Error
Operating System not found
BATT
RxD

Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

Blinking
LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
D
Orange IOlOl–PLC
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View

®
7-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Check Physical Conditions

• Make sure that harmful chemicals are not being used around the panel. Look for any
deterioration of the touch panel’s bezel and front display area. See Chapter 2: Specifications 1
for a chemical compatibility list.
• Check the mounting gasket to make sure it is sealing properly and 2
has not deteriorated. Replace the mounting gasket if there are any
signs of deterioration, or if there is any evidence that moisture/
liquids have penetrated to the inside of the enclosure where the
3
panel is mounted. Information on a replacement gaskets can be
found in Chapter 9: Replacement Parts.
p/n EA-10-GSK
4
• Check to make sure that none of the cooling vents around the inside section of the touch
panel are clogged with dust or debris. Also make sure that there is clearance around the touch
panel as shown in Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring.
5
Run Tests under System Setup Screens 6
• Use the touch panel’s System Setup Screens to test the touch
7
Test Menu

screen, display, communication ports, beeper and audio output Test Touch Panel Test Display

(only with external amplifier and speaker(s) connected). See

Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional details for the
Test Menu. Test Comm. Port Test Beep/Sound 8
 Test Touch Panel - allows the user to check the analog
touch function of the screen by drawing free hand lines and Main Menu
9
shapes across the entire touch area. The display will retain
the lines where the screen has been touched until the Cancel 10
button is pressed.
Test Display - used to test the display and color rendition. A test pattern will first
show both the primary colors (if applicable) and a gray scale. If the touch screen is not
11
pressed within a few seconds, the display will go into alternating color sweeps across the
screen until the panel is pressed again. If the screen is pressed when the test pattern first 12
appears, it will stay in this mode until the Cancel button is pressed.
 Test Comm. Port - used to test the functionality of both the 15-pin PLC communication 13
serial port and the Ethernet port (non -R models only). A loop-back connector can be
fabricated and used on the 15-pin serial port to test both the RS-232 and RS-422/485
communications for the TxD and RxD signals and also the RTS and CTS signals if
14
applicable. The Test Comm. Port setup screen and Chapter 5 show pin-outs for the
both the RS-232 and RS-422/485 loop-back connectors. The Ethernet connection can A
also be tested for communications if it is at least connected to an Ethernet hub or switch.
If the touch panel is connected to a PLC, then an inquiry test can also be done to test
the communications between the panel and the PLC. Press the Cancel button when
B

finished to return to the Test Menu screen.
Test Beeper/Sound - used to test the touch panel’s internal beeper and also test the
C
audio line output port with an external amplifier and speaker(s) connected. Testing the
audio output is done by playing an included internal WAV file. Press the Cancel button D
when finished to return to the Test Menu screen.

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
7-3
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Check Memory Usage via System Setup Screens

• A good time to check and record the touch panel’s memory
1 usage for future reference is during a routine maintenance
schedule. The various memory devices being used by the panel
2 are listed under the tab. This includes the SRAM, Built-in
Flash and any external memory device such as a USB pen
drive or CompactFlash memory. If no external memory device
3 is inserted, it will not show up on the list. The amount of
total, used and free memory is shown. The memory usage
4 can be viewed by use of the panel’s System Setup Screen’s
Main Menu, and then selecting the Information button. Look
under the Memory tab. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens
5 for additional details on using the Memory tab.

6 Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast

• Is is good practice to occasionally check the display brightness
7 or contrast and adjust as required. This is done by using the
Setting Menu in the System Setup Screens. Keep in mind
that only the contrast can be adjusted on the STN type display
8 models and only the brightness can be adjusted on the TFT
type display models. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for
9 additional details.

Check Error Log via System Setup Screens

10 • Another good practice is to review the touch panel’s Error
Log. The log can be viewed by use of the panel’s System Setup
11 Screen’s Main Menu, and then selecting the Information
button. Look under the Error tab. See Chapter 5: System
Setup Screens for additional details on using the Error tab,
12 Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes for a list of the error
codes as they relate to the specific PLC that is being used
13 with a description of the error, and Appendix B:Touch Panel
Runtime Errors for a list of errors that may occur when the
panel is in operation.
14 Adjust Touch Panel via System Setup Screens
A • It is recommended that a regularly scheduled maintenance
program include adjusting the touch panel. The adjustment
can be looked at as “calibrating” the touch area of the panel.
B The procedure should also be done anytime that it seems the
touch area being pressed for an object is out of position by a
C small amount. The procedure is done by using the Setting
Menu in the System Setup Screens and then selecting the
Adjust Touch Panel button. See Chapter 5: System Setup
D Screens for additional details.

®
7-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Replace Battery Periodically

• The lithium battery in the touch panel is used to maintain the system SRAM
retentive memory and the CPU date/time registers when the unit is without 1
external power. Before replacing the battery, back-up the data in your SRAM
retentive memory as a precaution. Input power needs to be maintained
to the panel during battery replacement or the SRAM retentive memory
2
and date/time registers will be cleared. Typical battery life is five years,
which includes panel runtime and normal shutdown periods. The battery’s 3
status can be checked under the General tab of the Information screen of D2-BAT-1
the System Setup Screens, see Chapter 5. However, consider installing a
fresh battery if your battery has not been replaced recently and the unit
4
will be without power for a period of more than ten days. A replacement
battery can be purchased from AutomationDirect as part number D2-BAT-1 5
(#CR2354).
CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated.
6
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate. Replace battery with
AutomationDirect part number D2-BAT-1 or CR2354 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of
fire or explosion. Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
7
Perchlorate Material, special disposal handling may apply
8
Cleaning the Display Screen 9
• The display screen should be cleaned periodically by wiping
it with a lint free damp cloth using a mild soap solution.
Dry the surface when finished with a lint free cloth. Do not
10
clean with ammonia based products. The ABS material the
bezel is made from is reactive with ammonia. 11
• The longevity of the display can be increased by the use of
a non-glare screen protector, p/n EA-XX-COV2, where XX
EA-6-COV2
12
= touch panel screen size, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 15. See Chapter
3: Accessories for additional information on the screen
protectors.
13
• To prevent damage to the display screen, avoid touching the screen with sharp objects,
striking the screen with a hard object, the use of abrasives near the screen, or using excessive 14
force when pressing the touch screen. In the event that the touch screen membrane becomes
damaged or scratched, the bezel, which includes the clear membrane window, can be replaced A
on the 8”, 10”, 12” and 15” touch panels. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional
information on the replacement bezels. The bezel with clear membrane window can be
replaced on the 6” touch panels by calling our technical support department at 770-844-4200
B
to make arrangements for returning the unit for repair.
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
7-5
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Check Project Functionality

• During a routine maintenance schedule is a good time to check the functionality of your
1 application, making sure that various areas on different screens do what they were designed
to do. An outline or specification for the application is a useful tool for testing the various
2 aspects of your application. As a starting point, you may want to run through all the screens
to make sure they are accessible.

3 • If there are any trouble-shooting procedures built into the touch panel application, now is a
good time to also check these aids.

4 Checks from C-more Programming Software

• If you have a PC available with the C-more programming software, EA-PGMSW, installed,
5 and the PC is connected to the touch panel, there are checks you can make to the status of the
touch panel by using the Panel Information... feature located under the Main Menu heading
Panel. This includes the following:
6 • Connect Panel Information
• Memory availability and usage
7 • Power Voltage
• Battery Voltage:
• Revisions
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C • Other functions that can be accessed from the programming software directly to the touch
panel include: Display Screen, Reboot, Adjust Clock, Memory Clear, and Update Firmware.
D Additional information for these functions can be found in the C-more programming software
on-line help.

®
7-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 7: Maintenance

Notes:
_____________________________________________________________ 1
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 2
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 3
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 4
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
5
_____________________________________________________________ 6
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 7
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 8
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 9
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 10
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 11
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ 12
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
13
_____________________________________________________________ 14
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ A
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________ B
____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________ C
____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________ D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
7-7
 Chapter
Troubleshooting
8
In This Chapter...
Common Problems..................................................................................................... 8–2
Toubleshooting Flow Chart........................................................................................ 8–3
Touch Panel does not Power up................................................................................ 8–4
Display is Blank........................................................................................................... 8–5
Display is Dim............................................................................................................. 8–6
No User Program........................................................................................................ 8–7
No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via USB............ 8–8
USB Driver Troubleshooting.................................................................................... 8–10
No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via Ethernet.. 8–12
No Communications between Panel and PLC......................................................... 8–16
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0.............................................. 8–19
Difficulty Connecting to the Panel over the Internet
(Web server and Remote Access features).............................................................. 8–20
PLC Protocol Error Codes......................................................................................... 8–21
Touch Panel Runtime Errors..................................................................................... 8–22
Panel Constantly Displays “Initializing” when Powering up.................................. 8–23
Data not Logging Problems..................................................................................... 8–23
Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data.................................................................... 8–24
Electrical Noise Problems......................................................................................... 8–24
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

The following topics are some of the more likely problems that may be encountered during
the installation and operation of your C-more touch panel. We have made some suggestions
1 on what to check in order to correct the problem. Please start with the troubleshooting
flow chart that covers the more common problems encountered by other users.
2 Common Problems
3 The troubleshooting flow chart shown on the following page is based on the more common
problems fielded by our technical support team. If you are having problems, please start with
the flow chart, follow the suggestions listed, and if you still need help, call our tech support
4 team @ 770-844-4200. In addition to having ready the information suggested in the flow
chart, please have the following available:
5 1) C -more touch panel part number including serial number with date code. See page 1-5 in
this hardware user manual for an explanation of the part number, serial number, and date
code breakdown. Why is this information important? The various sizes of the touch panel
6 use different processors and memory sizes, and therefore can have different types of problems
within the particular panel size.
7 2) Programming software version that you are currently using. For example: Version 2.20
(Please note that software versions 2.0.7.35 and before will also have a build number such
8 as 2.0 Build 07.35). Having the software version number will allow our tech support team
member to assess whether there are similar problems that have been reported when using the
same version of the software. The programming software version can be found by clicking
9 on “About C-more Programming Software...” selection under the Help pull down menu
in the software. Also, it is always a good practice to visit the Software/Firmware Downloads
10 area under the Tech Support section of the AutomationDirect website and check to see if
you are using the latest version of the programming software. If you aren’t using the latest
11 software version, we suggest that you upgrade to see if this resolves your problem.
Note: The “About C-more Programming Software...” dialog box will show a Firmware version on the
12 newer releases of the programming software. This is the current firmware version that is included with the
programming software and does not reflect what firmware is actually loaded on your C-more touch panel.
See the following for details on how to check the firmware version.
13 3) Firmware version of the C-more touch panel. For example: 2.0 Build 07.32 or 2.0.07.32.
14 The firmware version can be checked by using the System Setup Screens, going to the
Information menu under the Main Menu, and looking under the General tab for Firmware:
-Runtime. The firmware version can also be checked by using the programming software,
A while connected to the panel, and clicking on the Panel Information selection under the
Panel pull down menu. As with the programming software version, it is important for our
B tech support associates to know which firmware version you are using so they can check
on any known problems. As with the programming software, we strongly suggest that the
firmware be updated to the latest version. Check for the latest version and downlaod from
C the Software/Firmware Downloads area of the AutomationDirect website.
It is also helpful to have a copy of your project file for our tech support associates to use in
D troubleshooting a problem, so please be prepared to forward a copy of your project if it is
requested.

®
8-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Toubleshooting Flow Chart

START Try the following:
1) Check for proper grounding on panel and PC.
1
2) Go to section “No Communications between Panel and PC”.
3) PC connected to panel via USB:
a) If using USB Hubs, disconnect all hubs and other USB devices,
2
but leave USB keyboard and mouse connected.
PC Comm
Issue?
Yes
b) Check in the Window’s device manager to see if the C-more panel’s
USB connection shows up when physically connected.
3
4) PC connected to panel via Ethernet:
No
a) Check to make sure the cable is properly connected to the correct
port on the PC and panel.
4
If the above steps did not resolve the problem, then contact our tech support
team with the information listed on the previous page plus the following:
a) Description of the network to which the C-more panel is connected.
5
b) Isolated Network or Office/Plant Network?
6
Try the following:
1) Check for proper DC power connection & grounding on panel & PLC. 7
2) Go to section “No Communications between Panel and PLC”
PLC Comm
Issue?
Yes 3) Go to section “IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0”
If the above steps did not resolve the problem, then contact our tech support 8
team with the information listed on the previous page plus the following:
No a) PLC make and model? PLC firmware version?
b) Serial or Ethernet? If serial, RS-232/422/485?
c) PLC protocol being used, and PLC comm port being used?
9
d) Cable purchased from ADC or constructed by user?
Having the PLC and C-more project files available to email to tech support
always helps in the troubleshooting process.
10
11
Try the following:
1) White screen? Make sure a project is loaded into the panel.
2) Black Screen? Check the PWR LED to make sure it is Steady Green.
12
3) Go to section “Touch Panel does not Power up”
Blank
or Dim
Yes 4) Go to section “Display is Blank”
5) Go to section ”Display is Dim”
13
Screen?
No
6) Check CPU LED:
a) Green - OK 14
b) Off - No Power
c) Red - Memory Error - Cycle power to the panel. If problem persists,
replace panel A
d) Blinking Red - Watchdog Timer Error - cycle power, update firmware
e) Blinking Orange - Operating System Error, update firmware
f) Blinking Green - Power Loss Detection - check voltage at power source.
B
If the above steps did not resolve the problem, then contact our tech
Look at the table of contents
for this chapter to see if your
support team with the information listed in this manual. C
particular problem is listed,
else call our tech support
team @ 770-844-4200.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-3
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Touch Panel does not Power up

1.) Check the status indicators on the rear of the panel to see if the Power LED (Green)
1 indicator is on. Reference the diagram shown below. If the Power LED (Green) indicator
is on and the panel was observed showing “Initializing...” during power up, but the display
2 is now blank, go to the next troubleshooting tip, Display is Blank.
2.) If the Power LED (Green) indicator is off and the panel is being powered with a 24 VDC
3 power source, use a voltmeter to check the incoming DC voltage level. The DC voltage level
should be in the range of 20.4 to 28.8 VDC. If the incoming DC voltage is zero, check any
fusing that may be in the circuit. If the fuse is open, determine cause and replace. If the DC
4 voltage level is out of range, the DC power source needs to be corrected or replaced.
3.) If the Power LED (Green) indicator is off and the panel is being powered with an AC/DC
5 Power Adapter, EA-AC, use a voltmeter to check the incoming AC power. The AC voltage
to the AC/DC Power Adapter should be in the range of 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz. If
6 the incoming AC voltage is zero, check any fusing that may be in the circuit. If the fuse is
open, determine cause and replace. If proper AC voltage is present on the AC/DC Power
Adapter, but the Power LED (Green) indicator is off, replace the AC/DC Power Adapter,
7 EA-AC.

8 C-more LED Status Indicators

Power LED (Green)
9 CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red) On Power On
Off Power Off Off Power Off
10
PWR

Green Normal – CPU Run State CPU

TxD
Red Memory Error RxD

11 Blinking
Red
Blinking
Operating System not found
BATT

Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)

Orange LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
12 Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection
IOlOl–PLC

Off No communication
Rear View
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
8-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Display is Blank
1.) Touch the screen to make sure the panel is not in the Screen Saver mode.
• The Screen Saver will be turned off and the panel screen will display: 1
– If a PLC Address is configured to control the Screen Saver and changes from On to Off.
– When the panel touchscreen is touched. 2
– When the screen is clicked by Remote.
– When the Alarm Event of the Event Manager occurs. (Only when the Display setting of the
Alarm Event is checked). 3
– When there is a screen change by the PLC.
– When an Error such as a Communication Error occurs. 4
2.) If the panel is not in Screen Saver mode, check the status indicators on the rear of the panel.
C-more LED Status Indicators 5
Power LED (Green)
CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red)
Off
Green
Power Off
Normal – CPU Run State
PWR

CPU
On
Off
Power On
Power Off 6
TxD

7
Red Memory Error RxD
BATT
Blinking Operating System not found
Red Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)
Blinking
Orange LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
IOlOl–PLC
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View
8
• The Power LED (Green) should be on. If not, check the incoming power as explained in the “Touch
Panel does not Power Up” section.
• Make sure the CPU status LED (Green, Orange, Red) is a steady Green.
9
• A blinking Orange colored CPU status LED indicates a failed LCD display backlight. The backlights
are user replaceable on the 8”, 10”, 12” and 15” C-more touch panels with LCD display backlights. 10
LED display backlights are not user replaceable. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional
information on replacement backlights.
• If the CPU status LED is blinking Green, then the supply voltage is below 19.2 VDC, or below
11
100 VAC when using the optional C-more AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC. The backlight will turn
off immediately to extend the power retention period. The panel will continue to run and the LCD 12
display will be slightly visible. This may be seen as the display being dim, so it is advisable to check
the incoming voltage. The panel does not turn off until the DC voltage drops below 5 VDC or below
58 VAC when using the AC/DC Power Adapter, EA-AC.
13
• A blinking Red CPU status LED indicates that the operating system could not be found. Reload
the firmware to the touch panel. If this does not resolve the problem, contact the AutomationDirect 14
returns department @ 1-800-633-0405 to make arrangements for returning the unit for repair.
Display is Blank continued on next page. A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-5
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

3.) There is always the remote possibility that a project has been transferred to the touch panel
that includes a screen that uses a black background and has no objects placed on the screen.
1 To check for this possibility, access the Main Menu of the touch panel System Setup
Screens by pressing the extreme upper left corner of the panel display area for three (3)
2 seconds as shown below. If the System Setup Screen’s Main Menu is displayed, then most
likely an empty black background screen is being displayed.

3 Information
MAIN MENU

Setting

4 Test Menu Memory

5
Exit

6
7
Display is Dim
8 1.) Check either the contrast or brightness setting found under the System Setup Screens. Keep
in mind that the STN type display models can have the contrast adjusted. The TFT type
9 display models can have the brightness adjusted. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for
additional information.
10
11
12
13
14
A 2.) Backlights will slowly lose some luminance causing the display to slightly dim. The
backlight average lifetime is rated at 50,000 hours and is defined as the average usage
time it takes before the brightness becomes 50% of the initial brightness. The lifetime of
B the backlight depends on the ambient temperature; the lifetime decreases in low or high
temperatures. To improve the backlight life, use the Start Screen Saver function that is
C available in the C-more Programming Software in the Panel Manager dialog box. The
backlights are user replaceable on the 8”, 10”, 12” and 15” C-more touch panels with
LCD display backlights. LED display backlights are not user replaceable. See Chapter 9:
D Replacement Parts for additional information on the replacement backlights.
Display is Dim continued on next page.

®
8-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

• The Screen Saver will be turned off and the panel screen will display:
– If a PLC Address is configured to control the Screen Saver and changes from On to Off.


– When the panel touchscreen is touched.
– When the screen is clicked by Remote.
1
– When the Alarm Event of the Event Manager occurs. (Only when the Display setting of the
Alarm Event is checked). 2
– When there is a screen change by the PLC.
– When an Error such as a Communication Error occurs. 3
3.) Another condition that may make the display appear dim is to view the touch panel in direct
sunlight or in a location where direct light is reflected onto the display. The C-more touch
panel displays have Display Brightness ratings of 150 to 300 cd/m2 (NITS), depending on
4
the particular model. The higher the cd/m2 (NITS) rating, the more visible the display will
be under bright lighting conditions. 5
No User Program 6
7
8
NO USER PROGRAM
9
10
11
12
If the touch screen is displaying the message “No User Program” after it has powered up, then
either:
– the built-in Flash memory does not contain a recognized project, or
13
– a CompactFlash memory card is plugged into the CF1 slot and there is no project on the
CompactFlash memory card. Turn the power off, remove the CompactFlash memory card and
14
turn the power back on.
Keep in mind that on power up, the touch panel will either copy the project from its internal A
Flash memory to its internal SDRAM memory and run the project, or if a CompactFlash
memory card is plugged into the CF1 slot, then any project contained on the CF memory card
will be copied to the panel’s internal SDRAM memory and be run. In other words, the memory
B
of a CompactFlash card on CF1 will override the panel’s internal Flash memory on power up
or reboot, even if the CompactFlash memory card does not contain a project. C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-7
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via USB

The C-more touch panel is programmed using the C-more Programming Software,
1 EA-PGMSW. The developed project is transferred from the PC to the touch panel by either a
USB or an Ethernet connection between the two. (Ethernet available on full feature units only.)
2 If using USB, then a USB type AB programming cable, such as p/n USB-CBL-AB15, should
be used to make a connection between the panel’s USB Port, Type B and a USB port on
3 the PC. The C-more Programming Software will install a USB driver on the PC during the
software installation.

4 PC USB Port – Type B

C-more Programming/Download
Touch Panel

5 USB Port –
Type A

USB-CBL-AB15
6
7 If the USB connection to the panel is recognized by the PC, you will hear the Windows device-
recognized-sound when the powered panel is connected to the PC. The driver will appear in
8 the Windows Device Manager as C-more HMI.

9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
8-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via USB

(cont’d)
The C-more software will then identify the USB connection with a green indicator. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
This Communication indicator appears on the Panel tab in the Navigation window and in the
Project Transfer or Read from Panel windows. 11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-9
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

USB Driver Troubleshooting

When transferring a project to the panel using the Send Project to Panel function, if the USB
1 radio button in the Step 3 - Project Transfer dialog box, is DIMLY green, then although the
PC recognizes the panel, there is interference in the communication. If a PLC is connected to
2 the serial port of the panel, try disconnecting it. If this corrects the problem, then check your
grounding for the PLC and the panel.

3 Check the USB driver using Windows Device Manager:

4 With the C-more panel connected to the PC, on the PC, open Control Panel--> System
-->Hardware tab --> Device manager. Next expand “Universal Serial Bus controllers”.
The C-more driver is named C-more HMI as shown below:
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
If the C-more programming software Communication Config dialog USB indicator is red, and
13 the driver does not appear in Device Manager,
1) Unplug both end of the cable and replug them in.
14 2) If that does not establish communication, plug into a different USB port on the PC.
3) If there are any USB hubs or other devices being used, temporarily eliminate them to see if this
A solves the problem.
4) Reinstall the C-more HMI USB driver.
B
C
D
®
8-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

USB Driver Troubleshooting (cont’d)

The C-more USB driver installation utility is bundled with the C-more software installation
files. If you have a C-more software CD, the file is in the root, called C-moreUSBDriver.exe. 1
If you downloaded the software, when you extracted the files, the C-moreUSBDriver.exe
was extracted to the location you chose. First, close the C-more software and disconnect the 2
USB cable from the PC. Then, browse to C-moreUSBDriver.exe and run it.
3
If your OS is Windows XP, You will get this warning :
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Click Continue Anyway and InstallShield will install the driver. Click Finish in the Update
Complete window. 11
Plug the USB cable into the PC and the C-more panel.
The Found New Hardware Wizard will prompt you to search for the driver. Select “No not 12
this time” , click Next. Select “Install the Software automatically (Recommended)” click
Next. Click Continue Anyway in the Windows Logo warning popup. Click Finish. 13
Open the project in the C-more software. The Communication Config (and Transfer
Project) USB indicator should be green.
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-11
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) via Ethernet

 hen using an Ethernet connection to communicate between the touch panel and the PC and
W
1 the communications does not seem to be working, the first area to check is the Ethernet status
indicators located next to the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Port on the rear of the panel. The Link
2 Status LED must be displaying a Steady Green.
1 8
Link Status LED (Green) Network Activity LED (Orange)

3 On
Off
Ethernet Linked
No Ethernet Comm.
On
Off
Active Network Data
Network Idle

If using an Ethernet connection to program the touch panel, there are two basic ways to make
4 the connection. You can use a “crossover” Ethernet cable to make a direct connection between
Ethernet
C-more
5 PC
Touch Panel
Port

6 Ethernet
Port Ethernet CAT5
(Bottom View)

Cable - Crossover

7
8 the touch panel and the PC or a “straight-thru” Ethernet cable from the touch panel to a hub,
switch, etc. that is also connected to the PC.
9 Stride™
Ethernet Switch
10/100 Base-T
10 (such as SE-SW5U)

11 1
C-more
Touch Panel Ethernet
Port

12 PC

13 Ethernet
Port
(Bottom View)

14 Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

A Use the C-more programming software to check the status of the Ethernet communications.
From the Navigation window, select the Panel tab. At the bottom of the Panel tab is the
B Communication Config dialog box. Select the Browse button. If the connection is working the
panel will be listed in the online link list. Select the panel and then select OK. If the Ethernet
C communications to the panel is working, then the Ethernet radio button should be checked
and there should be a “green” indicator next to the Ethernet selection. There should also be
an IP Address shown in the browse box below the Ethernet selection. If the Ethernet radio
D button is “red”, then you will need to check your Ethernet cables and connections or Browse
for the panel.

®
8-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (cont’d)

There can also be a conflict with another Ethernet connection that may be using the same
IP Address. You may want to check the setup both in the touch panel and also in your PC. 1
As a starting point, it is best to start with an assigned IP Address and Subnet mask, mainly to
eliminate IP addressing conflicts. Use the C-more programming software and open the Touch
Panel Network dialog box under the Main Menu’s Setup drop down menu. Click on the
2
Ethernet Port tab to display the dialog box used to set up the touch panel’s Ethernet port.
Another cause of an Ethernet communications problem that may be encountered, is the touch
3
panel doesn’t show up in the node list, which can be caused by the PC having a firewall.
The figure below shows the Touch Panel Network dialog box with the Ethernet port tab 4
opened. The Save settings to Project check box is checked and we are using the Use the
following IP Address selection by checking its radio button. The subnet (192.168.X.X) and
the subnet mask (255.255.0.0) must be the same for both the panel and the PC. See the
5
C-more programming software on-line help for additional details regarding the Touch Panel
Network. 6
7
8
9
10
In the example shown here,
the subnet is 192.168.X.X, the
subnet mask is 255.255.0.0,
11
and both need to be the same
for all the Ethernet devices
connected together.
12
13
14
The IP Address assigned to the touch panel can
also be checked or edited by using the system setup
screens built into the touch panel. See Chapter 5:
A
System Setup Screens for additional information.
The figure below shows a different example of the
B
panel’s System Setup Screens’ Ethernet Port dialog
box for configuring the Ethernet port. Again, make C
sure the subnet (172.22.X.X) and subnet mask
(255.255.0.0) is the same for both the panel and the
PC.
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-13
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (cont’d)

Another option for accessing the IP Address assigned to the touch panel is to use the C-more
1 Programming Software. Open the Navigation window’s Panel tab and click on the Browse
button under the Communication window at the bottom. This will open the Ethernet
2 Connection Setup window. The Online Link List tab will show all of the connected panels.
If none are shown, try clicking the Browse Network button to search for attached devices.
Double click on the Panel Name you want to access and this will bring up the Change IP
3 Address window. In this window changes can be made to the panel’s name, IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
8-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PC (Personal Computer) (cont’d)

Check the IP Address setting of the PC by opening the Windows operating system’s Control
Panel and then selecting the Network Connections utility. Click on Properties, scroll down to 1
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
dialog box will open. Again, make sure the Subnet Mask is set the same for both the panel and
the PC and also make sure that the IP Addresses do not conflict.
2
Note: If a DHCP Server is being used to obtain
the IP Address for the PC, there are ways to
3
identify the IP Address. For example, if using
Windows XP, open a Command Prompt (Run
> CMD) and type IPCONFIG /ALL. A list of all
4
Ethernet assignments for the PC will be shown.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-15
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC

The communications between the C-more touch panel and designated PLC or controlling device
1 can be accomplished by either a serial connection to the panel’s 15-pin PLC Communications
Port or by an Ethernet connection to the panel’s 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Port. (Ethernet
2 available on full feature units only.)
1.) If the touch panel and PLC are connected serially and the communications have seemed to
3 stop working, then first check the TxD and RxD status indicators on the rear of the panel
for activity.

4 C-more
Touch Panel
DL-06 PLC
5
6 C-more to
Direct LOGIC
VGA 15-pin port
7 Port 2 serial cable
p/n EA-2CBL-1

8
9 If there is no activity on one or both the TxD and RxD status indicators, then it should be
suspected that either:
10 • serial comm port settings are incorrect
• the cable is bad and needs to be replaced
11 • the serial port on the panel is defective
is bad LED Status Indicators
C-more
• the PLC serial port
12 CPU Status LED (Green, Orange & Red)
Power LED (Green)
On Power On

13 Off
Green
Power Off
Normal – CPU Run State
PWR

CPU

TxD
Off Power Off

Red Memory Error

14
RxD
BATT
Blinking Operating System not found
Red Serial TxD/RxD LED (Green)
Blinking
Orange LCD Backlight Failure On Comm. is active
IOlOl–PLC

A
Blinking
Green Power Loss Detection Off No communication
Rear View
The status indicators will show activity whether the serial communications is wired for RS-232
B or RS-422/485.
Electrical noise, pulse generating wiring and/or improper grounding can also cause problems
C with communications. Refer to the Electrical Noise Problems section on page 8-17 for
additional help.
D (Serial connections between the touch panel and PLC continued on next page.)

®
8-16 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (cont’d)

The serial port on the C-more touch panel can be tested using the panel’s system setup screens.
Access the Main Menu of the panel’s system setup screens, press the Test Menu button and 1
then press the Test Comm. Port button. You will need to fabricate a Loop Back Connector
for the type of serial connection that is being used in your application, either RS-232 or
RS-422/485, per the wiring diagrams shown below. Plug the loop back connector into the
2
panel’s 15-pin PLC serial communications port and then press the Loop Back Test button to
run the test. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens for additional information. 3
Loop back connector wiring diagrams: 4
5
RS-232 Loop-back Connector RS-422/485 Loop-back Connector
7 CTS 15-pin D-sub
15-pin D-sub
(male) 8 (male)
RTS
2
3
7
TXD
RXD
15 9
11
RXD+
TXD+
15
6
CTS 10

7
RXD–
8 RTS 1 12 TXD– 1
Wiring Diagram Wiring Diagram

System setup screens Test Comm. Port dialog boxes: 8

9
10
11
12
The PLC Enquiry Test can also be performed to determine if the Ethernet communication is 13
working correctly between the panel and designated PLC .
14
A
B
C
(Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PLC continued on next page.)
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-17
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (cont’d)

2.) If using an Ethernet connection between the touch panel and the PLC, and there is a
1 problem with the communications, the first area to check is the Ethernet status indicators
located next to the 10/100 Base-T Ethernet Port (shown below) on the rear of the panel.
2 Link Status LED (Green)
On Ethernet Linked
1 8
Network Activity LED (Orange)
On Active Network Data

3 Off No Ethernet Comm. Off Network Idle

There are two basic ways to make the connection. You can use a crossover Ethernet cable
4 (shown below) to make a direct connection between the touch panel and the PLC or a
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100 C-more
Ethernet Module Ethernet
Touch Panel
5 Port

6 (Bottom View)

7 DL06 PLC
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Crossover

8 regular Ethernet cable (shown below) from the touch panel to a hub, switch, etc. that is also
9 connected to the PLC.

Stride™

10 Ethernet Switch
10/100 Base-T
(such as SE-SW5U)

11 H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module
1 C-more
Ethernet
Touch Panel Port

12
13 DL06 PLC
(Bottom View)

14
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

Check the status indicators that may be included with the Ethernet communications module
A or device that is part of the PLC. Refer to the PLC’s Ethernet user manual for further
troubleshooting information.
B
(Ethernet connections between the touch panel and PLC continued next page.)
C
D
®
8-18 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

No Communications between Panel and PLC (cont’d)

The Ethernet port on the C-more touch panel can be tested by using the panel’s system setup
screens. Access the Main Menu of the panel’s system setup screens, press the Test Menu button 1
and then press the Test Comm. Port button. Select the Ethernet tab in the Test Comm. Port
dialog box, make sure the Ethernet port is connected to an Ethernet hub or other Ethernet
communications device, and then press the Loop Back Test button to run the test. See Chapter
2
5: System Setup Screens for additional information.
Test Comm. Port
3
Serial

Link
Ethernet

: Online
4
Address : Static PLC Enquiry Test
192.168.100.4
Select PLC:
DEV001
5
DEV001

6
DEV008
DEV009
DEV010
DEV011

Cancel
7
If a PC running the C-more programming software is connected to the Ethernet network that
8
is also connected to both the touch panel and PLC, then certain functions in the software, such
as the Main Menu’s Setup drop down selection for Panel Manager or Touch Panel Network 9
and the Main Menu’s Panel drop down selection for Panel Information, can be used to help
troubleshoot problems with the touch panel’s communications and operation. See the C-more
programming software’s on-line help for additional information.
10
11
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0
Note: If entering an IP Address for the C-more touch panel using the System Setup Screens, and the IP
12
Address keeps displaying 0.0.0.0, even after entering an IP address, the panel is not functionally connected
to an active network. Either the cable, hub, or switch is bad. The entered IP Address is stored in the panel’s
memory, but won’t show up until a good connection is established. Keep in mind that if in the C-more
13
programming software’s Touch Panel Network dialog box, under the Ethernet Port tab, you have checked
the Save settings to Project check box and have entered an IP Address of 0.0.0.0, then anytime the project 14
is transferred to the panel, the panel’s IP Address will be overwritten with the entered address.
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-19
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Difficulty Connecting to the Panel over the Internet (Web server and Remote
Access features)
1 1) Refer to the software help file topics Touch Panel Network and Remote Access
Setup for information on configuring the Remote Access accounts, the Web Server
2 Function and the panel IP Attributes.
2) In the Ethernet Port tab if DHCP is selected for assigning the IP address, verify the
3 currect address of the panel. The IP address assigned by DHCP may change over
time.
4 3) Note that the Web Server Function must be enabled on the Web Server tab before
the Remote Access Server Function can be accessed on the panel.
5 4) Verify that the correct TCP ports have been opened on the router controlling access
to the network where the C-more panel resides.

6 5) If two C-more panels are on a network behind a firewall and they have the same
Remote Access port number, the router will use the first entry in the Port Forwarding
setup that it encounters. The same C-more panel will always come up even if the two
7 panels have two different Web Server Port numbers.
6) When entering the URL in Internet Explorer to connect the C-more web server using
8 a port number other than the default (80), be sure to use the full URL text including
the prefix “http://”. The URL should be http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx:aaaaa where xxx.xxx.
9 xxx.xxx is the IP address of the panel and aaaaa is the port number configured in the
Web Server tab of the Touch Panel Network setting.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
8-20 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

PLC Protocol Error Codes

The C-more touch panel includes built-in PLC communication protocol diagnostics
that monitor the exchange of data between the panel and the PLC. The diagnostics 1
look for the proper exchange of data, correct handshaking signals, addressing errors,
incorrect data bytes, wrong packet format, etc. The diagnostics also monitor and report
any of the errors that the designated PLC would normally generate if there is a problem
2
with the PLC’s communications. Each brand of PLC has its own unique set of diagnostic
errors that are typically communicated over the PLC’s communications port. The PLC 3
generated errors are interpreted by the C-more software. See the PLC manufacturer’s
user manuals for additional details on the designated PLC’s errors. 4
If a C-more communications error does occur, the error message will be displayed in
the upper left of the C-more screen and the Error Code is recorded in the panel’s error
log. If a PLC error occurs, the PLC error code number will appear across the top of the
5
screen, the PLC error message may not be included in some cases. The error log can be
viewed using the system setup screens. See Chapter 5: System Setup Screens under the 6
Information window to bring up the Error tab which includes a description of the logged
data. 7
A detailed list and description of the various PLC protocol errors can be found in
Appendix A: PLC Protocol Error Codes.
8
Error Codes for Direct LOGIC – K-Sequence
9
Error Code Error Message
PLC Communication Timeout (for single
Description
A timeout occurred after sending a request to the PLC
10
PLC) %Device%.
PLC-001 %Device% PLC Communication Timeout
(for multiple PLCs, such as RS-422/485)
%Device% indicates the device name, such as DEV001.
Example error message for multiple PLCs: DEV001 PLC
Communication Timeout
11
PLC-002 NAK received from PLC A negative acknowledgement (NAK) control code has been
generated during a read/write request. 12
PLC-004 STX is not found A Start of Text (STX) control code was not found in the data
packet received from the PLC.
13
PLC Protocol Error Codes example:
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-21
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Touch Panel Runtime Errors

The C-more touch panel includes built-in diagnostics that check for proper operation
1 of the panel when it is running a project that has been transferred to its memory. Faults
detected while the panel is running will produce a “Runtime” error. These errors are
2 displayed in the upper left of the panel’s display and are also recorded in the panel’s
error log. The error log can be viewed using the system setup screens. See Chapter 5:
System Setup Screens under the Information window to bring up the Error tab which
3 includes a description of the logged data.
A detailed list and description of the various touch panel runtime errors can be found in
4 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors.

5
Tag System
Error Error
6 No. Log Error Message
Located at upper left of screen Message Error
Code
Screen
Info > Cause
Code Tag Value Error
7 Log Error

8 1 RTE-001 Log Failed. SYS ERR

Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE 2001
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
The size of the destination
memory is not large
RTE-001 enough to store the data.
9 SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
2 RTE-002 Log Failed.
%Device% cannot be found 2002 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
No device available or
the device is defective.
ERRORCODE
10 RTE-002
Battery
11 SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
The panel’s backup battery
voltage level has fallen
1 RTE-031 Low Battery 2031 below 1.8 VDC and should
ERRORCODE Error Code
12 RTE-031 be replaced.

Touch Panel Runtime Errors example:

13
14
A
B
C
D
®
8-22 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Panel Constantly Displays “Initializing” when Powering up

If the touch panel constantly displays a message reading “Initializing” while powering up, then
check the following possible causes. 1
1.) C -more supports USB 1.0 and 1.1 memory devices.  Ensure that the USB device is 1.0 or
1.1 or backward compatible to support version 1.1 2
2.) The project that is loaded into the panel’s internal SDRAM memory is corrupted. Either
use the C-more programming software to clear the panel’s memory and re-transfer the
project to the touch panel, or press the upper left corner of the touch panel screen while
3
powering up to bypass the project and go directly to the System Setup Screen menu. Select
the Memory menu, and use either the Clear Memory or Set to Factory Default utility to 4
clear the panel’s memory and re-transfer the project to the touch panel.
3.) A CompactFlash memory card has been plugged into the CF1 slot and the CompactFlash 5
either has no project stored on it or the project is corrupted. Remove the CompactFlash
memory card form the CF1 slot and either load the project to the panel’s internal Flash
memory, or use a CF card reader connected to a PC to clear and re-format the CompactFlash
6
card, or try a different CompactFlash memory card.
7
Note: In the Error Log you may find the error RTE-500 - Check Sum Error, which is defined as “Memory in the
panel has been corrupted by power loss, etc.” If this is the case, try cycling power to the panel, re-transfer
the project to the panel, and re-transfer the firmware, etc. in sequential steps to try to correct the problem.
8
Data not Logging Problems 9
If the data log is missing entries, or a Runtime Error for the Log Errors as shown in Appendix
B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors is seen, then check the following possible causes. 10
1.) Check that the memory devices, that were selected for Data Storage under the C-more
programming software’s Main Menu - Setup drop down - Panel Manager dialog box,
are plugged into their proper location. Alarms, messages and screen captures can be
11
independently selected to be saved to either a USB pen drive plugged into the USB Port
- Type A, or a CompactFlash memory card plugged into CF1 or CF2. (Full feature units 12
only.)
2.) The memory device could be bad. If possible, check it by plugging it into a PC that has 13
the ability to access the memory device. Also, not all USB devices are compatible with the
C-more touch panels. Check System Screen, Memory for the presence of the USB device
inserted.
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
8-23
 Chapter 8: Troubleshooting

Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data

If power is cycled to the C-more touch panel and it is then noticed that either
1 the Date/Time of the panel is no longer correct, or any data that has been
setup to be retentive is inaccurate, most likely the backup battery is exhausted
2 and needs to be replaced. See Chapter 9: Replacement Parts for additional
information on replacing the panel’s battery.
D2-BAT-1
3
CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated.
4 Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate. Replace battery with
AutomationDirect part number D2-BAT-1 or CR2354 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of
fire or explosion. Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.
5
Perchlorate Material, special disposal handling may apply
6
Electrical Noise Problems
7 Noise is one of the most difficult problems to diagnose. Electrical noise can enter a system in
many different ways which fall into one of two categories, conducted or radiated. It may be
difficult to determine how the noise is entering the system but the corrective actions for either
8 of the types of noise problems are similar.
• Conducted noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system by way of an attached
9 wire, panel connection, etc. It may enter through a power supply connection, the communication
ground connection, or the chassis ground connection.

10 • Radiated noise is when the electrical interference is introduced into the system without a direct
electrical connection, much in the same manner as radio waves.

11 While electrical noise cannot be eliminated, it can be reduced to a level that will not affect the
system.
• Most noise problems result from improper grounding of the system. A good earth ground can be the
12 single most effective way to correct noise problems. If a ground is not available, install a ground rod
as close to the system as possible. Ensure all ground wires are single point grounds and are not daisy
13 chained from one device to another. Ground metal enclosures around the system. A loose wire can
act as a large antenna, introducing noise into the system. Therefore, tighten all connections in your
system. Loose ground wires are more susceptible to noise than the other wires in your system. Review
14 Chapter 4: Installation & Wiring if you have questions regarding how to ground the touch panel.
• Electrical noise can enter the system through the power source for the touch panel. Installing a
A properly wired isolation transformer (neutral grounded) for all AC sources can help the problem, but
only if wired correctly. DC sources should be well-grounded good quality supplies.
• Never run communication cables or low-voltage power wiring close to high voltage wiring or pulse
B generating wiring that controls such devices as solenoids, servos, VFOs, etc.

C
D
®
8-24 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter
Replacement Parts
9
In This Chapter...
Replacement Parts Overview..................................................................................... 9–2
Replacement Parts at a Glance.................................................................................. 9–2
Battery Replacement & Installation Instructions....................................................... 9–3
6” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation............................................... 9–5
8-15” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements & Installation.......................................... 9–6
DC Panel Power Connector Replacement................................................................. 9–7
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement............................................................. 9–7
8-15” Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements & Installation ......................................... 9–8
6-15” Panel Gasket Replacement & Installation...................................................... 9–11
8-15” Panel Bezel Replacement & Installation........................................................ 9–12
6” Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement & Installation............................................. 9–14
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Replacement Parts Overview

1 Part Number Description Part Number Description
D2-BAT-1 EA-12-GSK
Battery Replacement 12” Panel Gasket Replacement

2 EA-BRK-1 6” Panel Mounting Clip

EA-10-GSK
Replacements (2 per pk.) 10” Panel Gasket Replacement
8-15” Panel Mounting Clip
EA-BRK-2 EA-8-GSK 8” Panel Gasket Replacement
3 EA-DC-CON EA-6-GSK
Replacements (8 per pk.)
DC Panel Power Connector 6” Panel Gasket Replacement
Replacement

4 EA-AC-CON AC Power Adapter Connector

EA-15-BEZEL
Replacement 15” Panel Bezel Replacement
EA-15-BULB* 15” Panel Backlight Bulb
EA-12-BEZEL 12” Panel Bezel Replacement
5 EA-15-BULB2*
EA-12-BULB*
Replacement
12” Panel Backlight Bulb
EA-10-BEZEL 10” Panel Bezel Replacement
EA-12-BULB2* Replacement
6 EA-10-BULB*
EA-10-BULB2*
10” Panel Backlight Bulb
EA-8-BEZEL
Replacement
8” Panel Bezel Replacement
EA-8-BULB* 8” Panel Backlight Bulb 6” Adapter Plate Gasket
7 EA-8-BULB2* EA-6-ADPTR-GSK
Replacement Replacement
EA-15-GSK 15” Panel Gasket Replacement
8 *Note - See section 8-15” Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements in this chapter for correct replacement bulb.

9 Replacement Parts at a Glance:

Battery:

10 D2-BAT-1
15 inch gasket:
EA-15-GSK
15 inch Bezel:
EA-15-BEZEL
6 inch mounting clips: (gasket not included)

11 EA-BRK-1
(pk of 2)

8 - 15 inch mounting clips:

12 EA-BRK-2
(pk of 8)
12 inch gasket:
12 inch Bezel:
EA-12-BEZEL
DC power connector: EA-12-GSK (gasket not included)

13 EA-DC-CON

AC power connector:

14 EA-AC-CON

10 inch gasket:
10 inch Bezel:
EA-10-BEZEL
(gasket not included)
EA-10-GSK
15 inch backlight:

A EA-15-BULB
EA-15-BULB2
8 inch Bezel:
EA-8-BEZEL

B 12 inch backlight:
EA-12-BULB
EA-12-BULB2
8 inch gasket:
EA-8-GSK
(gasket not included)

Note: 6 inch bezel is

C 10 inch backlight:
EA-10-BULB
not user replaceable.

EA-10-BULB2 6 inch Adapter Plate

D 8 inch backlight:
EA-8-BULB
6 inch gasket:
EA-6-GSK
replacement gasket
EA-6-ADPTR-GSK
EA-8-BULB2

®
9-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Battery Replacement – D2-BAT-1

CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate. Replace battery with
1
AutomationDirect part number D2-BAT-1 or CR2354 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of
fire or explosion. Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children. 2
Perchlorate Material, special disposal handling may apply 3
The C-more touch panels are supplied with a SRAM retentive memory backup battery that also
is used to backup the internal CPU date/time registers. The battery should be replaced every 5
4
years or during any routine maintenance to the touch panel. As a note, the battery used in the
C-more touch panels is the same battery that is used for backup in AutomationDirect’s DL06, 5
D2-250(-1), D2-260 and D3-350 PLCs.
6
Battery Replacement Instructions:
NOTE: The lithium battery in your panel is used to maintain the system SRAM retentive memory and the CPU
7
date/time registers when the unit is without external power. Before replacing the battery, back-up the data in
your SRAM retentive memory as a precaution. Input power needs to be maintained to the panel during battery
replacement. Typical battery life is five years, which includes panel runtime and normal shutdown periods.
8
However, consider installing a fresh battery if your battery has not been replaced recently and the unit will be
without power for a period of more than ten days. 9
Preparation: If the touch panel is not mounted in or has been removed from a control cabinet, then it is recommended the panel be
10
placed face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel. The battery door is located on the rear just below
and to the left of the DC Power Connector.
11
1 DC Power
Connector 2 12
13
14
Battery door
latch tab
A
Open the battery holder door by pressing down on the
upper latch tab while lifting upward and rotating the door in
The coin cell style battery is located in the battery holder. To
remove the battery, use the slot in the top of the holder to
B
a downward motion. The battery door will pivot toward its pry the battery away from the holder and while grasping the
bottom hinge point. battery, lift it upward.
C
Continued on next page. D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-3
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Battery Replacement Instructions (cont’d):

1
2 3 4
3
4 Battery

5 retaining tab

6 Above shows the empty battery holder and also points out
the location of the battery retaining tab for reference in the
To install the battery, hold the battery so that the larger
diameter (+ symbol) is outward. Set the battery to the inside
next step. of the retaining tab and then press the upper top of the

7 battery into the holder.

8 5
9
10
11
12 Press the battery holder door downward until the upper
latch tab locks into place. Make a note of the date the battery
was installed.
13 CAUTION - The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate. Replace battery with
14 AutomationDirect part number D2-BAT-1 or CR2354 only. Use of another battery may present a risk of
fire or explosion. Dispose of used battery properly. Keep away from children.

A Additional precautions:
• Do not short circuit the battery and be sure to make the correct polarity connections.
• Avoid extremely high or low temperatures and high humidity when storing.
B • Do not dismantle the battery.

Perchlorate Material, special disposal handling may apply

C
D
®
9-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements – EA-BRK-1

Spare panel mounting clips for 6 inch C-more touch panels.
Package of 2 clips with 4 screws.
1
2
3
3
4
Installation Instructions
5
1 6
Tighten the mounting screws in an alternating fashion
while observing the front of the touch panel. The goal is to
make sure the front bezel is pulled up against the enclosure
sheet metal uniformly, and the touch panel gasket is fully
7
compressed all the way around its perimeter. Tighten the
screws to a torque rating shown in the table below. Avoid
over-tightening the screws to the point that they start to
8
deform or bend the mounting clip.
9
Position the touch panel through the cutout in the control
cabinet door and hold in place. The mounting clips can be
positioned into one of two different set of slots for different
4 10
cabinet thicknesses. See table below.
11
2 12
13
The above photo shows both mounting clips in place and
the touch panel secured. 14
Touch Enclosure
Thickness Mounting Clip A
Panel Size Screw Torque
Range
The above photo shows one mounting clip in place.
The example is using the lower mounting clip slots that
accommodates an enclosure thickness of 0.039 – 0.24 6”
B
0.039 - 0.24 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
inches [1 – 6 mm]. The upper slots can be used for an lower mounting
enclosure thickness of 0.20 – 0.63 inches [5 – 16 mm]. clip position
[1 – 6 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]
C
6”
upper mounting
clip position
0.20 - 0.63 inch
[5 – 16 mm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm] D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-5
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

8–15” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements– EA-BRK-2

1 Spare panel mounting clips for the 8 inch through 15 inch
C-more touch panels. Package of 8 clips with 8 screws.
2
3
3
4
Installation Instructions
5
1
6
Tighten the mounting screw for each mounting clip in an
7 alternating fashion at all clips while observing the front of
the touch panel. The goal is to make sure the front bezel
is pulled up against the enclosure sheet metal uniformly,
and the touch panel gasket is fully compressed all the way
8 around its perimeter. Tighten the screws to a torque rating
shown in the table below. Avoid over-tightening the screws
to the point that they start to deform or bend the mounting
9 clip.

Position the touch panel through the cutout in the control

10 cabinet door and hold in place. The mounting clips are
positioned into the slots around the outside edge of the 4
touch panel rear.

11
12 2
13
14 The above photo shows all mounting clips in place and
the touch panel secured. The 8”, 10” and 12” touch panels
require 6 mounting clips and the 15” touch panel requires
A 8 mounting clips.

B The mounting clips are positioned into the larger portion of

the slot at two locations, and then slid toward the smaller
portion of the slots to lock them in place. Some slots are
Touch Enclosure
Thickness Mounting Clip
Panel Size Screw Torque
arranged to slide to the left and others to the right. Range
C 6”
0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
upper mounting
D clip position
[5 – 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm]

®
9-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

DC Panel Power Connector Replacement – EA-DC-CON

C-more touch panel 5-position DC power connector terminal block replacement. One (1) DC
Power Connector is supplied with each touch panel.
1
Recommended DC Supply Fuse
2
Panel Size Rating
6“ – 10” 2.5 A
ADC p/n
MDL2-5 3
12“ & 15” 4.0 A MDL4
+
4
24 VDC, -15%, +20%

5
(20.4 - 28.8 VDC)
–
Tightening Torque
Power supply
cable torque
71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm) GND
Equipment
PWR

CPU
6
Ground
NOTE: Use 60 / 75 °C copper
conductors only.
BATT

7
8
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement– EA-AC-CON 9
C-more AC power adapter 3-position AC power connector terminal block replacement.
10
11
12
AC Power Adapter

13
Not recommended for use with the EA7-T15C
when operating temperatures are expected
to be above 40 deg C.

Tightening Torque
Power supply 71 - 85 oz-in (0.5 - 0.6 Nm)
14
cable torque
Mounting flange 57 - 71 oz-in (0.4 - 0.5 Nm)
screw torque Recommended AC Supply Fuse
A
3.0 A time delay, ADC p/n MDL3

NOTE: Use 60 / 75 °C copper

100 - 240 VAC
50/60 Hz B
conductors only.

Power Adapter, EA-AC.

One (1) AC Power Connector is supplied with each AC/DC
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-7
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

8-15” Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements

1 Backlight assembly, customer replaceable,  for C-more 8”, 10”, 12”
and 15” touch panels. The 8”, 10” and 15” touch panels use two
2 bulbs per panel and the 12” touch panels use one bulb per panel.
The bulbs are packaged two per box for the 8”, 10” and 15” touch
panels and one per box for the 12” touch panels.
3
4
C-more Replacement Bulbs
5 C-more Model Bulb Model C-more Serial Number
EA-8-BULB EA7-T8C+10Z15B020 and older

6 EA7-T8C EA-8-BULB2
Non-Replaceable LED
EA7-T8C+10Z15B021 thru EA7-T8C+12Y25B070
EA7-T8C+12Y25B071 and newer

7 EA7-T10C EA-10-BULB
EA-10-BULB2
EA7-T10C+10Z11B080 and older
EA7-T10C+10Z11B081 thru EA7-T10C+12Y29B120
Non-Replaceable LED
8 EA-12-BULB
EA7-T10C+12Y29B121 and newer
EA7-T12C+10Z29B019 and older
EA7-T12C EA-12-BULB2 EA7-T12C+10Z29B020 thru EA7-T12C+14102B060
9 Non-Replaceable LED EA7-T12C+14102B061 and newer
EA-15-BULB EA7-T15C+10Z22B120 and older
10 EA7-T15C EA-15-BULB2 EA7-T15C+10Z22B121 thru EA7-T15C+14111B000
Non-Replaceable LED EA7-T15C+14111B001 and newer

11 Serial Number = [Part Number]+[YYMDDFNNN]

YY: Year (05–99 --- e.g. 05 = 2005)

12 M:
DD:
F:
NNN:
Month (1–9, X, Y, Z --- e.g. X = Oct.)
Day (1–31)
Manufacturing Site (0–9, A–Z)
Sequence number for the date listed (000–999)

13 Date Code =
Y:
MM:
YMMF
Year (0–9 --- e.g. 07 = 2007)
Month (01–12 --- e.g. X = Oct.)
F: Manufacturing Site (0–9, A–Z)

14
Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example:
A (See the Data Sheet insert for the specific backlight bulb that is being replaced for more detailed
information.)
B W : This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
arning
working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage from static electricity
C discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding. Be careful not to pinch the
ribbon cable between the housing and bezel when re-assembling the panel.

D Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.
Continued on next page.

®
9-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example:

1 2
Ribbon cable
recess
1
2
3
4
With power disconnected, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver Lift the touch panel’s main electronics housing from the
5
to remove the four outer screws holding the touch panel’s front bezel. Set the front bezel and four screws to the side.
main electronics housing to the front bezel. Observe the ribbon cable recess on the front bezel (see
detail) for use in re-assembling the panel. 6
Upper & lower backlight
3 bulb connectors 4 7
8
9
10
Place the touch panel’s main electronics housing facing up
on a lint-free soft surface. Position the housing so that the
Carefully lift the bulb’s wires out of the wire guides so they
are free from obstructions. Do this for both the upper and
11
backlight bulb connectors are in plain view. lower backlight bulbs.

Bulb
12
5 6 retaining clip
13
14
A
B
Unplug the backlight bulb’s power cable connector from the Push up on the bulb retaining clip (see detail) while grasping
circuit board connector. Again, do this for both the upper
and lower backlight bulbs.
the plastic end of the bulb assembly and gently slide the bulb
from its guide. Do this for both bulbs. The bulb is glass and
C
fragile, so handle with care.

Continued on next page.

D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-9
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Backlight Bulb Installation Instructions Example (cont’d):

1 7 8
Note: The two replacement bulbs are
labeled “Upper” and “Lower”. This is because
the bulbs have different cable lengths for
2 reaching the circuit board connector.

3
4
5 This photo shows the backlight bulb completely removed Remove the replacement bulb from its shipping tube and the
from its guide in the panel’s main electronics housing. (Only protective bubble wrap. Note: The replacement bulbs come
6 one bulb shown.) in pairs and should be replaced in pairs for longevity and
maintenance convenience.

7 9 10
8
9
10
11 Position the replacement bulb so that the opening in its Plug each backlight bulb’s power cable connector back into
three-sided gold colored reflector faces toward the LCD its respective circuit board connector.
12 touch screen. Using gentle pressure, slide the bulb into the
guide until the retaining clip locks.

13 11 12
14
A
B
C Gently position each backlight bulb’s wires back into the Position the touch panel’s main electronics housing into the
wire guides. Position any excess wire length in between front bezel so that the flat ribbon cable on the housing aligns
D the printed circuit board and the LCD to prevent it from
becoming pinched between the housing and bezel.
with the recess in the front bezel. Insert the four screws and
tighten to a maximum of 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm].

®
9-10 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6-15” Panel Gasket Replacements – EA-xx-GSK

Replacement NEMA 4/4X touch panel gaskets for C-more 6”,
8”, 10”, 12” and 15” touch panels.
1
(The part number is completed by substituting the panel size,
06, 08, 10, 12 or 15, for the xx shown above.)
2
3
4
5
Gasket Replacement Installation Instructions:
Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean 6
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.
7
1 2 8
9
10
11
Start at one corner and pull the old gasket out of the channel
that holds the gasket in place. Pull the gasket up as you work
Lay the new gasket over the channel so that the long and
short sides of the gasket match up to the long and short
12
around the entire perimeter of the touch panel. Discard the sides of the touch panel. Start at one corner and match the
old gasket. gasket’s corner to the channel’s corner. Press the gasket
into the channel and work all away around the perimeter of
the touch panel. Re-install the touch panel.
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-11
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

8-15” Panel Bezel Replacement – EA-xx-BEZEL

1 The NEMA 4/4X bezels used on the C-more 8”, 10”, 12”
and 15” touch panels can be easily replaced. The replacement
2 bezel includes the clear membrane element that protects the
touch sensitive area. A gasket is not included. The bezel and
membrane element do not require replacement under normal
3 use. In the event that the clear membrane is scratched from the
use of sharp objects or abrasive materials, follow the procedure
4 outlined below to replace the front bezel.
(The part number is completed by substituting the panel size,
5 08, 10, 12 or 15, for the xx shown above.)

6 Note: The bezel on the 6” C-more touch panels is not user replaceable.

7
8 Bezel Replacement Instructions Example:
W : This procedure should only be performed by qualified personnel who are experienced in
arning
9 working with electronic equipment. Take the necessary steps to prevent damage from static electricity
discharge. Disconnect input power to the touch panel before proceeding. Be careful not to pinch the

10 ribbon cable between the housing and bezel when re-assembling the panel.

11 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, then remove the touch panel from the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the panel face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the front of the panel.

12 Ribbon cable

1 2 recess

13
14
A
B With power disconnected, use a #2 Phillips screwdriver Lift the touch panel’s main electronics housing from the
to remove the four outer screws holding the touch panel’s front bezel. Set the four screws to the side and discard the
C main electronics housing to the front bezel. original bezel. Observe the ribbon cable recess on the front
bezel (see detail) for use in re-assembling the panel.

D Continued on next page.

®
9-12 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

Bezel Replacement Instructions Example (cont’d):

1
3 4 2
3
4
5
Place the new bezel facing down on the lint-free soft surface Position the touch panel’s main electronics housing into
along with main electronics and four screws. the new bezel so that the flat ribbon cable on the housing
matches up with the recess in the front bezel. Insert the four
6
screws and tighten to a maximum of 70 oz-in [0.5 Nm].
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
9-13
 Chapter 9: Replacement Parts

6” Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement – EA-6-ADPTR-GSK

1 6-inch replacement NEMA 4/4X gasket for the C-more touch
panel adapter plate.
2
3
4
5
6 6” Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement Instructions:
7 Preparation: Disconnect input power and all other connections, remove the touch panel from the 6” adapter plate, and then remove
the adapter plate from the control cabinet by removing the six (6) screws that secure the adapter to the control cabinet. In a clean
environment, place the adapter plate face down on a lint-free soft surface to prevent scratching the adapter plate.

8
9 1 2
10
11
12
13 Start at one corner and pull the old gasket out of the channel
that holds the gasket in place. Pull the gasket up as you work
Lay the new gasket over the channel so that the long and
short sides of the gasket match up to the long and short
around the entire perimeter of the adapter plate. Discard the sides of the adapter plate. Start at one corner and match the
14 old gasket. gasket’s corner to the channel’s corner. Press the gasket
into the channel and work all away around the perimeter of
the adapter plate. Re-install the adapter plate and then the
touch panel.
A
B
C
D
®
9-14 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
Panel & PLC Appendix
Error Code Tables
A
In this Appendix...
Introduction................................................................................................................ A-2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table...................................................................... A-3
DirectLOGIC – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation............................................. A-5
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol – PLC Error Code Table...................................... A-5
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol – PLC Error Codes................................................. A-5
Modbus Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation...................................................... A-6
AutomationDirect CLICK........................................................................................... A-6
AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC - Modbus (Koyo)...................................................... A-6
Modicon Modbus RTU.............................................................................................. A-6
Entivity Modbus RTU................................................................................................. A-6
DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol – PLC Error Codes....................................................... A-6
Productivity3000 Error Code P499............................................................................. A-7
Allen-Bradley – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation............................................ A-8
Allen-Bradley Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:................................................ A-8
Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols – PLC Error Code Tables.............................. A-9
Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols – PLC Error Code Tables............................ A-10
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol –
Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 and 498 Explanation............................................. A-11
Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables
ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix.............................................................. A-12
Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables
MicroLogix 1100, 1400 & SLC 5/05, both via native Ethernet port;
MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5/03/04/05, all via ENI Adapter.. A-16
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol – PLC Error Codes.................................................... A-21
Panel & PLC Appendix
Error Code Tables
A
GE 90-30 – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation................................................. A-22
Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes............................................................... A-32
Omron – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation.................................................... A-32
Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table................................................ A-33
Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table........................................................ A-34
Omron – Panel Error Code P495 Explanation......................................................... A-37
Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet Protocol – PLC Error Code Table............................... A-38
Siemens – Panel Error Code P499 Explanation....................................................... A-39
Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table......................................................... A-40
Siemens ISO over TCP Protocol – PLC Error Code Table........................................ A-41
This page intentionally left blank
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Introduction
A The C-more family of touch panels is capable of communicating with a wide variety of
Programmable Logic Controllers. C-more is capable of communicating over RS232,
2 RS422 and RS485 serial networks as well as Ethernet networks. It communicates with all
AutomationDirect PLCs utilizing various protocols. C-more also communicates with other
brands of PLCs by their different protocols. For a complete list of PLCs and protocols, see the
3 table on page 16 of Chapter 1: Getting Started.
As with any network communications, errors will occur. To make it more simple for the user to
4 identify the cause of the possible error, we have provided a error code table for all of the possible
errors that C-more can detect.
5 If a C-more communications error does occur, the error message will appear across the top
of the screen. The C-more touch panel also monitors any errors that are generated by the
various PLCs that are connected to it. If any of the PLC generated errors are detected, they
6 are displayed across the top of the panel’s display embedded as a hexadecimal value in error
code P499’s message. An explanation of how the specific PLC error is identified in the panel
7 error code P499 is shown proceeding the specific manufacturer’s PLC error tables. How the
hexadecimal error code value is interrupted is slightly different between manufacturers, so it is
8 important to check the explanation at the beginning of each manufacturer’s tables.
Note: These PLC error codes are provided by the manufacturer of the related PLC and are subject to change
9 by the PLC manufacturer. Please refer to the manufacturers documentation for a more complete and up-to-
date list of error codes.

10 All errors are also logged into the panel’s Error log under the
Information tab in the panel’s System Setup Screens and are
11
STX is not found
identified by the error code number. See Chapter 5: System
Setup Screens for additional details.

12 If you have difficulty determining the cause of the error,

please refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting for some
troubleshooting tips or contact our technical support group
13 at 770-844-4200 or the 3rd party PLC manufacturer.
Stride™
14 Ethernet Switch
10/100 Base-T
(such as SE-SW5U)
C-more Error Message
A
H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
C-more
B
Ethernet Module
1

Ethernet
Touch Panel Port

C (Bottom View)

D DL06 PLC
Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

A-2 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table

The following table includes all of the error codes and error messages that the panel will display
if the listed cause is detected. All of these errors involve problems that could result with the
A
panel communicating with the connected PLC. Be aware that not all of the panel errors are
used with each type of PLC that can be connected to the panel. 2
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table
Error Code Error Message Cause 3
PLC Communication Timeout (for single A timeout occurred after sending a request to the PLC %Device%.
PLC-001 PLC)
%Device% PLC Communication Timeout
%Device% indicates the device name, such as DEV001.
Example error message for multiple PLCs: DEV001 PLC Communication
4
(for multiple PLCs, such as RS-422/485) Timeout.
PLC-002 NAK received from PLC A negative acknowledgement (NAK) control code has been generated
during a read/write request. 5
PLC-003 EOT received from PLC An End of Transmission (EOT) control code is sent by the PLC in response

PLC-004 STX is not found

to a Read/Write/SetBit request..
A Start of Text (STX) control code was not found in the data packet 6
received from the PLC.
PLC-005 ETX or ETB is not found Neither an End of Text (ETX) nor an End of Transmission Block (ETB)
control code was found in the data packet received from the PLC. 7
There was an incorrect Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC) control
PLC-006 LRC does not match code in the communications packet received from the PLC. This is an
indication that the data in the packet is corrupted. 8
There was an incorrect Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) control code in the
PLC-007 CRC does not match communications packet received from the PLC. This is an indication that
the data in the packet is corrupted. 9
PLC-008 Address does not match The address value returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect.
PLC-009 Different function code received from PLC The function code returned in the data packet from the PLC is incorrect. 10
PLC-010 Data size does not match There are an incorrect number of bytes found in the data packet returned
from the PLC.
PLC-011 Invalid value in function code There is an invalid value in the function code. 11
PLC-012 Invalid command sent to PLC There was an invalid command sent to the PLC that wasn’t recognized by
the PLC.
If the data packet does not include a negative acknowledgement (NAK -
12
PLC-013 ENQ received from PLC 0x15 value) in the defined packet field, then an enquiry (ENQ) control code

PLC-014 Transaction ID does not match

error will be displayed.
This error will be displayed if after checking the Transaction ID Bytes in 13
the data packet, there is no match to what was requested.
PLC-015
PLC-016
%Device% No device found
Data byte communication error
A PLC device designated as %Device% could not be found.
0 byte of data is recieved
14
PLC-017
PLC-018
Out of address range
Panel communication timeout
The touch panel requested a file number larger than 255.
The server panel did not respond when using the Panel Pass Through. A
PLC-019 Found in parity error by hardware An error detected in the PLC memory.
PLC-020 Can’t open serial port Cannot open the Serial Port. If this error shows on the panel, it indicates
a hardware problem.
B
PLC-021
PLC-022
PLC number does not match
Can’t reset DCB
The PLC number does not match the PLC number configured.
Unable to reset the data communication bit. C
PLC-023 Cable not connected properly Communication cable incorrectly installed.
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table continued on the next page.
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-3
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table (cont’d)

A C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table (cont’d)
Error Code Error Message Cause
2 PLC-024
PLC-025
Cannot detect other devices on network
Panel not in polling list
The panel is not communicating with other devices on the network.

3 PLC-026
PLC-027
PLC connection timeout
Memory type incorrect
A timeout occured after sending a request to the PLC.

4 PLC-028 PLC failed to respond The PLC failed to respond after sending a request to the PLC.
An error code specific to Omron Ethernet with a Value of XXXX has
PLC-495 Omron Ethernet Error been returned from the PLC. See the explanation for error code
5 PLC-495 proceeding the Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet error code tables.
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. Encapsulation Error.
PLC-496 Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-496 proceeding the Allen-
6 Bradley EtherNet/IP error code tables.
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. CIP Error.
PLC-497 Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-497 proceeding the Allen-
7 Bradley EtherNet/IP error code tables.
Allen-Bradley EtherNET/IP specific. Service Packet Error.
PLC-498 Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from PLC See the explanation for error code PLC-498 proceeding the Allen-

8 PLC-499 Error code XXXX returned from PLC

Bradley EtherNet/IP error code tables.
An error code with a value of XXXX has been returned from the PLC.
See the explanation for error code PLC-499 below for Direct LOGIC and
proceeding each set of PLC error code tables that use this error code.
9 PLC-500 Cannot write to Serial Port
Data cannot write to the Serial port.
Data was sent to the PLC via the Serial Port.
If this error shows on the Panel, it indicates a Hardware Problem.
10 PLC-700 Not enough buffer memory There was an error while allocating memory for the read buffer.
When this error is displayed, a memory leak may have occurred.
Request to inaccessible memory from the HMI layer to the PLC protocol
11 PLC-701 Access to inaccessible PLC memory layer. This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.
A Read/Write/SetBit request has been sent to an invalid memory area.
PLC-702 Cannot access by different function code This error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer.
12 PLC-703 Write request to PLC Read Only Memory
A PLC Write request was made to the PLC’s Read-Only memory area.This
error is an indication that there is a problem in the HMI layer or the PLC
protocol layer.
13 PLC-704 Bad device-access No device (PLC) exists in the server panel or the device name does not
match between the server and client when using the Panel Pass Through.
PLC-705 Protocol does not match The protocol for the device does Not match between the server and client
14 when using the panel pass through.

A
B
C
D

A-4 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

DirectLOGIC – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation

The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
A
This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the
error. The possible PLC generated error codes for the DirectLOGIC communication protocol 2
are represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
Direct LOGIC Error Code PLC-499 Message Example: 3
4
Error code 0003 returned from

5
PLC

6
Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
of 0003 indicates an “Illegal
7
data value dependent upon
the request.” PLC error. 8
9
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol – PLC Error Code Table 10
The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the DirectLOGIC PLC when using
the K-Sequence protocol. 11
PLC Error Codes for Direct LOGIC – K-Sequence
Panel Error Code Description
12
PLC-499 Hex Value
01F8
020D
Error setting value.
Error in key mode.
13
021C Password protected.
14
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.
A
B
DirectLOGIC DirectNET Protocol – PLC Error Codes
Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when C
using the DirectLOGIC DirectNET protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.

DirectLOGIC error code tables continued on the next page.

D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-5
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Modbus Protocols Error Code P499 Explanation

A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Modbus protocols:

AutomationDirect CLICK
2 AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC - Modbus (Koyo)
3 Modicon Modbus RTU
Entivity Modbus RTU
4
5 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.
6
PLC Error Codes Modbus Protocols
7 Panel Error Code
P499 Hex Value Name Meaning

8 ILLEGAL
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server (or slave). This
may be because the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented
0x0001 FUNCTION in the unit selected. It could also indicate that the server (or slave) is in the wrong state to
9 process a request of this type, for example because it is unconfigured and is being asked to
return registered values.
The data address received in the query is not an allowable address for the server (or slave).
10 More specifically, the combination of reference number and transfer length is invalid. For a
controller with 100 registers, the PDU addresses the first register as 0, and the last one as 99.
ILLEGAL DATA If a request is submitted with a starting register address of 96 and a quantity of registers of 4,
0x0002 ADDRESS then the request will successfully operate (address-wise at least) on registers 96, 97, 98, 99.
11 If a request is submitted with a starting register of 96 and a quantity of registers of 5, then the
request will fail with Exception code 0x02 “Illegal Data Address” since it attempts to operate on
registers 96, 97, 98, 99 and 100, and there is no register with address 100.
12 A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for server (or slave). This
ILLEGAL DATA indicates a fault in the structure of the remainder of a complex request, such as that the implied
0x0003 length is incorrect. It specifically does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in
VALUE
13 a register has a value outside the expectation of the application program, since the Modbus
protocol is unaware of the significance of any particular value of any particular register.
SLAVE DEVICE An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was attempting to perform the
0x0004 requested action.
14 FAILURE

A DirectLOGIC ECOM Protocol – PLC Error Codes

Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
B using the DirectLOGIC ECOM protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.

C
D

A-6 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Productivity3000 Error Code P499

Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch A
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information. 2
PLC Error Codes for Productivity3000
3
Panel Error Code Meaning
P499 Hex Value
4
The function code received in the query is not an allowable action for the server (or slave). This may be because
0x0001 the function code is only applicable to newer devices and was not implemented in the unit selected. It could also
indicate that the server (or slave) is in the wrong state to process a request of this type, for example because it is
unconfigured and is being asked to return registered values.
5
0x0002
Address out of range. Check to make sure that the C-more tag and System ID match the Productivity3000
Programming Software Tag Name and System ID. The project file in the Productivity3000 system and the
6
imported CSV into C-more must be in sync with each other.
A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the server (or slave). This indicates a fault
in the structure of the remainder of a complex request, such as that the implied length is incorrect. It specifically
7
0x0003 does NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a register has a value outside the expectation of the
application program, since the Modbus protocol is unaware of the significance of any particular value of any
particular register.
8
0x0004 An unrecoverable error occurred while the server (or slave) was attempting to perform the requested action.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-7
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation

A The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected
PLC. The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the
2 message. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause
of the error. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485
communication protocols are represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following
3 diagram. Please note that the error code is broken down into three sections. It is possible for
more than one type of PLC error to be displayed in this value.
4 Allen-Bradley Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:
5 AB DF1 and DH485 Protocol Error Code PLC-499 Breakdown
Remote
4-7 bits
Local
0-3 bits
EXT STS
byte
AB DF1 and DH485 Protocol – Multiple Error Code Examples
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Remote

6 16-bit
Word
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
4-7 bits
Local
0-3 bits
F x

x 0 x
+
x x

x
1 x

x 1 x
+
x x

x
F x

x 1 x
+
x x

x
+ + +

7 Example of an EXT STS error

EXT STS
byte
Error PLC-499
x x 0 9
=
x x 0 0
=
x x 0 9
=
PLC-499 Error Code Message for a “Type mismatch.” Value Displayed F 0 0 9 1 1 0 0 F 1 0 9

8 Displayed Hexadecimal Value F 0 1 7

hex

9
10 Error code 1700 returned from
PLC

11
12
13 Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
of 1700 indicates “Illegal
14 command or format.”and
“Station is offline.” PLC errors.

A
B
C
D

A-8 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols – PLC Error Code Tables

The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the DF1 and DH485 protocols. DF1 includes full and half duplex
A
communications for the MicroLogix 1000, 1100. 1200, 1400, 1500, SLC 5/03, /04, /05,
ControlLogix, CompactLogix and FlexLogix, and full duplex communications for the PLC5. 2
DH485 includes all MicroLogix and SLC500 PLC’s and any communication connection using
an Allen-Bradley AIC device using the DH485 protocol. 3
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499 4
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.

PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485 Protocols, Local STS Errors (0-3 bits) 5
Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0 Success; no error.
Description
6
0x1
0x2
DST node is out of buffer space.
Cannot guarantee delivery; link layer. 7
(The remote node specified does not ACK command.)
0x3
0x4
Duplicate token holder detected.
Local port is disconnected.
8
0x5 Application layer timed out waiting for response.
0x6 Duplicate node detected. 9
0x7 Station is offline.
0x8 Hardware fault.
10
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485 Protocols, Remote STS Errors (4-7 bits)
Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value Description 11
0x0
0x10
Success; no error.
Illegal command or format. 12
0x20 Host has a problem and will not communicate.
0x30
0x40
Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shut down.
Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.
13
0x50
0x60
Addressing problem or memory protect rungs.
Function not allowed due to command protection selection. 14
0x70 Processor is in Program Mode.
0x80
0x90
Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.
Remote node cannot buffer command.
A
0xA0
0xB0
Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
Remote node problem due to download. B
0xC0 Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
0xD0
0xE0
not used
not used
C
0xF0 Error code in the EXT STS byte. See the error code table on the next page.
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley DF1 protocol continued on the next page.)
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-9
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols – PLC Error Code Tables

A PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley DF1 and DH485 Protocols, EXT STS Command Code for F0 Command
Panel Error Code
Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0 not used
0x1 A field has an illegal value.
3 0x2 Fewer levels specified in address than minimum for any address.
0x3 More levels specified in address than system supports.

4 0x4
0x5
Symbol not found.
Symbol is of improper format.
0x6 Address does not point to something usable.
5 0x7 File is wrong size.
0x8 Cannot complete request; situation has changed since start of the command.

6 0x9
0xA
Data or file size is too large.
Transaction size plus word address is too large.
0xB Access denied; improper privilege.
7 0xC Condition cannot be generated; resource is not available.
0xD Condition already exists; resource is readily available.

8 0xE
0xF
Command cannot be executed.
Histogram overflow.
0x10 No access.
9 0x11 Illegal data type.
0x12 Invalid parameter or invalid data.

10 0x13
0x14
Address reference exists to deleted area.
Command execution failure for unknown reason;
possible PLC 3 histogram overflow.
11 0x15
0x16
Data conversion error.
Scanner not able to communicate with 1771 rack adapter.
0x17 Type mismatch.
12 0x18 1771 module response was not valid.
0x19 Duplicated label.
13 0x22
0x23
Remote rack fault.
Timeout.
0x24 Unknown error.
14 0x1A File is open; another node owns it.
0x1B Another node is the program owner.
A 0x1C
0x1D
Disk File is write protectid or otherwise unavailable
Disk File is being used by another application. Update not performed (offline only).
0x1E Data table element protection violation.
B 0x1F Temporary internal problem.

C
D

A-10 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol –

Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 and 498 Explanation A
The PLC-496, PLC-497, and PLC-498 error codes are used to show any errors that are
generated by the connected PLC. These error messages include an eight digit hexadecimal 2
value displayed embedded in the message. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s
error tables to determine the cause of the error. The possible PLC generated error codes for the 3
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP communication protocol is represented by a hexadecimal value as
shown in the following message example.
4
Allen-Bradley Error Code PLC-496, 497, 498 Message Example:
5
Error code 00000065 returned
from PLC
6
7
Panel error code PLC-496
8
showing a hexadecimal value
of 00000065 indicates an “The
target received a message of
9
invalid length.” PLC error.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-11
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables

A ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix
The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel
2 from Allen-Bradley PLCs using the EtherNet/IP protocol. This includes all ControlLogix,
CompactLogix and FlexLogix PLCs.
3 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-496
4 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.

PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol –Encapsulation Errors

5 (Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
6 PLC-496 Hex Value
0x00000001
Description
The sender issued an invalid or unsupported encapsulation command.

7 0x00000002 Insufficient memory resources in the receiver to handle the command. You can get this error if the
1761-NET-ENI cannot connect to the PLC serially.
0x00000003 Poorly formed or incorrect data in the data portion of the encapsulation message.

8 0x00000004 -
0x00000063 Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
0x00000064 An orginator used an invalid session handle when sending an encapsulation message to the target.
9 0x00000065
0x00000066 -
The target received a message of invalid length.
Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
0x00000068
10 0x00000069
0x0000006a -
Unsupported encapsulation protocol revision.
Reserved for future expansion.
0x0000ffff
11 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
12 Panel Error Code
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Description
PLC-497 Hex Value
13 0x010100
0x010103
Connection Manager: Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open.
Connection Manager: Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported.

14 0x010106
0x010107
Connection Manager: Ownership Conflict.
Connection Manager: Connection not found at target application.
0x010108 Connection Manager: Invalid connection type (problem with type or priority).
A 0x010109
0x010110
Connection Manager: Invalid connection size.
Connection Manager: Device not configured.

B 0x010111
0x010113
Connection Manager: RPI not supported. Could also be problem with inactivity timeout.
Connection Manager: Connection Manager cannot support any more connections.
0x010114 Connection Manager: Either the vendor ID or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the
C 0x010115
device.
Connection Manager: Product Type in the key segment did not match the device.
0x010116 Connection Manager: Major or minor revision information in the key segment did not match the device.
D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
CompactLogix, and FlexLogix continued on the next page.)

A-12 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (cont’d) A
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
2
Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value
Description 3
0x010117 Connection Manager: Invalid connection point.
0x010118
0x010119
Connection Manager: Invalid configuration format.
Connection Manager: Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open.
4
0x01011a Connection Manager: Target application cannot support any more connections.
0x01011b Connection Manager: RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time. 5
0x010203 Connection Manager: Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out.
0x010204
0x010205
Connection Manager: Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response.
Connection Manager: Parameter error in Unconnected send service.
6
0x010206 Connection Manager: Message too large for Unconnected message service.
0x010207 Connection Manager: Unconnected acknowledge without reply. 7
0x010301 Connection Manager: No buffer memory available.
0x010302
0x010303
Connection Manager: Network Bandwidth not available for data.
Connection Manager: No Tag filters available.
8
0x010304 Connection Manager: Not configured to send real-time data.
0x010311 Connection Manager: Port specified in Port segment not available. 9
0x010312 Connection Manager: Link address specified in port segment not available.
0x010315
0x010316
Connection Manager: invalid segment type or segment value in path.
Connection Manager: Path and Connection not equal in close.
10
0x010317 Connection Manager: Ether Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid.
0x010318 Connection Manager: Link address to self invalid. 11
0x010319 Connection Manager: Resources on Secondary unavailable.
0x01031a
0x01031b
Connection Manager: Connection already established.
Connection Manager: Direct connection already established.
12
0x01031c Connection Manager: Miscellaneous.
0x01031d Connection Manager: Redundant connection mismatch. 13
0x01031e Connection Manager: No more consumer resources available in the producing module.
0x01031f
0x010320 -
Connection Manager: No connection resources exist for target path.
Connection Manager: Vendor specific.
14
0x0107ff
0x020000
0x030000
Resource unavailable: Connection Manager resources are unavailable to handle service request.
Invalid parameter value.
A
Path segment error: The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
0x040000 processing node.
Path destination unknown: The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is not
B
0x050000 known or is not contained in the processing node.
0x060000
0x070000
Partial transfer: Only part of the expected data was transferred.
Connection lost: The messaging connection was lost.
C
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
CompactLogix, and FlexLogix continued on the next page.)
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-13
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables

A ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (cont’d)
2 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
3 PLC-497 Hex Value Description

0x080000 Service not supported: The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object
Class/Instance.
4 0x090000 Invalid attribute value: Invalid attribute data detected.
0x0a0000 Attribute list error: An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non-zero
5 0x0b0000
status.
Already in requested mode/state: The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
0x0c0000 Object state conflict: The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
6 0x0d0000
0x0e0000
Object already exists: The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
Attribute not settable: A request to modify non-modifiable attribute was received.

7 0x0f0000
0x100000
Privilege violation: A permission/privilege check failed.
Device state conflict: The device’s current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested service.
0x110000 Reply data too large: The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response
8 0x120000
buffer.
Fragmentation of a primitive value: The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive
data value. For example, trying to send a 2 byte value to a REAL data type (4 byte).

9 0x130000
0x140000
Not enough data: The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
Attribute not supported: The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
0x150000 Too much data: The service supplied more data than was expected.
10 0x160000 Object does not exist: The object specified does not exist in the device.
Service fragmentation sequence not in progress: The fragmentation sequence for this service is not
0x170000 currently active for this data.
11 0x180000 No stored attribute data: The attribute data of this object was no saved prior to the requested service.
0x190000 Store operation failure: The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt.

12 0x1a0000 Routing failure, request packet too large: The service request packet was too large for transmission on a
network in the path to the destination.
0x1b0000 Routing failure, response packet too large: The service reponse packet was too large for transmission on a
13 0x1c0000
network in the path from the destination.
Missing attribute list entry data: The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was
needed by the service to perform the requested behavior.

14 0x1d0000
0x1e0000
Invalid attribute value list: The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for
those attributes that were invalid.
Embedded service error: See Service Packet error list (PLC-498 Error codes) below:

A 0x1f0000 Vendor specific error: A vendor specific error has been encountered. This occurs when none of the
specified errors relate to the error in the device.
0x200000 Invalid parameter: A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a
parameter does meet the requirements defined in an Application Object specification.
B 0x210000 Write-once value or medium already written: An attempt was made to write to a write-once-medium that
has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be change once established.
Invalid Reply Received: An invalid reply is received (example: service code sent doesn’t match service code
C 0x220000 received.).
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for ControlLogix,
D CompactLogix and FlexLogix continued on the next page.)

A-14 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables

ControlLogix, CompactLogix, & FlexLogix (cont’d) A
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
2
Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value Description 3
0x230000 Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
0x240000
0x250000
Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Key failure in path: The key segment was included as the first segment in the path does not match the
4
destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed.
0x260000 Path Size Invalid: The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough
to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included. 5
0x270000 Unexpected attribute in list: An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
0x280000 Invalid Member ID: The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class/Instance/
Attribute. 6
0x290000 Member not settable: A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.

0x2a0000
Group 2 only server general failure: This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only
servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not supported and
7
Attribute not settable.
0x2b0000 -
0xcf0000
Reserved by CIP for future extensions. 8
0xd00000 - Reserved for Object Class and service errors: This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object
0xff0000
Class specific errors. Use of this range should only be used when errors in this table don’t accurately reflect
the error encountered. 9
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – Service Packet Errors 10
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code Description
11
PLC-498 Hex Value
0x040000 This general status codes that the tag name could not be deciphered. This could mean that the tag name
was entered incorrectly or does not exist in the PLC. 12
0x050000 The particular item referenced (usually instance) could not be found.
0x060000
0x0a0000
The amount of data requested would not fit into the response buffer. Partial data transfer has occurred.
An error has occurred trying to process one of the attributes.
13
0x130000 Not enough command data/parameters were supplied in the command to execute the service requested.
0x1c0000 An insufficient number of attributes were provided compared to the attribute count. 14
0x260000 The tag name length specified did not match what was in the message.
0xff0521
0xff0721
You have tried to access beyond the end of the data object.
The abbreviated type does not match the data type of the data object.
A
0xff0421 The beginning offset was beyond the end of the template.
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-15
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
A MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport;
2 MicroLogix
Adapter
1000,1100,1200,1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI
3 The following PLC error code tables cover possible errors that are detected by the panel from
Allen-Bradley PLCs using the EtherNet/IP protocol. This includes MicroLogix 1100, 1400 &
4 SLC 5/05, both using their native Ethernet port, and MicroLogix 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400,
1500, SLC 5/03, 5/04 and 5/05 using an Allen-Bradly ENI Adapter.

5 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-496
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.
6
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol –Encapsulation Errors
7 Panel Error Code
(Error code 0xaaaaaaaa returned from the PLC.)
Description
PLC-496 Hex Value
8 0x00000001 The sender issued an invalid or unsupported encapsulation command.
0x00000002 Insufficient memory resources in the receiver to handle the command. You can get this error if the

9 0x00000003
1761-NET-ENI cannot connect to the PLC serially.
Poorly formed or incorrect data in the data portion of the encapsulation message.
0x00000004 - Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
10 0x00000063
0x00000064 An orginator used an invalid session handle when sending an encapsulation message to the target.
0x00000065 The target received a message of invalid length.
11 0x00000066 -
0x00000068
Reserved for legacy (Rockwell Automation).
0x00000069 Unsupported encapsulation protocol revision.
12 0x0000006a -
0x0000ffff
Reserved for future expansion.

13 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors

(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
14 Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value Description
0x010100 Connection Manager: Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open.
A 0x010103
0x010106
Connection Manager: Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported.
Connection Manager: Ownership Conflict.
0x010107 Connection Manager: Connection not found at target application.
B 0x010108 Connection Manager: Invalid connection type (problem with type or priority).
0x010109 Connection Manager: Invalid connection size.
C 0x010110
0x010111
Connection Manager: Device not configured.
Connection Manager: RPI not supported. Could also be problem with inactivity timeout.

D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
1400, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

A-16 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport; A
MicroLogix1000,1100,1200, 1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI 2
Adapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
3
Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value
Description 4
0x010113 Connection Manager: Connection Manager cannot support any more connections.
0x010114 Connection Manager: Either the vendor ID or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the
device.
5
0x010115 Connection Manager: Product Type in the key segment did not match the device.
0x010116
0x010117
Connection Manager: Major or minor revision information in the key segment did not match the device.
Connection Manager: Invalid connection point.
6
0x010118
0x010119
Connection Manager: Invalid configuration format.
Connection Manager: Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open.
7
0x01011a Connection Manager: Target application cannot support any more connections.
0x01011b
0x010203
Connection Manager: RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time.
Connection Manager: Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out.
8
0x010204
0x010205
Connection Manager: Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response.
Connection Manager: Parameter error in Unconnected send service.
9
0x010206 Connection Manager: Message too large for Unconnected message service.
0x010207
0x010301
Connection Manager: Unconnected acknowledge without reply.
Connection Manager: No buffer memory available.
10
0x010302
0x010303
Connection Manager: Network Bandwidth not available for data.
Connection Manager: No Tag filters available.
11
0x010304 Connection Manager: Not configured to send real-time data.
0x010311
0x010312
Connection Manager: Port specified in Port segment not available.
Connection Manager: Link address specified in port segment not available.
12
0x010315
0x010316
Connection Manager: invalid segment type or segment value in path.
Connection Manager: Path and Connection not equal in close.
13
0x010317 Connection Manager: Ether Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid.
0x010318
0x010319
Connection Manager: Link address to self invalid.
Connection Manager: Resources on Secondary unavailable.
14
0x01031a
0x01031b
Connection Manager: Connection already established.
Connection Manager: Direct connection already established.
A
0x01031c Connection Manager: Miscellaneous.
0x01031d
0x01031e
Connection Manager: Redundant connection mismatch.
Connection Manager: No more consumer resources available in the producing module.
B
0x01031f
0x010320 -
Connection Manager: No connection resources exist for target path.
Connection Manager: Vendor specific.
C
0x0107ff
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100, D
1400, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-17
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
A MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport;
2 MicroLogix
Adapter
1000,1100,1200, 1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI
3 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors
(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
4 Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value Description
0x020000 Resource unavailable: Connection Manager resources are unavailable to handle service request.
5 0x030000 Invalid parameter value.
0x040000 Path segment error: The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
processing node.
6 0x050000 Path destination unknown: The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is not
known or is not contained in the processing node.

7 0x060000
0x070000
Partial transfer: Only part of the expected data was transferred.
Connection lost: The messaging connection was lost.
0x080000 Service not supported: The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object
8 0x090000
Class/Instance.
Invalid attribute value: Invalid attribute data detected.
0x0a0000 Attribute list error: An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a non-zero
9 0x0b0000
status.
Already in requested mode/state: The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
0x0c0000 Object state conflict: The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
10 0x0d0000
0x0e0000
Object already exists: The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
Attribute not settable: A request to modify non-modifiable attribute was received.

11 0x0f0000
0x100000
Privilege violation: A permission/privilege check failed.
Device state conflict: The device’s current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested service.
Reply data too large: The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response
12 0x110000

0x120000
buffer.
Fragmentation of a primitive value: The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive
data value. For example, trying to send a 2 byte value to a REAL data type (4 byte).
13 0x130000
0x140000
Not enough data: The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
Attribute not supported: The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
0x150000 Too much data: The service supplied more data than was expected.
14 0x160000 Object does not exist: The object specified does not exist in the device.
0x170000 Service fragmentation sequence not in progress: The fragmentation sequence for this service is not
A 0x180000
currently active for this data.
No stored attribute data: The attribute data of this object was no saved prior to the requested service.
0x190000 Store operation failure: The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt.
B 0x1a0000 Routing failure, request packet too large: The service request packet was too large for transmission on a
network in the path to the destination.
0x1b0000 Routing failure, response packet too large: The service reponse packet was too large for transmission on a
C 0x1c0000
network in the path from the destination.
Missing attribute list entry data: The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was
needed by the service to perform the requested behavior.
D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
1400, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

A-18 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport; A
MicroLogix1000,1100,1200, 1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI 2
Adapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – CIP Errors 3
(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
PLC-497 Hex Value Description 4
Invalid attribute value list: The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for
0x1d0000
0x1e0000
those attributes that were invalid.
Embedded service error: See Service Packet error list (PLC-498 Error codes) below:
5
0x1f0000 Vendor specific error: A vendor specific error has been encountered. This occurs when none of the
specified errors relate to the error in the device.
Invalid parameter: A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a
6
0x200000 parameter does meet the requirements defined in an Application Object specification.
0x210000 Write-once value or medium already written: An attempt was made to write to a write-once-medium that
has already been written or to modify a value that cannot be change once established.
7
Invalid Reply Received: An invalid reply is received (example: service code sent doesn’t match service code
0x220000
0x230000
received.).
Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
8
0x240000
0x250000
Reserved by CIP for future extensions.
Key failure in path: The key segment was included as the first segment in the path does not match the
destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which part of the key check failed.
9
0x260000
0x270000
Path Size Invalid: The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough
to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included.
Unexpected attribute in list: An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
10
0x280000 Invalid Member ID: The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class/Instance/
Attribute. 11
0x290000 Member not settable: A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.

0x2a0000
Group 2 only server general failure: This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only
servers with 4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not supported and 12
Attribute not settable.
0x2b0000 -
0xcf0000
Reserved by CIP for future extensions. 13
0xd00000 - Reserved for Object Class and service errors: This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object
0xff0000
Class specific errors. Use of this range should only be used when errors in this table don’t accurately reflect
the error encountered. 14
(PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.) A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-19
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
A MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport;
MicroLogix1000,1100,1200, 1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI
2 Adapter
3 PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – Service Packet Errors
(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
4 Panel Error Code
PLC-498 Hex Value
Description
0x010000 DST Node is out of buffer space.
5 0x020000
0x030000
Cannot guarantee delivery; link layer (The remote node specified does not ACK command).
Duplicate token holder detected.

6 0x040000
0x050000
Local port is disconnected.
Application layer timed out waiting for response.
0x060000 Duplicate node detected.
7 0x070000
0x080000
Station is offline.
Hardware fault.
Illegal command or format. Typical error received from PLC when addressed requested to the PLC does
8 0x100000
0x200000
not exist. Usually occurs if memory map has not been expanded in PLC to the range requested from panel.
Host has a problem and will not communicate.

9 0x300000
0x400000
Remote node host is missing, disconnected, or shut down.
Host could not complete function due to hardware fault.
0x500000 Addressing problem or memory protected rungs.
10 0x600000
0x700000
Function not allowed due to command protection selection.
Processor is in Program Mode.

11 0x800000
0x900000
Compatibility mode file missing or communication zone problem.
Remote node cannot buffer command.
0xA00000 Wait ACK (1775 KA buffer full).
12 0xB00000
0xC00000
Not used.
Not used.

13 0xD00000
0xE00000
Error code in the EXT STS byte. See the error code table below.
Fewer levels specified in address than minimum for any address.
0xF00300 More levels specified in address than system supports.
14 0xF00400
0xF00500
Symbol not found.
Symbol is of improper format.

A 0xF00600
0xF00700
Address does not point to something usable.
File is wrong size.
0xF00800 Cannot complete request, situation has changed since start of the command.
B 0xF00900
0xF00900
Data or file size is too large.
Transaction size plus word address is too large.

C 0xF00B00
0xF00C00
Access denied; improper privilege. This will occur if data file is set to constant or protected.
Condition cannot be generated; resource is not available.
0xF00D00 Condition already exists; resource is readily available.
D (PLC generated error codes for the Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP protocol for MicroLogix 1100,
1400, SLC 5/05, or ENI Adapter continued on the next page.)

A-20 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Allen-Bradley–EtherNet/IPProtocol–PLCErrorCodeTables
MicroLogix1100,1400&SLC5/05,bothvianativeEthernetport; A
MicroLogix1000,1100,1200,1400,1500,SLC5/03/04/05,allviaENI 2
Adapter
PLC Errors for Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol – Service Packet Errors 3
(Error code 0xaabbbb returned from the PLC.)
Panel Error Code
PLC-498 Hex Value Description 4
0xF00E00
0xF00F00
Command cannot be executed.
Histogram overflow. 5
0xF01000 No access.
0xF01100
0xF01200
Illegal data type.
Invalid parameter or invalid data.
6
0xF01300
0xF01400
Address reference exists to deleted area.
Command execution failure for unknown reason; possible histogram overflow. 7
0xF01500 Data conversion error.
0xF01600
0xF01700
Scanner not able to communicate with 1771 rack adapter.
Type mismatch.
8
0xF01800
0xF01900
1771 module response was not valid.
Duplicated label. 9
0xF02200 Remote rack fault.
0xF02300
0xF02400
Timeout.
Unknown error.
10
0xF01A00
0xF01B00
File is open; another node owns it.
Another node is the program owner. 11
0xF01C00 Reserved.
0xF01D00
0xF01E00
Reserved.
Data table element protection violation.
12
0xF01F00 Temporary internal problem.
13
14
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol – PLC Error Codes A
Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
using the Generic Ethernet IP protocol, there are no PLC generated errors. B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-21
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation

A The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
2 This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the
error.The possible PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 communication protocol are
represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
3
4
Error code 0013 returned from
PLC

5
6
7
8 Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
GE 90-30 Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:
9 of 0013 indicates an “Port
configurator error.” PLC error.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

A-22 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables

The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the GE 90-30 PLC when using the
SNPX protocol.
A
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch 2
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.
3
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Major)
Panel Error Code Description
4
PLC-499 Hex Value
No error
0x0002
Successful completion. (This is the expected completion value in the COMMREQ Status Word.)
Insufficient Privilege. For Series 90-70 PLC, the minor error code contains the privilege level required for
5
the service request.
0x0004
0x0005
Protocol Sequence Error. The CPU has received a message that is out of order.
Service Request Error, the minor error code contains the specific error code.
6
0x0006 Illegal Mailbox Type. Service request mailbox type is either undefined or unexpected.
0x0007 The PLC CPU’s Service Request Queue is full. The master should retry later. It is recommended that the
master wait a minimum of 10 msec before sending another service request.
7
0x000A

0x000B
SNP DOS Driver Error. The minor error code contains the specific error code.
Illegal Service Request. The requested service is either not defined or not supported. (This value is returned
in lieu of the actual 01h value passed in the SNP error message, to avoid confusion with the normal
8
successful COMMREQ completion.)

0x000C
Local SNP/SNP-X Error. An error occurred within the SNP task in the CMM module in this PLC.
This error may occur in either an SNP master or an SNP slave. The minor error code contains the specific
9
error code.
0x000D Remote SNP Error. An error occurred within the SNP slave task in the CMM module in the remote PLC.
The minor error code contains the specific error code.
10
Autodial Error. An error occurred while attempting to send a command string to an attached external
0x000E modem. The minor error code contains the specific error code.
SNP-X slave error. An error occurred within the SNPX task in the remote slave device. The minor error
11
0x000F code contains the specific error code.
0x0013 Port configurator error.
Problem with sending mail to the slave Service Request task.
12
0x0050 (Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
0x0051 Problem with getting mail from the slave Service Request task.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
13
Slave SNP task timed out before receiving an SRP response.
0x0055

0x0056
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
Slave SNP task could not find the requested datagram connection.
14
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
0x0057 Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to write the datagram.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only) A
0x0058 Slave SNP task encountered an error in trying to update the datagram.
(Series 90-70 PLC CPUs only)
B
(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-23
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

A Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d)
Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
PLC Error 0x010C WAIT-type COMMREQ is not permitted; must use NOW AIT-type.
PLC Error 0x010E Not used
3 PLC Error 0x010F The service request code in an X-Request message is unsupported or invalid at this time. This error may
occur if an SNP-X communication session has not been success fully established at the slave device.

4 PLC Error 0x020C

PLC Error 0x020E
COMMREQ command is not supported.
The modem command string length exceeds 250 characters.
Insufficient privilege level in the slave PLC CPU for the requested SNP-X service.
5 PLC Error 0x020F Password protection at PLC CPU may be preventing the requested service.
Unsupported COMMREQ. These errors are only generated when there is no protocol currently being run on
PLC Error 0x0213 a port, and the port receives a COMMREQ.
6 (The port may be disabled or an error has occurred in processing a new configuration).
SNP communication is not active. Must initiate a new SNP communication by sending an Attach or Long
PLC Error 0x030C Attach COMMREQ.
7 PLC Error 0x030E COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small.
Output command string data is missing or incomplete.
PLC Error 0x030F Invalid slave memory type in X-Request message.
8 PLC Error 0x0313
PLC Error 0x040C
Invalid COMMREQ length.
SNP slave did not respond to Attach message from master.

9 PLC Error 0x040E Serial output timeout. The CMM module was unable to transmit the modem autodial output from the serial
port. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM is configured to use hardware flow control.)

10 PLC Error 0x040F

PLC Error 0x0413
Invalid slave memory address or range in X-Request message.
Invalid COMMREQ status word location.
PLC Error 0x050C Unable to write SNP Status Word to local PLC memory;
11 PLC Error 0x050E
may be due to invalid Status Word memory type or address.
Response was not received from modem. Check modem and cable.
PLC Error 0x050F Invalid data length in X-Request message.
12 PLC Error 0x0513
Data length must be non-zero, and may not exceed decimal 1000 bytes.
Invalid COMMREQ data.
PLC Error 0x060C Master device memory type is not valid in this PLC.
13 PLC Error 0x060E
Modem responded with BUSY.
Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. The remote modem is already in use; retry the
connection request at a later time.
14 PLC Error 0x060F
X-Buffer data length does not match the service request in X-Request message.
The X-Buffer message length is obtained from the Next Message Length field in the X-Request message;
the length of the data within the buffer message is always the message length.
A PLC Error 0x070C Master device memory address or length is zero.
Modem responded with NO CARRIER.
PLC Error 0x070E Modem is unable to complete the requested connection.
B Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line.
Queue Full indication from Service Request Processor in slave PLC CPU.
The slave is temporarily unable to complete the service request.
C PLC Error 0x070F The master should try again later. It is recommended that the master wait at least 10 msec before repeating
the X-Request.

D (PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)

A-24 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x080C Unable to read or write master device memory locations specified in COMMREQ. Usually caused by invalid
memory address for this PLC. SNP message exchange may have taken place.
2
0x080E Modem responded with NO DIALTONE. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. Check the
modem connections and the telephone line.
Service Request Processor response exceeds 1000 bytes;
3
0x080F the SNP-X slave device cannot return the data in an X-Response message.
(This error applies to CMM module only.) 4
0x090C Master device memory data length exceeds maximum data size of CMM module (2048 bytes). Must use a
smaller data length. Use multiple COMMREQs if total data length exceeds this maximum value.
Modem responded with ERROR. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. Check the modem
5
0x090E command string and modem.
0x0A0C Slave device memory type is missing or not valid.
Modem responded with RING, indicating that the modem is being called by another modem. Modem is
6
0x0A0E unable to complete the requested command. Retry the modem command at a later time.
0x0B0C Slave device memory address is missing or zero.
An unknown response was received from the modem. Modem is unable to complete the requested
7
0x0B0E command. Check the modem command string and modem. The modem response is expected to be either
CONNECT or OK.
COMMREQ Data Block Length is too small.
8
0x0C0C (When expected COMMREQ length is 6 words or less. An improper length may cause other minor error

0x0D0C
codes 6-11.)
Invalid Diagnostic Status Word (DSW) starting word or length.
9
Invalid maximum SNP message data size.
0x0E0C
0x0F0C
Must be an even value from 42 to 2048.
Invalid Privilege Level. Must be 0 through 4 or -1.
10
0x100C Invalid Fault Table selector.
Must be 1 for I/O Fault Table, or 2 for PLC Fault Table.
Unexpected Service Request Processor error.
11
0x100F (This error applies to CMM module only; the unexpected SRP error code is saved in the Diagnostic Status
Words in the CMM module.)
Invalid Fault Table starting index.
12
0x110C Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table, or 1-16 for PLC.
0x120C
0x130C
Invalid fault count. Must be 1-32 for I/O Fault Table, or 1-16 for PLC Fault Table.
Invalid Set PLC Date/Time mode. Must be 1-4.
13
0x140C
0x150C
Invalid Set PLC Date/Time date, time, or day-of-week value.
Unable to retrieve master device PLC time/date from PLC CPU.
14
Requested service is not permitted in a Broadcast request. The master must direct the X-Request message
0x150F

0x160C
to a specific SNP-X slave device.
Invalid slave PLC type.
A
Must be 0 for Series 90-70, or 1 for Series 90-30 or Series 90-20.
0x170C Invalid datagram type.
Must be 01h for normal datagram, or 81h (129) for permanent datagram. B
0x180C Missing or too many datagram point formats. Must be 1-32.
0x190C Invalid datagram point format data. C
(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-25
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

A Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d)
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
2 0x1A0C Datagram area size is too small to include data for all specified point formats.
0x1B0C Invalid number of Control Program Names. Must be 1-8.
3 0x1C0C SNP-X Request exceeds maximum data size (1000 bytes).
Must use a smaller data length. Use multiple COMMREQs if necessary.
0x1D0C Invalid SNP-X communication session type.
4 Must be 0 for a single slave device, or 1 for multiple slave devices.
Illegal destination SNP ID specified for SNP-X slave. Must be 0-7 ASCII characters, plus a terminating
0x1E0C null character (00h). The Null SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single device. The
5 Broadcast SNP ID (eight bytes of FFh) may be use to specify all slave devices on the serial link.
Destination SNP ID does not match SNP-X session type.
0x1F0C The Broadcast SNP ID is not permitted in a single-slave SNP-X session.

6 0x200C
The Null SNP ID is not permitted in a multiple-slave SNP-X session.
Inactivity timeout (T3’). The SNP slave has not received any new SNP messages within the configured T3’
time interval.

7 0x200F Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Request message.

The message type of an X-Request message must be 58h = ’X’.
A Parity error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Real–time Datagram message.
0x210C Communications have not been established.
8 Invalid Next Message Type or Next Message Length field in a received X Request message. If this request
does not use a buffer (0-2 bytes of data), the Next Message Type must be zero. If this request will be
0x210F followed with a buffer message (more than 2 byte.)), the Next Message Type must be 54h = ’T’, and the
9 Next Message Length must specify the length of the X-Buffer message. Valid X-Buffer message lengths are
9-1008 bytes (data length plus 8 bytes).
0x220C A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
10 0x220F
Datagram message. Communications have not been established.
Invalid Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message.
The message type of an X-Buffer message must be 54h = ’T’.
11 0x230C A Framing or Overrun serial error has occurred on an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
Datagram message. Communications have not been established.
0x230F Invalid Next Message Type field in a received X-Buffer message. Since an X-Buffer message is never
12 0x240C
followed by another message, the Next Message Type must always be zero.
An invalid SNP message type was received when an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
Datagram message was required. Communications have not been established.

13 0x250C An invalid next message length value was specified in an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
Datagram message. Communications have not been established.
An unexpected SNP message type was received when an Attach, Attach Response, or Update Realtime
0x260C Datagram was required. Communications have not been established.
14 0x270C Another Break was received while SNP slave was waiting for an Attach or Update Realtime Datagram
message.
An SNP message has been sent and retried the maximum number of times.
A 0x280C A maximum of two retries are permitted.
A retry is caused by a NAK from from the remote SNP device.
A received SNP message has been NAKed the maximum number of two times.
B 0x290C The NAKed message may be retransmitted a maximum of two times.
(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)
C
D

A-26 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x2A0C An unknown message was received when an acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was required. 2
0x2B0C Sequence Error. An unexpected SNP message type was received.
0x2C0C Received SNP message contains bad next message length value.
Acknowledge timeout. An acknowledge (ACK or NAK) was not received within the configured T2 time
3
0x2D0C interval. A slave device may generate this error if the master device has aborted after maximum response

0x2E0C
NAKs and does not NAK the next response retry.
Response timeout. The SNP Master did not receive an SNP Response message within the configured T5’
4
time interval.
0x2F0C Buffer message timeout. An expected Text Buffer or Connection Data message was not received within the
configured T5’’ time interval. 5
Serial output timeout. The CMM module was unable to transmit a Break, an SNP message, or SNP
0x300C acknowledge (ACK or NAK) from the serial port. (May be due to missing CTS signal when the CMM
module is configured to use hardware flow control.) 6
0x310C SNP slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU.
0x320C COMMREQ timeout.
The COMMREQ did not complete within the configured time interval. 7
0x330C An SNP Request or Response was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break.
0x340C PLC backplane communications error
Invalid Piggyback Status data memory type or address.
8
0x350C Communications have not been established.
0x360C Invalid SNP Slave SNP ID. Must be a 0-7 ASCII characters, plus a terminating null character (00h). The Null
SNP ID (eight bytes of 00h) may be used to specify any single slave device.
9
The SNP master has received a response message containing an unexpected data length. Usually indicates
0x370C a problem with the remote SNP slave device. May occur when Series 90-70 commands (Task Memory or
Program Block Memory Read/Write) are issued to a Series 90-30 slave device.
10
Response code in received SNP-X response message does not match expected value. (Response code
0x380C

0x390C
must equal the request code +80h.)
SNP-X Response message exceeds maximum data size (decimal 1000 bytes).
11
Data in the Response is ignored.
0x400C A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X
communication session. Communications have not been established. 12
0x400D The requested service is not supported by the SNP slave.
0x400F Serial output timeout. The slave was unable to transmit an SNP-X message from the serial port. (May be
due to missing CTS signal when the CMM module is configured to use hardware flow control.)
13
(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.) 14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-27
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

A Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d)
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
2 0x410C
A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new
SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
3 0x410D SNP slave on CMM module requires PLC CPU privilege level 2 to operate. The SNP slave has rejected a
request to change to a higher or lower privilege level.

4 0x410F

0x420C
An SNP-X request was aborted prior to completion due to reception of a Break.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new
SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
5 0x420D
SNP Request or Response message exceeds maximum data length of the CMM module. (Total data length
for Mailbox and all following Buffer messages is 2048 bytes.) The master must use a smaller data length.
Use multiple requests if total data length exceeds the maximum value.
6 0x420F An X-Buffer message was received containing greater than 1000 bytes of data. The data is ignored.
An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when establishing a new

7 0x430C SNP-X communication session.

Communications have not been established.
Improper Write Datagram message format. Series 90-70 slave devices use a different format for this
message than Series 90-30 or Series 90-20 slave devices. The master must use the proper message
8 0x430D format for this SNP slave device. (The SNP master in the CMMmodule sends this message as part of the
Establish Datagram COMMREQ command. The datagram has been partially established, but is not usable;
the datagram should be cancelled by using the Datagram ID returned by the COMMREQ.)
9 0x430F The SNP-X slave did not receive a response from the Service Request Processor in the PLC CPU.
An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a
0x440C new SNP-X communication session.
10 0x440D
Communications have not been established.
A datagram error occurred in a Series 90-70 slave device (dual-port error).

11 0x440F PLC backplane communications error.

An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when establishing a new SNP-X
0x450C communication session.

12 Communications have not been established.

An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when
establishing a new SNP-X communication session. The master has retried the X-Attach message twice
0x460C without receiving a response.
13 Communications have not been established.
A parity error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing SNP-X
0x500C communication session.
14 0x500F
Communications have not been established.
A parity error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.

A 0x510C
A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an
existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.

B 0x510F

0x520C
A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an
existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
C 0x520F A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Attach message.

(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)
D

A-28 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value

0x530C
An invalid message type was received when an X-Attach Response was required when re-establishing an
existing SNP-X communication session.
2
Communications have not been established.
0x530F An invalid Message Type was received when an X-Attach message was required. (For an X-Attach
message, the message type must be 58h = ’T’.)
3
An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing
0x540C an existing SNP-X communication session.
Communications have not been established.
4
An invalid Next Message Type value was detected in a received X-Attach message. (For an X-Attach
0x540F message, the Next Message Length must be zero.)
An invalid response code was detected in an X-Attach Response message when re-establishing an existing
5
0x550C SNP-X communication session.

0x550F
Communications have not been established.
An invalid request code was detected in a received X-Attach message.
6
An expected X-Attach Response message was not received within the response timeout interval when
0x560C re-establishing an existing SNP-X communication session. The master has retried the X-Attach message
twice without receiving a response. Communications have not been established.
7
0x600C A parity error has occurred on an X-Response message.
0x600F A parity error has occurred in a received X-Request message. 8
0x610C A framing or overrun error has occurred on an X-Response message.
0x610F
0x620C
A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Request message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an X-Response message.
9
0x620F A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Request message.
0x630C An invalid message type was received when an X-Response message was required. 10
0x640C An invalid next message type value was detected in an X-Response message.
0x650C
0x660C
An invalid response code was detected in an X-Response message.
An expected X-Response message was not received within the response time.
11
0x700C A parity error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
0x700F A parity error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message. 12
0x710C A framing or overrun error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
0x710F
0x720C
A framing or overrun error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message.
A BCC (Block Check Code) error has occurred on an Intermediate Response message.
13
0x720F A BCC(Block Check Code) error has occurred in a received X-Buffer message.
0x730C An invalid message type was received when an Intermediate Response message was required. 14
0x730F An expected X-Buffer message was not received.
0x740C
0x750C
An invalid next message type value was detected in an Intermediate Response message.
An invalid response code was detected in an Intermediate Response message.
A
0x760C An expected Intermediate Response message was not received within the response timeout interval.
B
(PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-29
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

A Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d)
Description
2 PLC-499 Hex Value
0x8D0A Bad DOS Version. Must have DOS 2.0, or later, to support the SNP DOS Driver.
0x8E0A PC Serial port configured for SNP Master driver is not open; no communication can take place.
3 0x8F0A Out–of–Sequence SNP message. SNP message type received was not the type expected.
Bad SNP BCC encountered. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to a bad Block Check
0x900A Code.
4 0x910A Bad SNP communication. Transmission was aborted after maximum retries due to serial errors (that is,
parity, overrun, or framing errors).
No SNP communication. Either communication has been lost or a communication session has not been
5 0x920A
0xC105
established.
Invalid block state transition.
0xC205 The OEM key is NULL (inactive).
6 0xC305 Text length does not match traffic type.
0xC405 Verify with FA Card or EEPROM failed.

7 0xC505
0xC605
No task–level Rack/Slot configuration to read or delete.
Control Program (CP) tasks exist but requestor not logged into main CP.
0xC705 Passwords are set to inactive and cannot be enabled or disabled.
8 0xC805 Password(s) already enabled and can not be forced inactive.
0xC905 Login using non–zero buffer size required for block commands.

9 0xCA05
0xCB05
Device is write–protected.
A comm or write verify error occurred during save or restore.
0xCC05 Data stored on device has been corrupted and is no longer reliable.
10 0xCD05 Attempt was made to read a device but no data has been stored on it.
0xCE05 Specified device has insufficient memory to handle request.

11 0xCF05
0xD005
Specified device is not available in the system (not present).
One or more PLC modules configured have unsupported revision.
0xD105 Packet size or total program size does not match input.
12 0xD205 Invalid write mode parameter.
0xD305 User Program Module (UPM) read or write exceeded block end.

13 0xD405
0xD505
Mismatch of configuration checksum.
Invalid block name specified in datagram.
0xD605 Total datagram connection memory exceeded.
14 0xD705 Invalid datagram type specified.
0xD805 Point length not allowed.

A 0xD905
0xDA05
Transfer type invalid for this Memory Type selector.
Null pointer to data in Memory Type selector.
0xDB05 Invalid Memory Type selector in datagram.
B 0xDC05 Unable to find connection address.
0xDD05 Unable to locate given datagram connection ID.

C 0xDE05
0xDF05
Size of datagram connection invalid.
Invalid datagram connection address.

D (PLC generated error codes for the GE 90-30 SNPX protocol continued on the next page.)

A-30 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol – PLC Error Code Tables (cont’d)

Panel Error Code
PLC Errors for GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol (Minor-Major) (cont’d) A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0xE005 Service in process cannot login. 2
0xE105 No I/O configuration to read or delete.
0xE205
0xE305
IOS could not delete configuration, or bad type.
CPU revision number does not match.
3
0xE405
0xE505
Memory Type for this selector does not exist.
DOS file area not formatted. 4
0xE605 CPU model number does not match.
0xE705
0xE805
Configuration is not valid.
No user memory is available to allocate.
5
0xE905
0xEA05
Memory Type selector not valid in context.
Not logged in to process service request. 6
0xEB05 Task unable to be deleted.
0xEC05
0xED05
Task unable to be created.
VME bus error encountered.
7
0xEE05
0xEF05
Could not return block sizes.
Programmer is already attached. 8
0xF005 Request only valid in stop mode.
0xF105
0xF205
Request only valid from programmer.
Invalid program cannot log in.
9
0xF305
0xF405
I/O configuration mismatch.
Invalid input parameter in request. 10
0xF505 Invalid password.
0xF605
0xF705
Invalid sweep state to set.
Required to log in to a task for service.
11
0xF805
0xF905
Invalid Task Name referenced.
Task address out of range. 12
0xFA05 Cannot replace I/O module.
0xFB05
0xFC05
Cannot clear I/O configuration.
I/O configuration is invalid.
13
0xFD05
0xFE05
Unable to perform auto configuration.
No privilege for attempted operation. 14
0xFF05 Service Request Error has been aborted.
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-31
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Mitsubishi FX Protocol – PLC Error Codes

A Only errors as listed in the Touch Panel Error Code Table shown on page A-3 can occur when
using the Mitsubishi FX protocol, there are no PLC generated errors.
2
3 Omron – Panel Error Code PLC-499 Explanation
4 The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error.
5 The possible PLC generated error codes for the Omron Host Link and FINS communication
protocol are represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
6
7 Error code 0011 returned from
PLC

8
9
10
11 Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value
Omron Error Code PLC-499 Message Example: of 0011 indicates an “Framing
12 error.” PLC error when using
the Omron Host Link protocol.

13
14
A
B
C
D

A-32 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron Host Link Protocol – PLC Error Code Table

The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the
Host Link protocol.
A
Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch 2
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.
3
PLC Error Codes for Omron Host Link
Panel Error Code Description
4
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0000
0x0001
Normal Completion.
Not executable in RUN mode.
5
0x0002 Not executable in MONITOR mode.
0x0003 Not executable with PROM mounted. 6
0x0004 Address over (data overflow).
0x000B
0x000C
Not executable in PROGRAM mode.
Not executable in DEBUG mode.
7
0x000D Not executable in LOCAL mode.
0x0010 Parity error. 8
0x0011 Framing error.
0x0012
0x0013
Overrun.
FCS error.
9
0x0014 Format error (parameter length error).
0x0015 Entry number data error (parameter error, data code error, data length error). 10
0x0016 Instruction not found.
0x0018
0x0019
Frame length error.
Not executable (due to Un-executable error clear, non-registration of I/O table, etc.).
11
I/O table generation impossible (unrecognized remote I/O unit, channel over, duplication of optical
0x0020
0x00A0
transmitting I/O unit).
Abort due to parity error in transmit data under process.
12
0x00A1 Abort due to framing error in transmit data under process.
0x00A2 Abort due to overrun in transmit data under process. 13
0x00A3 Abort due to FCS error in transmit data under process.
0x00A4
0x00A5
Abort due to format error in transmit data under process.
Abort due to frame length error in transmit data under process.
14
0x00A8 Abort due to entry number data error in transmit data under process.
0x00B0 Un-executable due to program area capacity other than 16k bytes. A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-33
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table

A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the
FINS protocol.
2 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-499
3 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.

PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS

4 Panel Error Code
PLC-499 Hex Value
Description

5 0x0000
0x0001
Normal Completion.
Service Canceled.
0x0101 Local Error: Local node not in network.
6 0x0102
0x0103
Local Error: Token Timeout.
Local Error: Retries Failed.

7 0x0104
0x0105
Local Error: Too many send frames.
Local Error: Node address range error.
0x0106 Local Error: Node Address Duplication.
8 0x0201
0x0202
Destination Node Error: Destination Node not in network.
Destination Node Error: Unit Missing.

9 0x0203
0x0204
Destination Node Error: Third Node missing.
Destination Node Error: Destination Node busy.
0x0205 Destination Node Error: Response Timeout.
10 0x0301
0x0302
Controller Error: Communications Controller Error.
Controller Error: CPU Unit Error.

11 0x0303
0x0304
Controller Error: Controller Error.
Controller Error: Unit number Error.
0x0401 Service Unsupported: Undefined Command.
12 0x0402
0x0501
Service Unsupported: Not supported by Model/Version.
Routing Table Error: Destination address setting error.

13 0x0502
0x0503
Routing Table Error: No routing tables.
Routing Table Error: Routing table error.
0x0504 Routing Table Error: Too many delays.
14 0x1001
0x1002
Command Format Error: Command too long.
Command Format Error: Command too short.

A 0x1003
0x1004
Command Format Error: Elements/Data don’t match.
Command Format Error: Command format error.
0x1005 Command Format Error: Header Error.
B 0x1101
0x1102
Parameter Error: Area classification missing.
Parameter Error: Access Size Error.

C 0x1103 Parameter Error: Address range error.

(PLC generated error codes for the Omron FINS protocol continued on the next page.)
D

A-34 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table (cont’d)

Panel Error Code
PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x1104 Parameter Error: Address range exceeded. 2
0x1106 Parameter Error: Program Missing.
0x1109
0x110A
Parameter Error: Relational Error.
Parameter Error: Duplicate Data Access.
3
0x110B
0x110C
Parameter Error: Response too long.
Parameter Error: Parameter Error. 4
0x2002 Read Not Possible: Protected.
0x2003
0x2004
Read Not Possible: Table missing.
Read Not Possible: Data missing.
5
0x2005
0x2006
Read Not Possible: Program missing.
Read Not Possible: File missing. 6
0x2007 Read Not Possible: Data mismatch.
0x2101
0x2102
Write Not Possible: Read Only.
Write Not Possible: Protected - cannot write data link table.
7
0x2103
0x2105
Write Not Possible: Cannot register.
Write Not Possible: Program missing. 8
0x2106 Write Not Possible: File missing.
0x2107
0x2108
Write Not Possible: File name already exists.
Write Not Possible: Cannot change.
9
0x2201
0x2202
Not executable in current mode: Not possible during execution.
Not executable in current mode: Not possible while running. 10
0x2203 Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Program).
0x2204
0x2205
Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Debug).
Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Monitor).
11
0x2206
0x2207
Not executable in current mode: Wrong PLC mode (Run).
Not executable in current mode: Specified node not polling node. 12
0x2208 Not executable in current mode: Step cannot be executed.
0x2301
0x2302
No such device: File device missing.
No such device: Missing memory.
13
0x2303
0x2401
No such device: Clock missing.
Cannot Start/Stop: Table missing. 14
0x2502 Unit Error: Memory Error.
0x2503
0x2504
Unit Error: I/O setting Error.
Unit Error: Too many I/O points.
A
0x2505
0x2506
Unit Error: CPU bus error.
Unit Error: I/O Duplication. B
(PLC generated error codes for the Omron FINS protocol continued on the next page.) C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-35
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron FINS Protocol – PLC Error Code Table (cont’d)

A Panel Error Code
PLC Error Codes for Omron FINS
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
2 0x2507 Unit Error: I/O bus error.
0x2509 Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS/2 error.
3 0x250A
0x250D
Unit Error: CPU Bus Unit Error.
Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS No. duplication.

4 0x250F
0x2510
Unit Error: Memory Error.
Unit Error: SYSMAC BUS terminator missing.
0x2601 Command Error: No protection.
5 0x2602
0x2604
Command Error: Incorrect password.
Command Error: Protected.

6 0x2605
0x2606
Command Error: Service already executing.
Command Error: Service stopped.
0x2607 Command Error: No execution right.
7 0x2608
0x2609
Command Error: Settings not complete.
Command Error: Necessary items not set.

8 0x260A
0x260B
Command Error: Number already defined.
Command Error: Error will not clear.
0x3001 Access Right Error: No access right.
9 0x4001 Abort: Service aborted.

10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

A-36 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron – Panel Error Code P495 Explanation

The PLC-495 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-495 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value embedded in the message.
A
This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the cause of the error.
The possible PLC generated error codes for the Omron CS/CJ FINS ethernet communication 2
protocol are represented by a hexadecimal value as shown in the following message example.
3
4
Error code 0504 returned from
PLC
5
6
7
Panel error code PLC-495 showing 8
a hexadecimal value of 0504
indicates a “Routing table error:
Too many relays” PLC error.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-37
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet Protocol – PLC Error Code Table

A The following table lists the errors that can be generated by the Omron PLC when using the
CS/CJ FINS Ethernet protocol.
2 Note: The following errors can be generated from the designated PLC, are monitored by the C-more touch
panel, and displayed on the touch panel’s screen as a hexadecimal value in panel error code PLC-495
3 message, if active. Please refer to the PLC manufacturer’s documentation for additional information.

PLC Error Codes for Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet

4 Panel Error Code Description
PLC-495 Hex Value
5 0103
0201
Local Error: Send Error from lack of buffer space. Try reducing Ethernet load to the module.
Destination Node Error: IP address of remote node not set correctly.
0202 Destination Node Error: No node with the specified unit address found.
6 0205
0301
Destination Node Error: Packet corrupted or Response timeout. Try increasing timeout.
Controller Error: Communications controller error.

7 0302
0304
Controller Error: CPU Unit error. Check error LEDs on PLC. Refer to documentation for that CPU.
Controller Error: Unit number error. Make sure Unit number is not used twice.
0401 Service unsupported: Undefined command.
8 0501
0502
Routing table error: Destination address setting error. Routing table incorrect.
Routing table error: No routing tables.

9 0503
0504
Routing table error: Routing table error.
Routing table error: Too many relays.
1001 Command format error: Command too long. Bad packet: check for electrical noise and grounding.
10 1002
1003
Command format error: Command too short. Bad packet: check for electrical noise and grounding.
Command format error: Elements/data don’t match. Bad packet: check for electrical noise and grounding.

11 1005 Command format error: Header error. This is the error received when station # set in the command does
not match the station # of the Ethernet module.
1100 Parameter error: UDP socket number bad.

12 1101
1103
Parameter error: Address requested does not exist in PLC.
Parameter error: Address area requested in not accessible.
220F Status error: Duplicate Socket error.
13 2210 Status error: Specified socket not open.
2305 Environment Error: IP address conversion failed. Only encountered when using routing tables.

14 2307
2503
Environment Error: IP address conversion set for automatic.
Unit error: I/O setting error.
2505 Unit error: CPU bus error.
A 250A Unit error: CPU Bus Unit error.

B
C
D

A-38 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Siemens – Panel Error Code P499 Explanation

The PLC-499 error code is used to show any errors that are generated by the connected PLC.
The PLC-499 error message includes a four digit hexadecimal value displayed at the end of
A
the message. This value can be looked up in the specific PLC’s error tables to determine the
cause of the error. The possible PLC generated error codes for the Siemens PPI communication 2
protocols breakdown into a four digit hexadecimal value as shown in the following message
example. 3
Siemens Error Code PLC-499 Message Example:
4
Error code 0x8702 returned
from PLC
5
6
7
8
Panel error code PLC-499
showing a hexadecimal value of
0x8702 indicates an “Address is
9
invalid.” PLC error.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-39
 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Siemens PPI Protocol – PLC Error Code Table

A Panel Error Code
PLC PDU Header Errors for S7-200 PPI
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
2 0x0001 Hardware Fault.
0x0003 Object access not allowed: Occurs when access to Timer and Counter data type is set to Signed Integer
3 0x0004
and not BCD.
Context not supported.
Address out of range: Occurs when requesting an address within a Data Block that does not exist or is out
4 0x0005
0x0006
of range.
Address out of range.

5 0x0007
0x000A
Write Data size mismatch.
Object does not exist: Occurs when trying to request a Data Block that does not exist.
0x8000 Function being used.
6 0x8001
0x8101
Action is not allowed in current mode.
Hardware fault.

7 0x8103
0x8104
Access not allowed.
Function not supported.
0x8105 Address invalid.
8 0x8106 Data Type not supported.
0x8107 Data Type is not consistent with size.

9 0x810A
0x8500
Object does not exist.
PDU Size is incorrect.
0x8702 Address is invalid.
10 0xD201 Block name syntax error.
0xD202 Error with function parameter.
11 0xD203
0xD204
Error with block type.
No linked block.

12 0xD205
0xD206
Object already exists.
Object already exists.
0xD207 Block already used in EPROM.
13 0xD209
0xD20E
Block does not exist.
No Block does not exist.

14 0xD210 Block number incorrect.

A
B
C
D

A-40 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix A: Panel & PLC Error Code Tables

Siemens ISO over TCP Protocol – PLC Error Code Table

PLC PDU Header Errors for S7-200 CPU, S7-300, S7-1200 Ethernet
Panel Error Code
A
Description
PLC-499 Hex Value
0x0001 Hardware Fault. 2
0x0003 Object access not allowed: Occurs when access to Timer and Counter data type is set to Signed Integer

0x0004
and not BCD.
Context not supported.
3
Address out of range: Occurs when requesting an address within a Data Block that does not exist or is out
0x0005
0x0006
of range.
Address out of range.
4
0x0007
0x000A
Write Data size mismatch.
Object does not exist: Occurs when trying to request a Data Block that does not exist. 5
0x8000 Function being used.
0x8001
0x8101
Action is not allowed in current mode.
Hardware fault.
6
0x8103
0x8104
Access not allowed.
Function not supported. 7
0x8105 Address invalid.
0x8106 Data Type not supported. 8
0x8107 Data Type is not consistent with size.
0x810A
0x8500
Object does not exist.
PDU Size is incorrect.
9
0x8702 Address is invalid.
0xD201 Block name syntax error. 10
0xD202 Error with function parameter.
0xD203
0xD204
Error with block type.
No linked block.
11
0xD205
0xD206
Object already exists.
Object already exists. 12
0xD207 Block already used in EPROM.
0xD209
0xD20E
Block does not exist.
No Block does not exist.
13
0xD210 Block number incorrect.
14
A
B
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

A-41
Touch Panel Appendix
Runtime Errors
B
In this Appendix...
Introduction................................................................................................................ B-2
Runtime Errors............................................................................................................ B-3
 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Introduction
1 The C-more touch panels have diagnostics built-in to the operating system that monitor various
runtime functions that will display an error message on the panel’s display indicating that a
B particular error has occurred and what the error represents. The Error Message(s) is displayed
in the upper left area of the display screen. The Runtime Errors are also logged into the panel’s
Error log under the Information tab in the panel’s System Setup Screens. The Error Log
3 Code, such as RTE-031, is how the error is identified in the error log. See Chapter 5: System
Setup Screens for additional details. The tables that follow show the possible Runtime Errors
4 and include the error message, log error code, tag error code value, cause, etc.
The user can include in their touch panel project the use of this diagnostic information by
5 using the system tag name SYS ERR ERRORCODE to control displayed screens, operator
messages, etc., and also communicate error information to the PLC or controlling device. If
a runtime error occurs, the SYS ERR ERRORCODE system tag will contain the numeric
6 value shown under the Tag Code Error Value. For example, if a Low Battery runtime error is
indicated, then the screen display will show Low Battery and the SYS ERR ERRORCODE
7 system tag will contain the value 2031. The value of the last runtime error detected will remain
in the SYS ERR ERRORCODE.

8 If you have difficulty determining the cause of the error, refer to Chapter 8: Troubleshooting
for additional help or contact our technical support group at 770-844-4200

9
Error Message
10
Low Battery

11
12
13 Stride™
Ethernet Switch
10/100 Base-T

14 (such as SE-SW5U)

A H0-ECOM/H0-ECOM100
Ethernet Module
1 C-more
Touch Panel Ethernet
Port

B
C DL06 PLC
(Bottom View)

D Ethernet CAT5
Cable - Straight-thru

B-2 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Runtime Errors
If there is more than one Runtime Error, then the Error Message displayed at the top of the
panel’s screen will display for 3 seconds, then be off for 2 seconds. The next Error Message
1
will display for the same time increments, continue through any other active runtime error
messages, and then start over. When only one Runtime Error is active, then that message will B
continuously be displayed until it is no longer active.
Error Error
Tag System 3
Error Message Error Screen
No. Log
Code
Located at upper left of screen
Message
Tag
Code Info >
Cause
4
Value Error
Log Error
The size of the destination
5
MM/DD/YY
SYS ERR memory is not large
1 RTE-001 Log Failed.
Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE 2001 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
RTE-001
enough to store the data.
See Log File Naming below.
6
2 RTE-002 Log Failed.
%Device% cannot be found
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2002
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
No device available or
the device is defective. 7
RTE-002 See Log File Naming below.

Log Failed. SYS ERR

Logging the data has failed
MM/DD/YY due to a problem such as 8
HH/MM/SS the memory write protect is
3 RTE-003 2003
Can not write file - %file% ERRORCODE Error Code enabled.
RTE-003
See Log File Naming below.
9
MM/DD/YY The data log buffer in the
4 RTE-004 Log cache memory is full
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2004 HH/MM/SS SRAM memory is full.
Error Code
10
RTE-004 See Log File Naming below.

Screen Capture 11
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS The size of the destination
1 RTE-011
Capture Failed. SYS ERR
Not enough Memory Space in %Device% ERRORCODE
2011 Error Code memory is not large
enough to store the data.
12
RTE-011

2 RTE-012
Capture Failed. SYS ERR
2012
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS No device available or 13
%Device% cannot be found ERRORCODE Error Code the device is defective.
RTE-012
MM/DD/YY Logging the data has failed
14
Capture Failed. SYS ERR HH/MM/SS due to a problem such as
3 RTE-013 2013
Can not write file - %file% ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-013
the memory write protect is
enabled. A
Table continued

Log File Naming

B
The Log file name is formed automatically in the panel. The visible file name has the format:
Screen Name + “_” + Object name + “_” + Date Stamp YYMMDD + “.txt”
C
Internal to the panel, the file references are stored as the first four characters of the file name +
”~” + a serial number between 000 and 999 + “.txt” So, any “group” of filenames is limited D
to 999 members.

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

B-3
 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

For Example: The following filenames form the same group. All filenames start with “Scre”:
Screen1_Trend1_yymmdd.txt
1 Screen2_Trend2_yymmdd.txt
Screen3_Trend3_yymmdd.txt
B If an attempt is made to store more than 999 files in a “group” the panel will return RTE-
001, RTE-002, RTE-003 or RTE-004.
3 Visible File Name
Screen1_Trend1_150101.txt
Internal File Name
SCRE~001.TXT

4 Screen2_Trend2_150101.txt
Screen3_Trend3_150101.txt
SCRE~002.TXT
SCRE~003.TXT
Screen1_Trend1_150102.txt SCRE~004.TXT
5 Screen2_Trend2_150102.txt
Screen3_Trend3_150102.txt
SCRE~005.TXT
SCRE~006.TXT
...
6 Screen1_Trend1_151129.txt
Screen2_Trend2_151129.txt
SCRE~997.TXT
SCRE~998.TXT
Screen3_Trend3_151129.txt SCRE~999.TXT
7 Screen1_Trend3_151130.txt Runtime Error RTE-001
Workaround: To minimize membership in any one group, change the Screen name and the
8 Object name so the first four characters of the visible file name are unique
For example,
9 Screen Names: S1, S2
Object Names: AAA, BAA
10
Visible File Name Internal File Name
11 S1_AAA_150101.txt S1_A~001.TXT
S1_BAA_150101.txt S1_B~001.TXT
12 S2_AAA_150101.txt
S2_BAA_150101.txt
S2_A~001.TXT
S2_B~001.TXT
S1_AAA_150102.txt S1_A~002.TXT
13 S1_BAA_150102.txt
S2_AAA_150102.txt
S1_B~002.TXT
S2_A~002.TXT
S2_BAA_150102.txt S2_B~002.TXT
14 …
S1_AAA_151231.txt S1_A~365.TXT
A S1_BAA_151231.txt
S2_AAA_151231.txt
S1_B~365.TXT
S2_A~365.TXT
S2_BAA_151231.txt S2_B~365.TXT
B Note that there is no conflict between file names and since no log group will exceed 365
(days) the 999 member limit is never exceeded.
C
D

B-4 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Runtime Errors (cont’d)

Error Error
Tag System 1
Error Message Error Screen
No. Log Message Cause
Code
Located at upper left of screen
Tag
Code
Value
Info >
Error
B
Handshake
A communications
3
timeout occurred when

1 RTE-021 Handshake Timeout Error

SYS ERR
2021
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
either a Recipe or
Numeric Entry Object, in 4
ERRORCODE Error Code which Notification and
RTE-021 Handshake signals are
used, failed to complete
the responses.
5
Battery
MM/DD/YY The panel’s backup battery
6
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS voltage level has fallen
1 RTE-031 Low Battery
ERRORCODE
2031
Error Code
RTE-031
below 1.8 VDC and should
be replaced.
7
e-mail
MM/DD/YY An incorrect SMTP
8
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS address has been entered
1 RTE-041 E-mail Connection Error %Address%
ERRORCODE
2041
Error Code
RTE-041
into the Touch Panel
Network dialog screen. 9
MM/DD/YY
2 RTE-042 Send E-mail Error %Address%
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2042
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
An incorrect email address
has been entered into the 10
Address Book.
RTE-042
Send FTP 11
MM/DD/YY An incorrect FTP Service
1 RTE-051
FTP Connection Error
%Address%&%ID%
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2051
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
has been assigned into
the Touch Panel Network 12
RTE-051 dialog screen.

Send FTP Error SYS ERR

MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Permission to write to the
FTP folder has not been
13
2 RTE-052 2052 authorized. The FTP site
%Address%&%ID% ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-052
may require a user ID and
password. 14
Sound

SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
The sound file failed to A
1 RTE-081 Sound Failed. Not enough Memory 2081 play due to insufficient
ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-081
memory.
B
Confiict

IP Address Conflict - Corrct IP Address SYS ERR

MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
C
1 RTE-091 2091 Conflict of IP Address
and Power Cycle ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-091 D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

B-5
 Appendix B: Touch Panel Runtime Errors

Runtime Errors (cont’d)

1 Error Error
Tag System
Error Message Error Screen
No. Log Message Cause
B Code
Located at upper left of screen
Tag
Code
Value
Info >
Error
3 Multiple Recipe
MM/DD/YY
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS The recipe file or data
1 RTE-101 Record doesn’t exist 2101
4 ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-101
doesn’t exist.

MM/DD/YY
5 2 RTE-102 File cannot open
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2102 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
RTE-102
The recipe file cannot be
opened.

6 3 RTE-103 E-mail Connection Error %Address%

SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2103
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Error Code
Abnormality is found in
the numberic character
data of the recipe file.
RTE-103
7 SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Abnormality is found in
4 RTE-104 Send E-mail Error %Address% 2104 the Tag data of the recipe
ERRORCODE Error Code
8 RTE-104
MM/DD/YY
file.
Recipe was operated by
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS
5 RTE-105 Recipe - Index (%Row%) error 2105 the record number outside
9 ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-105 the range.
MM/DD/YY
10 6 RTE-106 Not enough buffer memory
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2106 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
RTE-106
Memory allocation error

MM/DD/YY
11 7 RTE-107 File cannot write
SYS ERR
ERRORCODE
2107 HH/MM/SS
Error Code
There was an error trying
to write the recipe file.
RTE-107
12 8 RTE-108 Wrong file format
SYS ERR
2108
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS The recipe file format is
ERRORCODE Error Code incorrect.
13 RTE-108
MM/DD/YY
SYS ERR HH/MM/SS Insufficient storage space
9 RTE-109 Not enough Memory Space in %Device% 2109
14 ERRORCODE Error Code
RTE-109
on media.

Action
A SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
The number of actions
executed in the event
1 RTE-121 Action Overflows 2121
ERRORCODE Error Code exceeded the maximum
B RTE-121 number.
SRAM Error
C SYS ERR
MM/DD/YY
HH/MM/SS
Memory in Panel has
1 RTE-500 SRAM Check Sum Error 2500 been Corrupted by Power
ERRORCODE Error Code
D RTE-500 Loss, etc.

B-6 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

Mounting Clips Appendix
Prior April 2006
C
In this Appendix...
Introduction................................................................................................................ C-2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C Original Mounting Clips.............................. C-3
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C Original Mounting Clips.............................. C-4
EA7-T8C Original Mounting Clips.............................................................................. C-5
EA7-T8C Original Mounting Clips.............................................................................. C-6
EA7-T10C Original Mounting Clips............................................................................ C-7
EA7-T10C Original Mounting Clips............................................................................ C-8
EA7-T12C Original Mounting Clips............................................................................ C-9
EA7-T12C Original Mounting Clips.......................................................................... C-10
EA7-T15C Original Mounting Clips.......................................................................... C-11
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

Introduction
1 The mounting clips supplied with C-more touch panels after April 2006 are slightly different
than the original clips. Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006 has been included
2 in the Hardware User Manual for the end user to have a reference to the drawings and
information pertaining to the original mounting clips. The enclosure mounting thickness range
and screw torque range has remained the same for each type of touch panel. The basic physical
C construction and use of the mounting clips remains the same, as does the various touch panel
cutout dimensions.
4 The 6” touch panels use two long style mounting clips. The new 6” mounting clips have been
redesigned to increase rigidity and also the screw position height has been increased to allow
5 easier placement in the touch panel slots on thicker enclosures.
The 8”-15” touch panels, depending on the panel’s size, use either 6 or 8 smaller style
6 mounting clips. The new 8”-15” mounting clips have been made shorter in height to allow
easier installation. Their rigidity remains the same.

7
8 Original Original
6” Mounting Clips 8-15” Mounting Clip
9
10
11
12
13 Newer Newer
6” Mounting Clips 8-15” Mounting Clip
14
A
B
C
D

C-2 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
7.402
[188.0] C
1.500
[38.1]
Gasket
4
0.197
Units: inches[mm]
Mounting Clip
(2) places 5
[5.0]
8.047
[204.4]
6
7
8
6.140
[156.0] 5.458
[138.6]
9
10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
14
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip A
Enclosure Mounting Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
Thickness Range
6” – lower mounting
clip position
0.039 - 0.24 inch
[1 – 6 mm]
35 ~ 50 oz-in
[0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm] B
6” – upper mounting 0.20 - 0.63 inch 35 ~ 50 oz-in
clip position [5 – 16 mm] [0.25 ~ 0.35 Nm] C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

C-3
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C

1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:

C 7.460 +0.04
-0.0
[189.5 +1.0
-0.0]
Mounting Clip
(2) places
0.866
4 [22.0]

0.294
5 0.315
[8.0]
[7.5]

0.294
6 5.512 +0.04
-0.0
[7.5] CUTOUT
[140.0 +1.0
-0.0 ] Bezel Outline
7 0.315
Cutout Outline

[8.0] Units: inches[mm]

8
0.866
9 [22.0]

6.413 0.591
10 0.591
[15.0]
[162.9] [15.0]

11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D

C-4 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T8C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
9.159
[232.6] C
Gasket
1.738
[44.1]
4
0.315 Units: inches[mm]
5
[8.0]
10.894
[276.7]
Mounting Clip
(6) places 6
7
8
8.748 6.993
9
[222.2] [177.6]

10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges 14
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
A
Screw Torque
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque B
0.039 - 0.20 inch 42 ~ 57 oz-in
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

C-5
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T8C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:

C 0.394
[10.0]
9.250 +0.04
-0.0
[235.0 +1.0
-0.0]
0.394
[10.0]

4 0.822
[20.9]
4.625
[117.5]
0.822
[20.9]
0.394
[10.0]

5
6 Mounting Clip
(6) places
CUTOUT 0.837
7 [21.3]
7.075 +0.04
8
-0.0
[179.7 +1.0
-0.0 ]
Cutout Outline

9 Bezel Outline Units: inches [mm] 3.537

[89.9]

10
11
0.837 0.394
12 [21.3] [10.0]

13
14
A
B
C
D

C-6 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T10C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
11.820
[300.2] C
Gasket
1.685
[42.8] 4
0.394
5
[10.0]
Units: inches [mm]
13.661
[347.0]
6
Mounting Clip
(6) places 7
8
9
10.669
[271.0] 8.828
[224.2] 10
11
12
13
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
14
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque A
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range
Touch
Panel Size
Enclosure
Thickness Range
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
B
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm] C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

C-7
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T10C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:
0.394 11.908 +0.04 0.394
C [10.0]
-0.0
[302.5 +1.0
-0.0] [10.0]

5.954
4 0.877
[22.3] [151.2]
0.877
[22.3]

5 Mounting Clip
(6) places
0.876
[22.3]
0.394
[10.0]

6
7
CUTOUT
8
8.917 +0.04
-0.0

9 Cutout Outline
[226.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]

4.459
10 Units: inches [mm]
[113.2]

Bezel Outline
11
12
0.876 0.394

13 [22.3] [10.0]

14
A
B
C
D

C-8 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T12C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
12.430
[315.7] Gasket C
1.681
[42.7]
4
5
0.394 Units: inches [mm]
[10.0]
13.366
[339.5]
Mounting Clip
(6) places 6
7
8
9
10.088
11.024
[280.0] [256.2] 10
11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque A
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
Enclosure Mounting
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip B
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range Screw Torque
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” 0.039 - 0.20 inch
[1 – 5 mm]
42 ~ 57 oz-in
[0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
C
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

C-9
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T12C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:

C 0.354
[9.0]
12.579 +0.04
-0.0
[319.5 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.354
[9.0]

4 0.394
[10.0]
6.289
[159.7]
0.394
[10.0] 0.354
[9.0]
5
6
Mounting Clip
7 (6) places
CUTOUT
0.394
[10.0]

8 10.236 +0.04
-0.0
[260.0 +1.0
-0.0]

9
10 Units: inches [mm]
5.118
[130.0]
Cutout Outline

11
Bezel Outline
12
0.394 0.354
13 [10.0] [9.0]

14
A
B
C
D

C-10 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T15C
Original Mounting Clips 1
Dimensions: 2
14.892
[378.3] C
Gasket
1.654
[42.0]
4
5
0.394 Units: inches[mm]
[10.0]
16.748
6
[425.4] Mounting Clip
(8) places 7
8
9
13.000 11.230 10
[330.2] [285.2]
11
12
13
14
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges A
and Mounting Clip Screw Torque
Mounting Clip
Screw Torque
B
Touch Enclosure Mounting Clip
Enclosure Mounting
Thickness Range Panel Size Thickness Range
0.039 - 0.20 inch
Screw Torque
42 ~ 57 oz-in
C
8”, 10”, 12” & 15” [1 – 5 mm] [0.3 ~ 0.4 Nm]
D

® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

C-11
 Appendix C: Mounting Clips Prior April 2006

EA7-T15C
1 Original Mounting Clips
2 Cutout Dimensions:

C 0.395
[10.0]
14.960 +0.04
-0.0
[380.0 +1.0
-0.0 ]
0.395
[10.0]

0.894 7.480 0.894

4 [22.7] [190.0] [22.7] 0.406
[10.3]

5
6 Mounting Clip
(8) places
0.864
[21.9]

7 CUTOUT

11.276 +0.04
8 -0.0
[286.4 +1.0
-0.0 ]

9 Cutout Outline
5.638
[143.2]
Units: inches[mm]
10 Bezel Outline

11
12 0.864
[21.9]
0.406
[10.3]

13
14
A
B
C
D

C-12 ® EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18

Index

6” Adapter Plate, 4–9

6” Adapter Plate Assembly, 3–18
6” Adapter Plate Cutout Dimensions, 3–17, 4–10
6” Adapter Plate Dimensions, 3–17, 4–10
6” Adapter Plate Installation, 3–18

A
AC Wiring Diagram, 4–14
AC/DC power adapter, 1–4
AC/DC Power Adapter, 3–5
AC/DC Power Adapter Dimensions, 3–7
AC/DC Power Adapter Installation, 3–8
AC/DC Power Adapter Specifications, 3–6
AC/DC Power Adapter Wiring, 3–5
Accessories, 3–2
Accessories at a glance, 3–4
Accessories Overview, 3–3
Adapter Plate, 3–17
Agency Approvals, 4–12
Analog touch screen, 1–4
Available Models, 2–2

C
C-more Touch Panel Error Code Table, A–3
CF Card Interface Module, 3–12
CF Card Interface Module Installation, 3–13
Chemical Compatibility, 2–27
Comm Port Adapter, 3–19
Index

Communications Ports, 2–21

Ethernet Port, 2–21
PLC Port, 2–22
Sound Interface (Audio Line Out), 2–22
USB Port A, 2–22
USB Port B, 2–22
CompactFlash Memory, 3–14
CompactFlash Memory Card Installation, 3–15
Conventions Used, 1–3
Cutout Dimensions, 4–4
EA7-T10C, 4–6
EA7-T12C, 4–7
EA7-T15C, 4–8
EA7-T8C, 4–5
cutout template, 4–3

D
Data Logging - Memory Device Full, 2–26
Data Logging Function and Logging Media, 2–26
Date Code, 1–5
DC Wiring Diagram, 4–13
Dimensions, 2–10
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, T6CL-R, S6M, S6C, T6C, T6CL, 2–10
EA7-T10C, 2–14
EA7-T12C, 2–16
EA7-T15C, 2–18
EA7-T8C, 2–12
DirectLOGIC PLCs Password Protection, 6–2

E
E-mail client, 1–4
EA-AC, 1–15
Enclosure Mounting Thickness Ranges, 4–4, 4–5, 4–6, 4–7, 4–8
Error Log Code, B–2
Error Message(s), B–2
Event Manager, 1–4

®
i-2 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Index

Expansion Assembly, 3–9

Expansion Assembly Details, 3–9
Expansion Assembly Dimensions, 3–9
Expansion Assembly Installation, 3–10
External Memory Devices, 2–25
EZTouch, 4–9
EZTouch Conversion and Mounting, 1–6
EZTouch Touch Panel Cross Reference to C-more, 1–7

F
FTP client/server, 1–4

I
Installation and Wiring, 4–3
Introduction, 4–3

L
LED Status Indicator, 4–13

M
Maintenance, 7–2
Adjust Touch Panel, 7–4
Check Error Log, 7–4
Check Memory Usage, 7–4
Check Physical Conditions, 7–3
Check Project Functionality, 7–6
Check/Adjust Display Brightness or Contrast, 7–4
Checks from C-more Programming Software, 7–6
Cleaning the Display Screen, 7–5
CPU LED indicator, 7–2
Operating Environment, 7–2
Operating Voltage, 7–2
Power LED (PWR) indicator, 7–2
Project Backup, 7–2
Replace Battery Periodically, 7–5
Run Tests under System Setup Screens, 7–3

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
i-3
Index

Status Indicators, 7–2

Test Beeper/Sound, 7–3
Test Comm. Port, 7–3
Test Display, 7–3
Test Touch Panel, 7–3
TxD and RxD LED, 7–2
Marine Use, 4–12
Memory Menu, 5–35
Backup, 5–37
Project Executed from CompactFlash (CF Slot #1), 5–36
Memory Organization, 2–24
Model Specifications, 2–3
Mounting Clearances, 2–20, 4–11
6” Adapter Plate Assembly, 4–9
air flow, 4–11
Mounting Clip Screw Torque, 2–10, 2–12, 2–14, 2–16, 2–18, 4–4, 4–5, 4–6, 4–7, 4–8
mounting clips, 4–3
Mounting Clips, 1–3
New Style, 1–3
Mounting Clips Prior April 2006, C–2
EA7-S6M-R, S6C-R, S6M, S6C and T6C, C–3
EA7-T10C, C–7
EA7-T12C, C–9
EA7-T15C, C–11
EA7-T8C, C–5
Mounting Thickness Ranges, 2–10, 2–12, 2–14, 2–16, 2–18

P
Panel Depth, 3–2, 3–7, 3–9, 3–19
AC/DC Power Adapter Installed, 3–7
Expansion Assembly Installed, 3–9
Panel Error Code P495, A–37
Omron, A–37
Panel Error Code PLC-496, 497 and 498, A–11
Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP Protocol, A–11
Panel Error Code PLC-499, A–5
Allen-Bradley, A–8

®
i-4 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Index

DirectLOGIC, A–5
Modbus Protocols, A–6
AutomationDirect CLICK, A–6
AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC - Modbus (Koyo), A–6
Entivity Modbus RTU, A–6
Modicon Modbus RTU, A–6
Omron, A–32
Productivity3000 Error Code P499, A–7
Siemens, A–39
Part Number Key, 1–5
PLC Communication Cables & Wiring Diagrams, 6–5, 6–6
PLC Error Codes
Allen-Bradley – EtherNet/IP Protocol, A–12
Allen-Bradley DF1 & DH485 Protocols, A–9
DirectLOGIC K-Sequence Protocol, A–5
GE 90-30 SNPX Protocol, A–23
Generic EtherNet IP Protocol, A–21
Mitsubishi FX Protocol, A–32
Modbus Protocols, A–6
AutomationDirect CLICK, A–6
AutomationDirect DirectLOGIC - Modbus (Koyo), A–6
Entivity Modbus RTU, A–6
Modicon Modbus RTU, A–6
Omron CS/CJ FINS Ethernet Protocol, A–38
Omron FINS Protocol, A–34
Omron Host Link Protocol, A–33
Siemens ISO over TCP Protocol, A–41
Siemens PPI Protocol, A–40
PLCs and protocols, 6–2
Allen-Bradley, 6–22
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-232C Serial, 6–7
AutomationDirect PLCs RS-422A/RS-485A, 6–10
Direct LOGIC Universal Converter, p/n F2-UNICON, 6–17
Direct LOGIC Universal Isolated Network Adapter, p/n FA-ISOCON, 6–16
GE, 6–27
GE VersaMax Micro, 6–27
Mitsubishi, 6–27

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
i-5
Index

Modicon Micro Series, 6–30

Modicon ModBus RS-232, 6–30
Modicon ModBus with RJ45, 6–30
Omron, 6–29
Siemens, 6–31
Ports & Memory Expansion, 2–11, 2–13, 2–15, 2–17, 2–19
Power Fault, 4–14
Power Loss Detection and Power Retention Period, 2–26
Product Overview, 1–4
Products with CE marks, 4–2
Providing Power to the Touch Panel, 4–13

Q
Quick Start Steps, 1–9
Step 1 – Unpack and Inspect, 1–9
Step 10 – Install the Programming Software and Develop a Project, 1–13
Step 2 – Assemble Temporary Support Stand, 1–10
Step 3 – Install Optional Hardware Accessories, 1–11
Step 4 – Become Familiar with Available Communication Ports, 1–12
Step 5 – Connect Touch Panel to Computer, 1–14
Step 6 – Provide Power to the Touch Panel, 1–15
Step 7 – Access the Touch Panel Setup Screens, 1–16
Step 8 – Choose Touch Panel to PLC Protocol & Cables, 1–17
Step 9 – Connect Touch Panel to PLC, 1–20

R
Replacement Parts, 9–1
6-15” Panel Gasket Replacements – EA-xx-GSK, 9–11
Installation Instructions, 9–11
6” Adapter Plate Gasket Replacement – EA-6-ADPTR-GSK, 9–14
Gasket Replacement Instructions, 9–14
6” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements – EA-BRK-1, 9–5
Installation Instructions, 9–5
8-15” Panel Backlight Bulb Replacements – EA-xx-BULB, 9–8
Installation Instructions Example, 9–8
8-15” Panel Bezel Replacement – EA-xx-BEZEL, 9–12
Replacement Instructions Example, 9–12

®
i-6 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Index

8–15” Panel Mounting Clip Replacements– EA-BRK-2, 9–6

Installation Instructions, 9–6
AC Power Adapter Connector Replacement– EA-AC-CON, 9–7
Battery Replacement – D2-BAT-1, 9–3
Battery Replacement Instructions, 9–3
DC Panel Power Connector Replacement – EA-DC-CON, 9–7
Replacement Parts at a Glance, 9–2
Replacement Parts Overview, 9–2
RS-422A/RS-485A Multi-Drop Wiring Diagram Examples, 6–16
Runtime Errors, B–3
Introduction, B–2

S
Safety Guidelines, 4–2
Screen Covers, 3–22
Non-glare, 3–22
Serial Number, 1–5
Setting Menu, 5–19
Adjust Clock, 5–20
Adjust Display, 5–21
Beeper, 5–23
IP Address Setting, 5–24
Specification, 2–4, 2–6
12” and 15” Full Feature Models, 2–9
6” Base Feature Models, 2–4
6” Full Feature Models, 2–5
6” Obsolete Models, 2–6
8” and 10” Full Feature Models, 2–8
Supplemental Manuals, 1–2
SYS ERR ERRORCODE, B–2
System Setup Screens, 5–1
Error tab, 5–18
Flowchart, 5–13
General tab, 5–15
Information, 5–15, 5–16, 5–17, 5–18
Main Menu, 5–14
Memory tab, 5–16

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
i-7
Index

Ports tab, 5–17

T
Tag Code Error Value, B–2
Technical Support, 1–2
Terminal Block Adapter, 3–20
Test Menu, 5–25
PLC Enquiry Test: Ethernet Connection, 5–32
PLC Enquiry Test: Serial Connection, 5–30
Serial Port Test, 5–29
Test Beep/Sound, 5–33
Test Communication Ports: Ethernet, 5–31
Test Communication Ports: Serial, 5–28
Test Display, 5–27
Test Touch Panel, 5–26
Troubleshooting
Data not Logging Problems, 8–23
Difficulty Connecting to the Panel over the Internet, 8–20
Internet Access, 8–20
Remote Access, 8–20
Display is Blank, 8–5
Display is Dim, 8–6
Electrical Noise Problems, 8–24
IP Address in System Setup Screens displays 0.0.0.0, 8–19
Loss of Date/Time and Retentive Data, 8–24
No Communications between Panel and PC, 8–8
No Communications between Panel and PLC, 8–16
No User Program, 8–7
Panel Constantly Displays “Initializing” when Powering up, 8–23
PLC Protocol Error Codes, 8–21
Toubleshooting Flow Chart, 8–3
Touch Panel does not Power up, 8–4
Touch Panel Runtime Errors, 8–22
USB Driver Troubleshooting, 8–10

®
i-8 EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
 Index

U
USB Programming Cable, 1–14

W
WARNING, 3–4
WAV File Specifications, 2–23
Web server, 1–4
Wiring Guidelines, 4–12

®
EA-USER-M Hardware User Manual, 2nd Ed. Rev. H, 05/18
i-9